Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide for the S5048F–ON System 9.14.2.2 July 2019 Rev.
Notes, cautions, and warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your product. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. © 2018 - 2019 Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Dell, EMC, and other trademarks are trademarks of Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries.
Contents Chapter 1: About this Guide......................................................................................................... 31 Audience...............................................................................................................................................................................31 Conventions.........................................................................................................................................................................
Removing a Command from EXEC Mode..............................................................................................................57 Moving a Command from EXEC Privilege Mode to EXEC Mode.................................................................... 57 Allowing Access to CONFIGURATION Mode Commands..................................................................................57 Allowing Access to Different Modes...........................................................................
Configuring Critical VLAN .............................................................................................................................................. 87 Configuring MAC addresses for a do1x Profile.......................................................................................................... 88 Configuring Request Identity Re-Transmissions........................................................................................................
Applying Egress Layer 3 ACLs (Control-Plane)..................................................................................................123 Configuring UDF ACL..................................................................................................................................................... 123 IP Prefix Lists....................................................................................................................................................................
Advanced BGP configuration tasks............................................................................................................................ 190 Route-refresh and Soft-reconfiguration..............................................................................................................190 Aggregating Routes...................................................................................................................................................193 Filtering BGP.................
Protocol to CPU Queue Mapping..........................................................................................................................238 Configuring Protocol to CPU Queue Mapping...................................................................................................239 Displaying CoPP Configuration .............................................................................................................................240 Chapter 12: Data Center Bridging (DCB)................
QoS dot1p Traffic Classification and Queue Assignment......................................................................................282 Configuring the Dynamic Buffer Method..................................................................................................................282 Sample DCB Configuration...........................................................................................................................................
Support for moving /128 IPv6 Prefixes and /32 IPv4 Prefixes .................................................................... 310 Chapter 15: FIP Snooping........................................................................................................... 311 Fibre Channel over Ethernet..........................................................................................................................................311 Ensure Robustness in a Converged Ethernet Network.........................
Configure GVRP Registration....................................................................................................................................... 341 Configure a GARP Timer............................................................................................................................................... 342 Chapter 19: Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)........................................................ 343 IGMP Protocol Overview.......................................
Configuration Tasks for Port Channel Interfaces.............................................................................................. 371 Creating a Port Channel........................................................................................................................................... 371 Adding a Physical Interface to a Port Channel................................................................................................... 371 Reassigning an Interface to a New Port Channel....
Configure Static Routes for the Management Interface...................................................................................... 406 Using the Configured Source IP Address in ICMP Messages..............................................................................406 Configuring the Duration to Establish a TCP Connection.................................................................................... 406 Enabling Directed Broadcast..............................................................
Configuration Tasks for IPv6........................................................................................................................................427 Adjusting Your CAM-Profile....................................................................................................................................427 Assigning an IPv6 Address to an Interface......................................................................................................... 428 Assigning a Static IPv6 Route..
Change the IS-IS Metric Style in One Level Only............................................................................................. 460 Leaks from One Level to Another......................................................................................................................... 462 Sample Configurations...................................................................................................................................................
Management TLVs....................................................................................................................................................493 TIA-1057 (LLDP-MED) Overview............................................................................................................................... 495 TIA Organizationally Specific TLVs.......................................................................................................................495 Configure LLDP..............
Chapter 30: Multicast Listener Discovery Protocol....................................................................536 MLD timers.......................................................................................................................................................................539 Reducing Host Response Burstiness....................................................................................................................539 Configuring MLD Version..................................
Object Tracking Overview............................................................................................................................................ 575 Track Layer 2 Interfaces......................................................................................................................................... 576 Track Layer 3 Interfaces.........................................................................................................................................
Configuration Task List for Policy-based Routing................................................................................................... 621 Create a Redirect List.............................................................................................................................................. 622 Create a Rule for a Redirect-list............................................................................................................................
Configuration Task List................................................................................................................................................. 664 Creating PVLAN ports............................................................................................................................................. 664 Creating a Primary VLAN........................................................................................................................................
Configuring Weights and ECN for WRED ................................................................................................................700 Configuring WRED and ECN Attributes.................................................................................................................... 702 Guidelines for Configuring ECN for Classifying and Color-Marking Packets...................................................
AAA Authentication......................................................................................................................................................... 741 Configuration Task List for AAA Authentication................................................................................................ 741 Obscuring Passwords and Keys...................................................................................................................................744 AAA Authorization.........
Debugging VLAN Stacking...................................................................................................................................... 783 VLAN Stacking in Multi-Vendor Networks..........................................................................................................783 VLAN Stacking Packet Drop Precedence................................................................................................................. 786 Enabling Drop Eligibility.......................
Copying Configuration Files via SNMP................................................................................................................. 811 Copying the Startup-Config Files to the Running-Config............................................................................... 812 Copying the Startup-Config Files to the Server via FTP................................................................................. 812 Copying the Startup-Config Files to the Server via TFTP.........................
Transceiver Monitoring..................................................................................................................................................843 Configuring SNMP context name............................................................................................................................... 844 Chapter 50: Storm Control........................................................................................................ 846 Configure Storm Control......................
Configuring a Source IP Address for NTP Packets.......................................................................................... 874 Configuring NTP Authentication........................................................................................................................... 875 Configuring NTP control key password...............................................................................................................
Interspersed VLANs................................................................................................................................................. 905 VLT on Core Switches.............................................................................................................................................905 Enhanced VLT............................................................................................................................................................
Dell-1 VLT Configuration......................................................................................................................................... 970 Dell-2 VLT Configuration..........................................................................................................................................971 Dell-3 VLT Configuration.........................................................................................................................................
VRRP in a VRF Configuration................................................................................................................................1018 VRRP for IPv6 Configuration............................................................................................................................... 1023 Chapter 63: Debugging and Diagnostics................................................................................... 1027 Offline Diagnostics...............................................
Online Certificate Status Protocol (OSCP)............................................................................................................1058 Configuring OCSP setting on CA........................................................................................................................ 1058 Configuring OCSP behavior..................................................................................................................................1059 Configuring Revocation Behavior...........
1 About this Guide This guide describes the protocols and features the Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) supports and provides configuration instructions and examples for implementing them. For complete information about all the CLI commands, see the Dell EMC Command Line Reference Guide for your system. The S5048F-ON platform is available with Dell EMC Networking OS version 9.12(1.0) and beyond. Though this guide contains information about protocols, it is not intended to be a complete reference.
2 Configuration Fundamentals The Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) command line interface (CLI) is a text-based interface you can use to configure interfaces and protocols. The CLI is largely the same for each platform except for some commands and command outputs. The CLI is structured in modes for security and management purposes. Different sets of commands are available in each mode, and you can limit user access to modes using privilege levels.
● EXEC mode is the default mode and has a privilege level of 1, which is the most restricted level. Only a limited selection of commands is available, notably the show commands, which allow you to view system information. ● EXEC Privilege mode has commands to view configurations, clear counters, manage configuration files, run diagnostics, and enable or disable debug operations. The privilege level is 15, which is unrestricted.
RSTP ROUTE-MAP ROUTER BGP BGP ADDRESS-FAMILY ROUTER ISIS ISIS ADDRESS-FAMILY ROUTER OSPF ROUTER OSPFV3 ROUTER RIP SPANNING TREE TRACE-LIST VLT DOMAIN VRRP UPLINK STATE GROUP GRUB Navigating CLI Modes The Dell EMC Networking OS prompt changes to indicate the CLI mode. The following table lists the CLI mode, its prompt, and information about how to access and exit the CLI mode.
Table 1.
Table 1.
Stack MAC Reload-Type : 34:17:eb:37:2d:00 : normal-reload [Next boot : normal-reload] -- Stack Info -Unit UnitType Status ReqTyp CurTyp Version Ports -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 Management online S5048F-ON S5048F-ON 9-12(1-28) 72 2 Member not present 3 Member not present 4 Member not present 5 Member not present 6 Member not present -- Power Supplies -Unit Bay Status Type FanStatus FanSpeed Power AvgPower AvgPowerStartTime --------------------------
● Enter ? after a command prompt to list all of the available keywords. The output of this command is the same as the help command. DellEMC#? bmp cd clear clock BMP commands Change current directory Reset functions Manage the system clock ● Enter ? after a partial keyword lists all of the keywords that begin with the specified letters. DellEMC(conf)#cl? class-map clock DellEMC(conf)#cl ● Enter [space]? after a keyword lists all of the keywords that can follow the specified keyword.
Short-Cut Key Action Combination CNTL-Z Ends continuous scrolling of command outputs. Esc B Moves the cursor back one word. Esc F Moves the cursor forward one word. Esc D Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the word. Command History The Dell EMC Networking OS maintains a history of previously-entered commands for each mode. For example: ● When you are in EXEC mode, the UP and DOWN arrow keys display the previously-entered EXEC mode commands.
Reload-Type : normal-reload [Next boot : normal-reload] The find keyword displays the output of the show command beginning from the first occurrence of specified text. The following example shows this command used in combination with the show system brief command.
Configuring alias command You can configure shorter alias names for single–line command input using the alias command. To configure the alias name, perform the following steps: 1. Configure the terminal to enter the Global Configuration mode. EXEC Privilege mode DellEMC#configure terminal 2. Configure the system to enter the alias-definition mode. CONFIGURATION mode DellEMC(conf)#alias-definition 3. Create the alias name followed by the single–line CLI.
Name: showipbr40 Definition: show ip interface brief | grep fortygig ignore-case -----------------------------------------------------------------DellEMC# 3. Display the details of a specific alias.
3 Getting Started This chapter describes how you start configuring your system. When you power up the chassis, the system performs a power-on self test (POST) and system then loads the Dell EMC Networking Operating System. Boot messages scroll up the terminal window during this process. No user interaction is required if the boot process proceeds without interruption. When the boot process completes, the system status LEDs remain online (green) and the console monitor displays the EXEC mode prompt.
Accessing the Console Port To access the console port, follow these steps: For the console port pinout, refer to Accessing the RJ-45 Console Port with a DB-9 Adapter. 1. Install an RJ-45 copper cable into the console port. Use a rollover (crossover) cable to connect the console port to a terminal server. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the DTE terminal server. 3.
1. Power on the PC. 2. Connect the USB-A end of cable into an available USB port on the PC. 3. Connect the micro USB-B end of cable into the micro USB-B console port on the system. 4. Power on the system. 5. Install the necessary USB device drivers. (To download the drivers, go to https://www.dell.com/support.) For assistance, contact Dell EMC Networking Technical Support. 6. Open your terminal software emulation program to access the system. 7.
2. Assign an IP address to the interface. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address/mask ● ip-address: an address in dotted-decimal format (A.B.C.D). ● mask: a subnet mask in /prefix-length format (/ xx). 3. Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode no shutdown Configure a Management Route Define a path from the system to the network from which you are accessing the system remotely. Management routes are separate from IP routes and are only used to manage the system through the management port.
Dell EMC Networking OS encrypts type 5 secret and type 7 password based on dynamic-salt option such that the encrypted password is different when an user is configured with the same password. NOTE: dynamic-salt option is shown only with secret and password options. In dynamic-salt configuration, the length of type 5 secret and type 7 password is 32 and 16 characters more compared to the secret and password length without dynamic-salt configuration.
Table 3.
Mounting an NFS File System This feature enables you to quickly access data on an NFS mounted file system. You can perform file operations on an NFS mounted file system using supported file commands. This feature allows an NFS mounted device to be recognized as a file system. This file system is visible on the device and you can execute all file commands that are available on conventional file systems such as a Flash file system.
Example of Copying to NFS Mount DellEMC#copy flash://test.txt nfsmount:/// Destination file name [test.txt]: ! 15 bytes successfully copied DellEMC#copy flash://test/capture.txt.pcap nfsmount:/// Destination file name [test.txt]: ! 15 bytes successfully copied DellEMC#copy flash://test/capture.txt.pcap nfsmount:///username/snoop.pcap ! 24 bytes successfully copied DellEMC# DellEMC#copy tftp://10.16.127.
Configure the Overload Bit for a Startup Scenario For information about setting the router overload bit for a specific period of time after a switch reload is implemented, see the Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) section in the Dell Command Line Reference Guide for your system. Viewing Files You can only view file information and content on local file systems. To view a list of files or the contents of a file, use the following commands. ● View a list of files on the internal flash.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 drwx drwx d--drwx drwx drwx drwx drwx -rwx -rwx -rwx -rwx -rwx 4096 3072 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 53285 630 2760 294418 54238335 Jan Sep Aug Sep Aug Aug Aug Aug Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep 01 06 09 04 09 09 09 09 01 02 04 04 06 1980 2015 2015 2015 2015 2015 2015 2015 2015 2015 2015 2015 2017 00:00:00 12:41:26 06:52:28 18:58:20 06:56:32 06:56:32 06:56:32 06:56:32 18:08:54 17:53:14 18:51:26 18:51:36 13:04:58 +00:00 +00:00 +00:00 +00:00 +00:00 +00:00 +00:00 +00:00 +00:00 +00:0
- - - network network network network network DellEMC#show file-systems Size(b) Free(b) Feature Type Flags 520962048 213778432 dosFs2.0 USERFLASH 127772672 21936128 dosFs2.0 USERFLASH - network - network - network Prefixes rw flash: rw slot0: rw ftp: rw tftp: rw scp: rw rw rw rw rw ftp: tftp: scp: http: https: You can change the default file system so that file management commands apply to a particular device or memory. To change the default directory, use the following command.
[May [May [May [May [May [May 17 17 17 17 17 17 15:53:53]: 15:54:54]: 15:55:00]: 15:55:12]: 15:55:22]: 15:55:27]: CMD-(CLI):[show command-history]by default from console CMD-(CLI):[end]by default from console CMD-(CLI):[show logging]by default from console CMD-(CLI):[show clock]by default from console CMD-(CLI):[show running-config]by default from console CMD-(CLI):[show command-history]by default from console Upgrading Dell EMC Networking OS To upgrade Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS), refer t
The MD5 or SHA256 hash provides a method of validating that you have downloaded the original software. Calculating the hash on the local image file and comparing the result to the hash published for that file on iSupport provides a high level of confidence that the local copy is exactly the same as the published software image. This validation procedure, and the verify {md5 | sha256} command to support it, prevents the installation of corrupted or modified images.
4 Management This chapter describes the different protocols or services used to manage the Dell EMC Networking system.
Removing a Command from EXEC Mode To remove a command from the list of available commands in EXEC mode for a specific privilege level, use the privilege exec command from CONFIGURATION mode. In the command, specify a level greater than the level given to a user or terminal line, then the first keyword of each command you wish to restrict.
privilege configure level level {interface | line | route-map | router} {command-keyword ||...|| command-keyword} ● Allow access to a CONFIGURATION, INTERFACE, LINE, ROUTE-MAP, and/or ROUTER mode command. CONFIGURATION mode privilege {configure |interface | line | route-map | router} level level {command ||...
username username privilege level NOTE: When you assign a privilege level between 2 and 15, access to the system begins at EXEC mode, but the prompt is hostname#, rather than hostname>. Configuring Logging The Dell EMC Networking OS tracks changes in the system using event and error messages. By ● ● ● default, Dell EMC Networking OS logs these messages on: the internal buffer console and terminal lines any configured syslog servers To disable logging, use the following commands.
The security log contains security events and information. RBAC restricts access to audit and security logs based on the CLI sessions’ user roles. The types of information in this log consist of the following: ● Establishment of secure traffic flows, such as SSH. ● Violations on secure flows or certificate issues. ● Adding and deleting of users.
Configuring Logging Format To display syslog messages in a RFC 3164 or RFC 5424 format, use the logging version {0 | 1} command in CONFIGURATION mode. By default, the system log version is set to 0.
1. On the switch, enable the SSH server DellEMC(conf)#ip ssh server enable 2. On the syslog server, create a reverse SSH tunnel from the syslog server to the Dell OS switch, using following syntax: ssh -R :: user@remote_host -nNf In the following example the syslog server IP address is 10.156.166.48 and the listening port is 5141. The switch IP address is 10.16.131.141 and the listening port is 5140 ssh -R 5140:10.156.166.48:5141 admin@10.16.131.
Sending System Messages to a Syslog Server To send system messages to a specified syslog server, use the following command. The following syslog standards are supported: RFC 5424 The SYSLOG Protocol, R.Gerhards and Adiscon GmbH, March 2009, obsoletes RFC 3164 and RFC 5426 Transmission of Syslog Messages over UDP. ● Specify the server to which you want to send system messages. You can configure up to eight syslog servers.
The following example enables login activity tracking. The system stores the login activity details for the last 30 days. DellEMC(config)#login statistics enable The following example enables login activity tracking and configures the system to store the login activity details for 12 days. DellEMC(config)#login statistics enable DellEMC(config)#login statistics time-period 12 Display Login Statistics To view the login statistics, use the show login statistics command.
Unsuccessful login attempt(s) in last 30 day(s): 3 Successful login attempt(s) in last 30 day(s): 2 Example of the show login statistics user user-id command The show login statistics user user-id command displays the successful and failed login details of a specific user in the last 30 days or the custom defined time period.
Configuring Concurrent Session Limit To configure concurrent session limit, follow this procedure: ● Limit the number of concurrent sessions for each user. CONFIGURATION mode login concurrent-session limit number-of-sessions The following example limits the permitted number of concurrent login sessions to 4.
Line Location 2 vty 0 10.14.1.97 3 vty 1 10.14.1.97 4 vty 2 10.14.1.97 5 vty 3 10.14.1.97 Kill existing session? [line number/Enter to cancel]: Enabling Secured CLI Mode The secured CLI mode prevents the users from enhancing the permissions or promoting the privilege levels. ● Enter the following command to enable the secured CLI mode: CONFIGURATION Mode secure-cli enable After entering the command, save the running-configuration. Once you save the running-configuration, the secured CLI mode is enabled.
To view the logging configuration, use the show running-config logging command in privilege mode, as shown in the example for Configure a UNIX Logging Facility Level. Display the Logging Buffer and the Logging Configuration To display the current contents of the logging buffer and the logging settings for the system, use the show logging command in EXEC privilege mode. When RBAC is enabled, the security logs are filtered based on the user roles.
authentication success on vty0 ( 10.16.127.143 ) for user admin Oct 9 14:31:24 %STKUNIT1-M:CP %SEC-5-LOGIN_SUCCESS: Login successful for user admin on line vty0 ( 10.16.127.143 ) Oct 8 22:41:47 %STKUNIT1-M:CP %SEC-5-LOGOUT: Exec session is terminated on console (Reason : Idle TimeOut) Oct 8 22:31:44 %STKUNIT1-M:CP %SEC-5-LOGIN_SUCCESS: Login successful on console Oct 8 16:57:39 %STKUNIT1-M:CP %SEC-5-LOGOUT: Exec session is terminated for user admin on line vty0 ( 10.16.127.
Oct 8 16:11:32 %STKUNIT1-M:CP %CHMGR-5-STACKUNIT_DETECTED: stack-unit 1 present Oct 8 16:11:32 %STKUNIT1-M:CP %CRYPTO-5-FIPS_SELF_TEST_PASSED: [sysd] FIPS crypto module self-test passed Oct 8 16:11:31 %STKUNIT1-M:CP %RAM-6-ELECTION_ROLE: Stack-unit 1 is transitioning to Management Stack-unit. Oct 8 16:11:31 %S5048F-ON:1 %POLLMGR-6-USER_FLASH_INFO: model: SanDisk Ultra firmware: 1.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ local6 (for local use) local7 (for local use) lpr (for line printer system messages) mail (for mail system messages) news (for USENET news messages) sys9 (system use) sys10 (system use) sys11 (system use) sys12 (system use) sys13 (system use) sys14 (system use) syslog (for syslog messages) user (for user programs) uucp (UNIX to UNIX copy protocol) To view nondefault settings, use the show running-config logging command in EXEC mode.
Enabling Timestamp on Syslog Messages By default, syslog messages include a time/date stamp, taken from the datetime, stating when the error or message was created. To enable timestamp, use the following command. ● Add timestamp to syslog messages. CONFIGURATION mode service timestamps [log | debug] [datetime [localtime] [msec] [show-timezone] [utc] | uptime] Specify the following optional parameters: ○ datetime: To view the timestamp in system local time that includes the local time zone.
[May [May [May [May [May [May 17 17 17 17 17 17 15:53:53]: 15:54:54]: 15:55:00]: 15:55:12]: 15:55:22]: 15:55:27]: CMD-(CLI):[show command-history]by default from console CMD-(CLI):[end]by default from console CMD-(CLI):[show logging]by default from console CMD-(CLI):[show clock]by default from console CMD-(CLI):[show running-config]by default from console CMD-(CLI):[show command-history]by default from console DellEMC# show logging Syslog logging: enabled Console logging: disabled Monitor logging: level
Configuring FTP Server Parameters After you enable the FTP server on the system, you can configure different parameters. To specify the system logging settings, use the following commands. ● Specify the directory for users using FTP to reach the system. CONFIGURATION mode ftp-server topdir dir The default is the internal flash directory. ● Specify a user name for all FTP users and configure either a plain text or encrypted password.
Denying and Permitting Access to a Terminal Line Dell EMC Networking recommends applying only standard access control lists (ACLs) to deny and permit access to VTY lines. ● Layer 3 ACLs deny all traffic that is not explicitly permitted, but in the case of VTY lines, an ACL with no rules does not deny traffic. ● You cannot use the show ip accounting access-list command to display the contents of an ACL that is applied only to a VTY line.
Configuring Login Authentication for Terminal Lines You can use any combination of up to six authentication methods to authenticate a user on a terminal line. A combination of authentication methods is called a method list. If the user fails the first authentication method, Dell EMC Networking OS prompts the next method until all methods are exhausted, at which point the connection is terminated. The available authentication methods are: enable Prompt for the enable password.
● Return to the default timeout values. LINE mode no exec-timeout The following example shows how to set the timeout period and how to view the configuration using the show config command from LINE mode. DellEMC(conf)#line con 0 DellEMC(config-line-console)#exec-timeout 0 DellEMC(config-line-console)#show config line console 0 exec-timeout 0 0 DellEMC(config-line-console)# Using Telnet to get to Another Network Device To telnet to another device, use the following commands.
Viewing the Configuration Lock Status If you attempt to enter CONFIGURATION mode when another user has locked it, you may view which user has control of CONFIGURATION mode using the show configuration lock command from EXEC Privilege mode. You can then send any user a message using the send command from EXEC Privilege mode. Alternatively, you can clear any line using the clear command from EXEC Privilege mode. If you clear a console session, the user is returned to EXEC mode.
The following example shows how to reload the system into Dell diagnostics mode: DellEMC#reload dell-diag Proceed with reload [confirm yes/no]: yes The following example shows how to reload the system into ONIE mode: DellEMC#reload onie Proceed with reload [confirm yes/no]: yes The following example shows how to reload the system into ONIE prompt and enter the install mode directly: DellEMC#reload onie install Proceed with reload [confirm yes/no]: yes Restoring the Factory Default Settings Restoring the fa
When you use the flash boot procedure to boot the device, the boot loader checks if the primary or the secondary partition contains a valid image. If the primary partition contains a valid image, then the primary boot line is set to A: and the secondary and default boot lines are set to a Null String. If the secondary partition contains a valid image, then the primary boot line is set to B: and the secondary and default boot lines are set to a Null String.
5 802.1X 802.1X is a port-based Network Access Control (PNAC) that provides an authentication mechanism to devices wishing to attach to a LAN or WLAN. A device connected to a port that is enabled with 802.1X is disallowed from sending or receiving packets on the network until its identity is verified (through a username and password, for example). 802.
● The device attempting to access the network is the supplicant. The supplicant is not allowed to communicate on the network until the authenticator authorizes the port. It can only communicate with the authenticator in response to 802.1X requests. ● The device with which the supplicant communicates is the authenticator. The authenticator is the gate keeper of the network. It translates and forwards requests and responses between the authentication server and the supplicant.
Figure 5. EAP Port-Authentication EAP over RADIUS 802.1X uses RADIUS to shuttle EAP packets between the authenticator and the authentication server, as defined in RFC 3579. EAP messages are encapsulated in RADIUS packets as a type of attribute in Type, Length, Value (TLV) format. The Type value for EAP messages is 79. Figure 6. EAP Over RADIUS RADIUS Attributes for 802.1X Support Dell EMC Networking systems include the following RADIUS attributes in all 802.
Configuring 802.1X Configuring 802.1X on a port is a one-step process. For more information, refer to Enabling 802.1X. Related Configuration Tasks ● ● ● ● ● ● Configuring Request Identity Re-Transmissions Forcibly Authorizing or Unauthorizing a Port Re-Authenticating a Port Configuring Timeouts Configuring a Guest VLAN Configuring an Authentication-Fail VLAN Important Points to Remember ● Dell EMC Networking OS supports 802.
Enabling 802.1X Enable 802.1X globally. Figure 7. 802.1X Enabled 1. Enable 802.1X globally. CONFIGURATION mode dot1x authentication 2. Enter INTERFACE mode on an interface or a range of interfaces. INTERFACE mode interface [range] 3. Enable 802.1X on the supplicant interface only. INTERFACE mode dot1x authentication Verify that 802.1X is enabled globally and at the interface level using the show running-config | find dot1x command from EXEC Privilege mode.
no ip address dot1x authentication no shutdown ! DellEMC# To view 802.1X configuration information for an interface, use the show dot1x interface command. In the following example, the bold lines show that 802.1X is enabled on all ports unauthorized by default. DellEMC#show dot1x interface twentyFiveGigE 1/1 802.
Configuring the Static MAB and MAB Profile Enable MAB (mac-auth-bypass) before using the dot1x static-mab command to enable static mab. To enable static MAB and configure a static MAB profile, use the following commands. ● Configure static MAB and static MAB profile on dot1x interface. INTERFACE mode dot1x static-mab profile profile-name Eenter a name to configure the static MAB profile name. The profile name length is limited to a maximum of 32 characters.
interface twentyFiveGigE 1/2 switchport dot1x critical-vlan 300 no shutdown DellEMC#show dot1x interface twentyFiveGigE 1/2 802.
NOTE: There are several reasons why the supplicant might fail to respond; for example, the supplicant might have been booting when the request arrived or there might be a physical layer problem. To configure re-transmissions, use the following commands. ● Configure the amount of time that the authenticator waits before re-transmitting an EAP Request Identity frame. INTERFACE mode dot1x tx-period number The range is from 1 to 65535 (1 year) The default is 30.
Auth PAE State: Backend State: Initialize Initialize Forcibly Authorizing or Unauthorizing a Port The 802.1X ports can be placed into any of the three states: ● ForceAuthorized — an authorized state. A device connected to this port in this state is never subjected to the authentication process, but is allowed to communicate on the network. Placing the port in this state is same as disabling 802.1X on the port. ● ForceUnauthorized — an unauthorized state.
The range is from 1 to 31536000. The default is 3600. ● Configure the maximum number of times the supplicant can be re-authenticated. INTERFACE mode dot1x reauth-max number The range is from 1 to 10. The default is 2. The bold lines show that re-authentication is enabled and the new maximum and re-authentication time period. DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/1)#dot1x reauthentication interval 7200 DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/1)#dot1x reauth-max 10 DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/1)#do show dot1x interface twentyFiveGigE 1/1 802.
Port Control: FORCE_AUTHORIZED Port Auth Status: UNAUTHORIZED Re-Authentication: Disable Untagged VLAN id: None Guest VLAN: Disable Guest VLAN id: NONE Auth-Fail VLAN: Disable Auth-Fail VLAN id: NONE Auth-Fail Max-Attempts: NONE Tx Period: 90 seconds Quiet Period: 120 seconds ReAuth Max: 10 Supplicant Timeout: 15 seconds Server Timeout: 15 seconds Re-Auth Interval: 7200 seconds Max-EAP-Req: 10 Auth Type: Auth PAE State: Backend State: SINGLE_HOST Initialize Initialize Enter the tasks the user should do af
Figure 8. Dynamic VLAN Assignment 1. Configure 8021.x globally (refer to Enabling 802.1X) along with relevant RADIUS server configurations (refer to the illustration inDynamic VLAN Assignment with Port Authentication). 2. Make the interface a switchport so that it can be assigned to a VLAN. 3. Create the VLAN to which the interface will be assigned. 4. Connect the supplicant to the port configured for 802.1X. 5.
● If a port is already forwarding on the Guest VLAN when 802.1X is enabled, the port is moved out of the Guest VLAN and the authentication process begins. Configuring a Guest VLAN If the supplicant does not respond within a determined amount of time ([reauth-max + 1] * tx-period, the system assumes that the host does not have 802.1X capability and the port is placed in the Guest VLAN. NOTE: For more information about configuring timeouts, refer to Configuring Timeouts.
Example of Viewing Configured Authentication 802.
6 Access Control List (ACL) VLAN Groups and Content Addressable Memory (CAM) This section describes the access control list (ACL) virtual local area network (VLAN) group, and content addressable memory (CAM) enhancements.
The ACL manager does not notify the ACL agent in the following cases: ● The ACL VLAN group is created. ● The ACL VLAN group is deleted and it does not contain VLAN members. ● The ACL is applied or removed from a group and the ACL group does not contain a VLAN member. ● The description of the ACL group is added or removed.
acl-vlan-group {group name} 2. Add a description to the ACL VLAN group. CONFIGURATION (conf-acl-vl-grp) mode description description 3. Apply an egress IP ACL to the ACL VLAN group. CONFIGURATION (conf-acl-vl-grp) mode ip access-group {group name} out implicit-permit 4. Add VLAN member(s) to an ACL VLAN group. CONFIGURATION (conf-acl-vl-grp) mode member vlan {VLAN-range} 5. Display all the ACL VLAN groups or display a specific ACL VLAN group, identified by name.
| | OUT-L2 ACL | Codes: * - cam usage is above 90%. 206 | 9 | 197 Viewing CAM Usage View the amount of CAM space available, used, and remaining in each partition (including IPv4Flow and Layer 2 ACL subpartitions) using the show cam-usage command in EXEC Privilege mode. Display Layer 2, Layer 3, ACL, or all CAM usage statistics.
| | | IN-L3 QOS Codes: * - cam usage is above 90%.
3 | | | | | | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | IN-L3 ACL | IN-V6 ACL | OUT-L2 ACL | OUT-L3 ACL | OUT-V6 ACL Codes: * - cam usage is above 90%.
ACL Optimization to Increase Number of Supported IPv4 ACLs You can configure the Dell EMC Networking OS to support more number of IPv4 ACLs.
7 Access Control Lists (ACLs) This chapter describes access control lists (ACLs), prefix lists, and route-maps. At their simplest, access control lists (ACLs), prefix lists, and route-maps permit or deny traffic based on MAC and/or IP addresses. This chapter describes implementing IP ACLs, IP prefix lists and route-maps. For MAC ACLS, refer to Layer 2.
• • • • • • • • Assign an IP ACL to an Interface Applying an IP ACL Configure Ingress ACLs Configure Egress ACLs Configuring UDF ACL IP Prefix Lists ACL Resequencing Route Maps IP Access Control Lists (ACLs) In Dell EMC Networking switch/routers, you can create two different types of IP ACLs: standard or extended. A ● ● ● ● ● ● ● standard ACL filters packets based on the source IP packet.
Save the new CAM settings to the startup-config (use write-mem or copy run start) then reload the system for the new settings to take effect. CAM Optimization When you enable this command, if a policy map containing classification rules (ACL and/or dscp/ ip-precedence rules) is applied to more than one physical interface on the same port-pipe, only a single copy of the policy is written (only one FP entry is used). When you disable this command, the system behaves as described in this chapter.
● L2 Egress Access list In the Dell EMC Networking OS versions prior to 9.13(0.0), the system does not install any of your ACL rules if the available CAM space is lesser than what is required for your set of ACL rules. Effective with the Dell EMC Networking OS version 9.13(0.0), the system installs your ACL rules until all the allocated CAM memory is used. If there is no implicit permit in your rule, the Dell EMC Networking OS ensures that an implicit deny is installed at the end of your rule.
DellEMC(conf)#interface tw 1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/1)#service-policy input pmap Configure ACL Range Profiles Dell EMC Networking OS allows L3 ACLs to configure range of L4 source and destination ports using the operators and range of ports. This results in multiple ACL entries that use more space in the forwarding table. Staring from Dell EMC Networking OS 9.11(0.0), you can configure the range of L4 source and destination ports as part of L3 ACLs, which results in only one ACL entry.
○ Two or more match clauses within the same route-map sequence have different match commands, matching a packet against these clauses is a logical AND operation. ● If no match is found in a route-map sequence, the process moves to the next route-map sequence until a match is found, or there are no more sequences. ● When a match is found, the packet is forwarded and no more route-map sequences are processed.
To delete all instances of that route map, use the no route-map map-name command. To delete just one instance, add the sequence number to the command syntax. DellEMC(conf)#no route-map zakho 10 DellEMC(conf)#end DellEMC#show route-map route-map zakho, permit, sequence 20 Match clauses: interface downtwentyFiveGigE 1/1 Set clauses: tag 35 level stub-area DellEMC# The following example shows a route map with multiple instances.
Example of the match Command to Permit and Deny Routes DellEMC(conf)#route-map force permit 10 DellEMC(config-route-map)#match tag 1000 DellEMC(conf)#route-map force deny 20 DellEMC(config-route-map)#match tag 1000 DellEMC(conf)#route-map force deny 30 DellEMC(config-route-map)#match tag 1000 Configuring Match Routes To configure match criterion for a route map, use the following commands. ● Match routes with the same AS-PATH numbers.
match metric metric-value ● Match BGP routes based on the ORIGIN attribute. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode match origin {egp | igp | incomplete} ● Match routes specified as internal or external to OSPF, ISIS level-1, ISIS level-2, or locally generated. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode match route-type {external [type-1 | type-2] | internal | level-1 | level-2 | local } ● Match routes with a specific tag. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode match tag tag-value To create route map instances, use these commands.
To create route map instances, use these commands. There is no limit to the number of set commands per route map, but the convention is to keep the number of set filters in a route map low. Set commands do not require a corresponding match command. Configure a Route Map for Route Redistribution Route maps on their own cannot affect traffic and must be included in different commands to affect routing traffic.
NOTE: If you configure the continue clause without specifying a module, the next sequential module is processed. Example of Using the continue Clause in a Route Map ! route-map test permit 10 match commu comm-list1 set community 1:1 1:2 1:3 set as-path prepend 1 2 3 4 5 continue 30! IP Fragment Handling Dell EMC Networking OS supports a configurable option to explicitly deny IP fragmented packets, particularly second and subsequent packets.
● If a packet's FO > 0, the packet is permitted. ● If a packet's FO = 0, the next ACL entry is processed. Deny ACL line with L3 information only, and the fragments keyword is present:If a packet's L3 information does match the L3 information in the ACL line, the packet's FO is checked. ● If a packet's FO > 0, the packet is denied. ● If a packet's FO = 0, the next ACL line is processed. In this first example, TCP packets from host 10.1.1.1 with TCP destination port equal to 24 are permitted.
To view the rules of a particular ACL configured on a particular interface, use the show ip accounting access-list ACL-name interface interface command in EXEC Privilege mode. The following is an example of viewing the rules of a specific ACL on an interface. DellEMC#show ip accounting access-list ToOspf interface gig 1/6 Standard IP access list ToOspf seq 5 deny any seq 10 deny 10.2.0.0 /16 seq 15 deny 10.3.0.0 /16 seq 20 deny 10.4.0.0 /16 seq 25 deny 10.5.0.0 /16 seq 30 deny 10.6.0.0 /16 seq 35 deny 10.7.
The following examples shows how to view a standard ACL filter sequence for an interface. DellEMC#show ip accounting access example interface gig 4/12 Extended IP access list example seq 15 deny udp any any eq 111 seq 20 deny udp any any eq 2049 seq 25 deny udp any any eq 31337 seq 30 deny tcp any any range 12345 12346 seq 35 permit udp host 10.21.126.225 10.4.5.0 /28 monitor 300 seq 40 permit udp host 10.21.126.226 10.4.5.0 /28 seq 45 permit udp 10.8.0.0 /16 10.50.188.
Configure Filters, ICMP Packets To create a filter for ICMP packets with a specified sequence number, use the following commands. 1. Create either an extended IPv4 or IPv6 ACL and assign it a unique name. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list extended access-list-name ipv6 access-list extended access-list-name 2. Configure an extended IP ACL filter for ICMP packets.
seq seq seq seq seq seq seq seq seq 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 permit permit permit permit permit permit permit permit permit icmp icmp icmp icmp icmp icmp icmp icmp icmp any any any any any any any any any any any any any any any any any any host-unreachable count (50 packets) host-unknown count (50 packets) network-unknown count (50 packets) net-unreachable count (50 packets) packet-too-big count (50 packets) parameter-problem count (50 packets) port-unreachable count (50 packets) source-quench coun
Configure Filters, TCP Packets To create a filter for TCP packets with a specified sequence number, use the following commands. 1. Create an extended IP ACL and assign it a unique name. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list extended access-list-name 2. Configure an extended IP ACL filter for TCP packets.
{deny | permit} udp {source mask | any | host ip-address}} [count [byte]] [order] [monitor [session-id]] [fragments] When you use the log keyword, the CP logs details about the packets that match. Depending on how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these packets’ details. The following example shows an extended IP ACL in which the sequence numbers were assigned by the software.
The same ACL may be applied to different interfaces and that changes its functionality. For example, you can take ACL “ABCD” and apply it using the in keyword and it becomes an ingress access list. If you apply the same ACL using the out keyword, it becomes an egress access list. If you apply the same ACL to the Loopback interface, it becomes a Loopback access list. Applying an IP ACL To apply an IP ACL (standard or extended) to a physical or port channel interface, use the following commands. 1.
Configure Ingress ACLs Ingress ACLs are applied to interfaces and to traffic entering the system. These system-wide ACLs eliminate the need to apply ACLs onto each interface and achieves the same results. By localizing target traffic, it is a simpler implementation. To create an ingress ACL, use the ip access-group command in EXEC Privilege mode. The example shows applying the ACL, rules to the newly created access group, and viewing the access list.
DellEMC(config-ext-nacl)#permit tcp any any DellEMC(config-ext-nacl)#deny icmp any any DellEMC(config-ext-nacl)#permit 1.1.1.2 DellEMC(config-ext-nacl)#end DellEMC#show ip accounting access-list ! Extended Ingress IP access list abcd on gigethernet 0/0 seq 5 permit tcp any any seq 10 deny icmp any any seq 15 permit 1.1.1.
cam-acl {default | l2acl number ipv4acl number ipv6acl number ipv4qos number l2qos number l2pt number ipmacacl number [vman-qos | vman-dual-qos number] ecfmacl number [nlbclusteracl number] ipv4pbr number }openflow number | fcoe number} [ipv4udfenable] [iscsioptacl number] [vrfv4acl number] DellEMC(conf)#cam-acl l2acl 1 ipv4acl 8 ipv6acl 2 ipv4qos 0 l2qos 2 l2pt 0 ipmacacl 0 vman-qos 0 ecfmacl 0 ipv4udfenable 3. View the currently configured CAM allocation.
FcoeAcl : iscsiOptAcl : ipv4pbr : vrfv4Acl : Openflow : fedgovacl : nlbclusteracl: 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- stack-unit 1 -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 256 entries L2Acl : 2 Ipv4Acl : 2 Ipv6Acl : 0 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 2 FcoeAcl : 4 iscsiOptAcl : 0 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl : 0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : 0 nlbclusteracl: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Next Boot(in block sizes) 1 8(UdfEnabled) 2 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DellEMC# DellEMC#show cam-acl -- Chassis Cam ACL -Curren
CONFIGURATION mode udf-tcam name seq number DellEMC(conf)#udf-tcam ipnip seq 1 5. Configure a UDF ID to parse packet headers using the specified number of offset and required bytes. CONFIGURATION-UDF TCAM mode key description udf-id id packetbase PacketBase offset bytes length bytes DellEMC(conf-udf-tcam)#key innerL3header udf-id 6 packetbase innerL3Header offset 0 length 2 6. View the UDF TCAM configuration.
permit ip {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ipaddress} udf-pkt-format name udf-qualifier-value name DellEMC(config-ext-nacl)#permit ip any any udf-pkt-format ipinip udf-qualifier-value ipnip_val1 12. View the UDF TCAM configuration.
For a complete listing of all commands related to prefix lists, refer to the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Interface Reference Guide. Creating a Prefix List To create a prefix list, use the following commands. 1. Create a prefix list and assign it a unique name. You are in PREFIX LIST mode. CONFIGURATION mode ip prefix-list prefix-name 2. Create a prefix list with a sequence number and a deny or permit action.
The example shows a prefix list in which the sequence numbers were assigned by the software. The filters were assigned sequence numbers based on the order in which they were configured (for example, the first filter was given the lowest sequence number). The show config command in PREFIX LIST mode displays two filters with the sequence numbers 5 and 10. DellEMC(conf-nprefixl)#permit 123.23.0.0 /16 DellEMC(conf-nprefixl)#deny 133.24.56.
CONFIGURATION mode router rip ● Apply a configured prefix list to incoming routes. You can specify an interface. If you enter the name of a nonexistent prefix list, all routes are forwarded. CONFIG-ROUTER-RIP mode distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface] ● Apply a configured prefix list to outgoing routes. You can specify an interface or type of route. If you enter the name of a non-existent prefix list, all routes are forwarded.
You can resequence IPv4 and IPv6 ACLs, prefixes, and MAC ACLs. No CAM writes happen as a result of resequencing, so there is no packet loss; the behavior is similar Hot-lock ACLs. NOTE: ACL resequencing does not affect the rules, remarks, or order in which they are applied. Resequencing merely renumbers the rules so that you can place new rules within the list as needed. Table 7. ACL Resequencing Rules Resquencing Rules Before Resequencing: seq 5 permit any host 1.1.1.1 seq 6 permit any host 1.1.1.
seq 10 permit ip any host 1.1.1.3 seq 12 permit ip any host 1.1.1.4 Remarks that do not have a corresponding rule are incremented as a rule. These two mechanisms allow remarks to retain their original position in the list. The following example shows remark 10 corresponding to rule 10 and as such, they have the same number before and after the command is entered. Remark 4 is incremented as a rule, and all rules have retained their original positions.
8 Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) BFD is a protocol that is used to rapidly detect communication failures between two adjacent systems. It is a simple and lightweight replacement for existing routing protocol link state detection mechanisms. It also provides a failure detection solution for links on which no routing protocol is used. BFD is a simple hello mechanism. Two neighboring systems running BFD establish a session using a three-way handshake.
BFD Packet Format Control packets are encapsulated in user datagram protocol (UDP) packets. The following illustration shows the complete encapsulation of a BFD control packet inside an IPv4 packet. Figure 9. BFD in IPv4 Packet Format Field Description Diagnostic Code The reason that the last session failed. State The current local session state. Refer to BFD Sessions. Flag A bit that indicates packet function.
Field Description Your Discriminator A random number generated by the remote system to identify the session. Discriminator values are necessary to identify the session to which a control packet belongs because there can be many sessions running on a single interface. Desired Min TX Interval The minimum rate at which the local system would like to send control packets to the remote system.
State Description Init The local system is communicating. Up Both systems are exchanging control packets. The session is declared down if: ● A control packet is not received within the detection time. ● Sufficient echo packets are lost. ● Demand mode is active and a control packet is not received in response to a poll packet. BFD Three-Way Handshake A three-way handshake must take place between the systems that participate in the BFD session.
Session State Changes The following illustration shows how the session state on a system changes based on the status notification it receives from the remote system. For example, if a session on a system is down and it receives a Down status notification from the remote system, the session state on the local system changes to Init. Figure 11.
● ● ● ● ● Configure BFD for OSPFv3 Configure BFD for IS-IS Configure BFD for BGP Configure BFD for VRRP Configuring Protocol Liveness Configure BFD for Physical Ports Configuring BFD for physical ports is supported on the C-Series and E-Series platforms only. BFD on physical ports is useful when you do not enable the routing protocol. Without BFD, if the remote system fails, the local system does not remove the connected route until the first failed attempt to send a packet.
Remote Addr: 2.2.2.
Establishing Sessions for Static Routes for Default VRF Sessions are established for all neighbors that are the next hop of a static route on the default VRF. Figure 12. Establishing Sessions for Static Routes To establish a BFD session, use the following command. ● Establish BFD sessions for all neighbors that are the next hop of a static route.
For more information on prefix lists, see IP Prefix Lists. To enable BFD sessions on specific neighbors, perform the following steps: Enter the following command to enable BFD session on specific next-hop neighbors: CONFIGURATION ip route bfd prefix-list prefix-list-name The BFD session is established for the next-hop neighbors that are specified in the prefix-list. ● The absence of a prefix-list causes BFD sessions to be enabled on all the eligible next-hop neighbors.
Configure BFD for OSPF When you use BFD with OSPF, the OSPF protocol registers with the BFD manager. BFD sessions are established with all neighboring interfaces participating in OSPF. If a neighboring interface fails, the BFD agent notifies the BFD manager, which in turn notifies the OSPF protocol that a link state change has occurred. Configuring BFD for OSPF is a two-step process: 1. Enable BFD globally. 2. Establish sessions with OSPF neighbors.
● Enable BFD globally. CONFIGURATION mode bfd enable ● Establish sessions with all OSPF neighbors. ROUTER-OSPF mode bfd all-neighbors ● Establish sessions with OSPF neighbors on a single interface. INTERFACE mode ip ospf bfd all-neighbors To view the established sessions, use the show bfd neighbors command. The bold line shows the OSPF BFD sessions.
The following example shows the show bfd neighbors command output. show bfd neighbors * Ad Dn B C I O O3 R M V VT - Active session role Admin Down BGP CLI ISIS OSPF OSPFv3 Static Route (RTM) MPLS VRRP Vxlan Tunnel LocalAddr * 5.1.1.1 RemoteAddr 5.1.1.2 Interface Po 30 State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Up 200 200 3 Clients O * 6.1.1.1 6.1.1.2 Vl 30 Up 200 200 3 O * 7.1.1.1 7.1.1.
Number Number Number Number Number of of of of of packets received from neighbor: 78 packets sent to neighbor: 78 state changes: 1 messages from IFA about port state change: 0 messages communicated b/w Manager and Agent: 4 Session Discriminator: 7 Neighbor Discriminator: 2 Local Addr: 6.1.1.1 Local MAC Addr: 00:a0:c9:00:00:02 Remote Addr: 6.1.1.
Actual parameters: TX: 300ms, RX: 250ms, Multiplier: 3 Role: Active Delete session on Down: False Client Registered: CLI Uptime: 00:02:04 Statistics: Number of packets received from neighbor: 376 Number of packets sent to neighbor: 314 Number of state changes: 2 Number of messages from IFA about port state change: 0 Number of messages communicated b/w Manager and Agent: 6 DellEMC# Changing OSPF Session Parameters Configure BFD sessions with default intervals and a default role.
Related Configuration Tasks ● Changing OSPFv3 Session Parameters ● Disabling BFD for OSPFv3 Establishing Sessions with OSPFv3 Neighbors You can establish BFD sessions with all OSPFv3 neighbors at once or with all neighbors out of a specific interface. Sessions are only established when the OSPFv3 adjacency is in the Full state. To establish BFD with all OSPFv3 neighbors or with OSPFv3 neighbors on a single interface, use the following commands. ● Establish sessions with all OSPFv3 neighbors.
ipv6 ospf bfd all-neighbors ● To disable BFD on a specific OSPFv3 enabled interface, use the ipv6 ospf bfd all-neighbors disable command. You can also use the no bfd enable command to disable BFD on a specific interface. NOTE: You can create upto a maximum of 128 BFD sessions (combination of OSPFv2 and OSPFv3 with a timer of 300*300*3) for both default and nondefault VRFs.
interface. If you change a parameter globally, the change affects all OSPFv3 neighbors sessions. If you change a parameter at the interface level, the change affects all OSPFv3 sessions on that interface. To change parameters for all OSPFv3 sessions or for OSPFv3 sessions on a single interface, use the following commands. To view session parameters, use the show bfd neighbors detail command. ● Change parameters for all OSPFv3 sessions.
Establishing Sessions with IS-IS Neighbors BFD sessions can be established for all IS-IS neighbors at once or sessions can be established for all neighbors out of a specific interface. Figure 14. Establishing Sessions with IS-IS Neighbors To establish BFD with all IS-IS neighbors or with IS-IS neighbors on a single interface, use the following commands. ● Establish sessions with all IS-IS neighbors. ROUTER-ISIS mode bfd all-neighbors ● Establish sessions with IS-IS neighbors on a single interface.
LocalAddr * 2.2.2.2 RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients 2.2.2.1 Tf 1/1 Up 100 100 3 I Changing IS-IS Session Parameters BFD sessions are configured with default intervals and a default role. The parameters that you can configure are: Desired TX Interval, Required Min RX Interval, Detection Multiplier, and system role. These parameters are configured for all IS-IS sessions or all IS-IS sessions out of an interface.
Figure 15. Establishing Sessions with BGP Neighbors The sample configuration shows alternative ways to establish a BFD session with a BGP neighbor: ● By establishing BFD sessions with all neighbors discovered by BGP (the bfd all-neighbors command). ● By establishing a BFD session with a specified BGP neighbor (the neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} bfd command) BFD packets originating from a router are assigned to the highest priority egress queue to minimize transmission delays.
bfd enable 2. Specify the AS number and enter ROUTER BGP configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number 3. Add a BGP neighbor or peer group in a remote AS. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group name} remote-as as-number 4. Enable the BGP neighbor. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} no shutdown 5. Add a BGP neighbor or peer group in a remote AS. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group name} remote-as as-number 6.
The BGP link with the neighbor returns to normal operation and uses the BFD session parameters globally configured with the bfd all-neighbors command or configured for the peer group to which the neighbor belongs. ● Disable a BFD for BGP session with a specified neighbor. ROUTER BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | ipv6–address |peer-group-name} bfd disable ● Remove the disabled state of a BFD for BGP session with a specified neighbor.
neighbor 2.2.2.2 no shutdown neighbor 3.3.3.2 remote-as 1 neighbor 3.3.3.2 no shutdown bfd all-neighbors The following example shows viewing all BFD neighbors. R2# show bfd neighbors * - Active session role Ad Dn - Admin Down B - BGP C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) M - MPLS V - VRRP LocalAddr * 1.1.1.3 * 2.2.2.3 * 3.3.3.3 RemoteAddr 1.1.1.2 2.2.2.2 3.3.3.
Client Registered: BGP Uptime: 00:02:22 Statistics: Number of packets received from neighbor: 1428 Number of packets sent to neighbor: 1428 Number of state changes: 1 Number of messages from IFA about port state change: 0 Number of messages communicated b/w Manager and Agent: 4 The following example shows viewing BFD summary information. The bold line shows the message displayed when you enable BFD for BGP connections. R2# show ip bgp summary BGP router identifier 10.0.0.
E1200i_R2# R2# show ip bgp neighbors 2.2.2.3 BGP neighbor is 2.2.2.3, remote AS 1, external link Member of peer-group pg1 for session parameters BGP version 4, remote router ID 12.0.0.4 BGP state ESTABLISHED, in this state for 00:05:33 ... Neighbor is using BGP neighbor mode BFD configuration Peer active in peer-group outbound optimization ... R2# show ip bgp neighbors 2.2.2.4 BGP neighbor is 2.2.2.
Establishing Sessions with All VRRP Neighbors BFD sessions can be established for all VRRP neighbors at once, or a session can be established with a particular neighbor. Figure 16. Establishing Sessions with All VRRP Neighbors To establish sessions with all VRRP neighbors, use the following command. ● Establish sessions with all VRRP neighbors.
LocalAddr RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients * 2.2.5.1 2.2.5.2 Tf 1/1 Down 1000 1000 3 V To view session state information, use the show vrrp command. The bold line shows the VRRP BFD session. DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/1)#do show vrrp -----------------twentyFiveGigE 1/1, VRID: 1, Net: 2.2.5.1 VRF:0 default State: Backup, Priority: 1, Master: 2.2.5.
Configuring Protocol Liveness Protocol liveness is a feature that notifies the BFD manager when a client protocol is disabled. When you disable a client, all BFD sessions for that protocol are torn down. Neighbors on the remote system receive an Admin Down control packet and are placed in the Down state. To enable protocol liveness, use the following command. ● Enable Protocol Liveness.
The output for the debug bfd event command is the same as the log messages that appear on the console by default.
9 Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an interdomain routing protocol that manages routing between edge routers. BGP uses an algorithm to exchange routing information between switches enabled with BGP. BGP determines a path to reach a particular destination using certain attributes while avoiding routing loops. BGP selects a single path as the best path to a destination network or host. You can also influence BGP to select different path by altering some of the BGP attributes.
the knowledge to reach routers external to the AS. EBGP routers exchange information with other EBGP routers as well as IBGP routers to maintain connectivity and accessibility. Figure 17. BGP Topology with autonomous systems (AS) BGP version 4 (BGPv4) supports classless interdomain routing (CIDR) and aggregate routes and AS paths. BGP is a path vector protocol — a computer network in which BGP maintains the path that updated information takes as it diffuses through the network.
Figure 18. BGP Routers in Full Mesh The number of BGP speakers each BGP peer must maintain increases exponentially. Network management quickly becomes impossible. AS4 Number Representation Dell EMC Networking OS supports multiple representations of 4-byte AS numbers: asplain, asdot+, and asdot. NOTE: The ASDOT and ASDOT+ representations are supported only with the 4-Byte AS numbers feature. If 4-Byte AS numbers are not implemented, only ASPLAIN representation is supported.
● All AS numbers between 0 and 65535 are represented as a decimal number, when entered in the CLI and when displayed in the show commands outputs. ● AS Numbers larger than 65535 is represented using ASDOT notation as .. For example: AS 65546 is represented as 1.10. ASDOT representation combines the ASPLAIN and ASDOT+ representations.
DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#do sho ip bgp BGP table version is 28093, local router ID is 172.30.1.57 AS4 SUPPORT DISABLED DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#no bgp four-octet-as-support DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#sho conf ! router bgp 100 neighbor 172.30.1.250 local-as 65057 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#do show ip bgp BGP table version is 28093, local router ID is 172.30.1.57 Four-Byte AS Numbers You can use the 4-Byte (32-bit) format when configuring autonomous system numbers (ASNs).
State Description Idle BGP initializes all resources, refuses all inbound BGP connection attempts, and initiates a TCP connection to the peer. Connect In this state the router waits for the TCP connection to complete, transitioning to the OpenSent state if successful. If that transition is not successful, BGP resets the ConnectRetry timer and transitions to the Active state when the timer expires. Active The router resets the ConnectRetry timer to zero and returns to the Connect state.
Best Path Selection Criteria Paths for active routes are grouped in ascending order according to their neighboring external AS number (BGP best path selection is deterministic by default, which means the bgp non-deterministic-med command is NOT applied). The best path in each group is selected based on specific criteria. Only one “best path” is selected at a time. If any of the criteria results in more than one path, BGP moves on to the next option in the list.
7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. a. This comparison is only done if the first (neighboring) AS is the same in the two paths; the MEDs are compared only if the first AS in the AS_SEQUENCE is the same for both paths. b. If you entered the bgp always-compare-med command, MEDs are compared for all paths. c. Paths with no MED are treated as “worst” and assigned a MED of 4294967295. Prefer external (EBGP) to internal (IBGP) paths or confederation EBGP paths.
Figure 20. BGP Local Preference Multi-Exit Discriminators (MEDs) If two ASs connect in more than one place, a multi-exit discriminator (MED) can be used to assign a preference to a preferred path. MED is one of the criteria used to determine the best path, so keep in mind that other criteria may impact selection, as shown in the illustration in Best Path Selection Criteria. One AS assigns the MED a value and the other AS uses that value to decide the preferred path.
Figure 21. Multi-Exit Discriminators NOTE: Configuring the set metric-type internal command in a route-map advertises the IGP cost as MED to outbound EBGP peers when redistributing routes. The configured set metric value overwrites the default IGP cost. If the outbound route-map uses MED, it overwrites IGP MED. Origin The origin indicates the origin of the prefix, or how the prefix came into BGP. There are three origin codes: IGP, EGP, INCOMPLETE.
The AS path is shown in the following example. The origin attribute is shown following the AS path information (shown in bold).
IPv4 and IPv6 address family The IPv4 address family configuration in Dell EMC Networking OS is used for identifying routing sessions for protocols that use IPv4 address. You can specify multicast within the IPv4 address family. The default of address family configuration is IPv4 unicast. You can configure the VRF instances for IPv4 address family configuration. The IPv6 address family configuration is used for identifying routing sessions for protocols that use IPv6 address.
Table 8. BGP Default Values (continued) Item Default Graceful Restart feature Disabled Local preference 100 MED 0 Route Flap Damping Parameters half-life = 15 minutes reuse = 750 suppress = 2000 max-suppress-time = 60 minutes Distance external distance = 20 internal distance = 200 local distance = 200 Timers keepalive = 60 seconds holdtime = 180 seconds Add-path Disabled Implement BGP with Dell EMC Networking OS The following sections describe how to implement BGP on Dell EMC Networking OS.
Table 9.
If you use the “no prepend” option, the Local-AS does not prepend to the updates received from the eBGP peer. If you do not select “no prepend” (the default), the Local-AS is added to the first AS segment in the AS-PATH. If an inbound route-map is used to prepend the as-path to the update from the peer, the Local-AS is added first. For example, consider the topology described in the previous illustration.
● To return all values on an snmpwalk for the f10BgpM2Peer sub-OID, use the -C c option, such as snmpwalk -v 2c -C c -c public. ● An SNMP walk may terminate pre-maturely if the index does not increment lexicographically. Dell EMC Networking recommends using options to ignore such errors. ● Multiple BPG process instances are not supported. Thus, the f10BgpM2PeerInstance field in various tables is not used to locate a peer.
Restrictions Dell EMC Networking OS supports only one BGP routing configuration and autonomous system (AS), but supports multiple address family configuration. Enabling BGP By default, BGP is disabled on the system. Dell EMC Networking OS supports one autonomous system (AS) and assigns the AS number (ASN). To enable the BGP process and begin exchanging information, assign an AS number and use commands in ROUTER BGP mode to configure a BGP neighbor.
DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 20.20.20.1 remote-as 20 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 20.20.20.1 no shutdown DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#exit DellEMC(conf)# The following example shows verifying the BGP configuration using the show running-config bgp command.. DellEMC#show running-config bgp ! router bgp 65535 neighbor 20.20.20.1 remote-as 20 neighbor 20.20.20.1 no shutdown DellEMC# Examples of the show ip bgp Commands The following example shows the show ip bgp summary command output.
Connections established 0; dropped 0 Last reset never No active TCP connection Enabling four-byte autonomous system numbers You can enable 4-byte support for configuring autonomous system numbers (ASN). To enable 4-byte support for the BGP process, use the following command. NOTE: When creating BGP confederations, all the routers in the Confederation must be a 4-byte or 2-byte identified routers. You cannot mix them. ● Enable 4-byte support for the BGP process.
Peering sessions are reset when you change the router ID of a BGP router. Upon changing the router ID, the system automatically restarts the BGP instance for the configuration to take effect. DellEMC# configure terminal DellEMC(conf)# router bgp 400 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# bgp router-id 1.1.1.1 Following is the sample output of show ip bgp ipv4 multicast summary command. DellEMC# show ip bgp summary BGP router identifier 1.1.1.
neighbor 172.30.1.250 route-map rmap1 in neighbor 172.30.1.250 password 7 5ab3eb9a15ed02ff4f0dfd4500d6017873cfd9a267c04957 neighbor 172.30.1.250 no shutdown 5332332 9911991 65057 18508 12182 7018 46164 i The following example shows the bgp asnotation asdot command output. DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#bgp asnotation asdot DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#sho conf ! router bgp 100 bgp asnotation asdot bgp four-octet-as-support neighbor 172.30.1.250 remote-as 18508 neighbor 172.30.1.250 local-as 65057 neighbor 172.30.1.
neighbor {ip-address | ipv6–address | peer-group-name} activate NOTE: Neighbors have to be activated using neighbor activate command in the respective address family. To exchange other address prefix types (IPv4 multicast or IPv6 unicast), the neighbors must be activated under the respective address family configuration such as address-family ipv4 multicast (for IPv4 multicast) andaddress-family ipv6 unicast(for IPv6). DellEMC(conf)# router bgp 10 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 20.20.20.
Following is an example to enable BGP configuration in the router B. RouterB# configure terminal RouterB(conf)# router bgp 45000 RouterB(conf-router_bgp)# bgp router-id 172.17.1.99 RouterB(conf-router_bgp)# timers bgp 70 120 RouterB(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.1.2 remote-as 40000 RouterB(conf-router_bgp)# exit RouterB(conf)# The show ip bgp summary displays BGP configuration. Following is the sample output for show ip bgp summary command for router A.
After you create a peer group, you can configure route policies for it. For information about configuring route policies for a peer group, refer to Filtering BGP Routes. See Example-Configuring BGP peer groups for configuring multiple BGP neighbors and enabling peer groups. Configuring Peer Groups To configure a peer group, use the following commands. 1. Enter the router configuration mode and the AS number. CONFIG mode router bgp as-number 2. Create a peer group by assigning a name to it.
A neighbor may keep its configuration after it was added to a peer group if the neighbor’s configuration is more specific than the peer group’s and if the neighbor’s configuration does not affect outgoing updates. NOTE: When you configure a new set of BGP policies for a peer group, always reset the peer group by entering the clear ip bgp peer-group peer-group-name command in EXEC Privilege mode. To view the configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode.
Example of Enabling BGP (Router 1) R1# conf R1(conf)#int loop 0 R1(conf-if-lo-0)#ip address 192.168.128.1/32 R1(conf-if-lo-0)#no shutdown R1(conf-if-lo-0)#show config ! interface Loopback 0 ip address 192.168.128.1/24 no shutdown R1(conf-if-lo-0)#int tf 1/21 R1(conf-if-tf-1/21)#ip address 10.0.1.21/24 R1(conf-if-tf-1/21)#no shutdown R1(conf-if-tf-1/21)#show config ! interface twentyFiveGigE 1/21 ip address 10.0.1.21/24 no shutdown R1(conf-if-tf-1/21)#int tf 1/31 R1(conf-if-tf-1/31)#ip address 10.0.3.
router bgp 99 network 192.168.128.0/24 neighbor 192.168.128.2 remote-as 99 neighbor 192.168.128.2 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 10.0.3.33 no shutdown neighbor 10.0.3.33 remote-as 100 Example of Enabling BGP (Router 2) R2# conf R2(conf)#int loop 0 R2(conf-if-lo-0)#ip address 192.168.128.2/32 R2(conf-if-lo-0)#no shutdown R2(conf-if-lo-0)#show config ! interface Loopback 0 ip address 192.168.128.2/24 no shutdown R2(conf-if-lo-0)#int tf 2/11 R2(conf-if-tf-2/11)#ip address 10.0.1.
R3(conf-if-tf-3/21)#router bgp 100 R3(conf-router_bgp)#show config ! router bgp 100 R3(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 10.0.3.31 remote 99 R3(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 10.0.3.31 no shut R3(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 10.0.2.2 remote 99 R3(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 10.0.2.2 no shut R3(conf-router_bgp)#show config ! router bgp 100 neighbor 10.0.3.31 remote 99 neighbor 10.0.3.31 no shut neighbor 10.0.2.2 remote 99 neighbor 10.0.2.
network 192.168.128.0/24 neighbor AAA peer-group neighbor AAA no shutdown neighbor BBB peer-group neighbor BBB no shutdown neighbor 192.168.128.1 remote-as 99 neighbor 192.168.128.1 peer-group CCC neighbor 192.168.128.1 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.128.1 no shutdown neighbor 192.168.128.3 remote-as 100 neighbor 192.168.128.3 peer-group BBB neighbor 192.168.128.3 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.128.
BGP soft-reconfiguration clears the policies without resetting the TCP connection. To reset a BGP connection using BGP soft-reconfiguration, use the clear ip bgp command in EXEC Privilege mode at the system prompt. When you change the BGP inbound policy locally, you need to process the updates received from a peer. The route-refresh capability allows the local peer to reset inbound information dynamically by exchanging route-refresh requests to supporting peers.
If neighbor soft-reconfiguration inbound command is not configured ever in the router, then doing a soft reset is enough for the route-refresh updates to be sent. Route-refresh updates for IPv4 and IPv6 prefixes This section explains the route-refresh functionality in different combinations for IPv4 or IPv6 prefix configured with IPv4 or IPv6 neighbors. By default, the IPv4 prefixes is sent for all the neighbors irrespective of IPv4 address family is enabled or disabled.
DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#do clear ip bgp 20::2 soft in May 8 15:40:08 : BGP: 20::2 sending ROUTE_REFRESH AFI/SAFI (1/1) May 8 15:40:08 : BGP: 20::2 sending ROUTE_REFRESH AFI/SAFI (2/1) May 8 15:40:08 : BGP: 20::2 UPDATE rcvd packet len 56 May 8 15:40:08 : BGP: 20::2 rcvd UPDATE w/ attr: origin ?, path metric 0, 200, nexthop 20.1.1.2, Controlling route-refresh updates You can control route-refresh updates for IPv4 and IPv6 prefixes.
aggregate—address address-mask Use the aggregate-address command without any keywords to create an aggregate entry if any specific BGP routes are available in the specified range. DellEMC# configure terminal DellEMC(conf)# router bgp 100 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# aggregate-address 10.1.1.0/24 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# exit DellEMC(conf)# Following is the sample output of show ip bgp command. DellEMC# show ip bgp BGP local RIB : Routes to be Added 0, Replaced 0, Withdrawn 0 BGP local router ID is 30.30.30.
Filtering BGP The following section describes the methods used to filter the updates received from BGP neighbors. Following are the filtering methods of BGP updates: ● Filtering using IP prefix lists ● Filtering using route maps ● Filtering using AS-PATH information ● Filtering using community lists Regular Expressions as Filters Regular expressions are used to filter AS paths or community lists.
neighbor AAA no shutdown neighbor 10.155.15.2 remote-as 32 neighbor 10.155.15.2 shutdown DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#neigh 10.155.15.2 filter-list 1 in DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#ex DellEMC(conf)#ip as-path access-list Eagle DellEMC(config-as-path)#deny 32$ DellEMC(config-as-path)#ex DellEMC(conf)#router bgp 99 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor AAA filter-list Eagle in DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#show conf ! router bgp 99 neighbor AAA peer-group neighbor AAA filter-list Eaglein neighbor AAA no shutdown neighbor 10.
CONFIGURATION mode ip prefix-list prefix-name 2. Create multiple prefix list filters with a deny or permit action. CONFIG-PREFIX LIST mode seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {any | ip-prefix [ge | le] } ● ge: minimum prefix length to be matched. ● le: maximum prefix length to me matched. For information about configuring prefix lists, refer to Access Control Lists (ACLs). 3. Return to CONFIGURATION mode. CONFIG-PREFIX LIST mode exit 4. Enter ROUTER BGP mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number 5.
{match | set} For information about configuring route maps, see Access Control Lists (ACLs). 3. Return to CONFIGURATION mode. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode exit 4. Enter ROUTER BGP mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number 5. Filter routes based on the criteria in the configured route map.
4. Enter ROUTER BGP mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number 5. Use a configured AS-PATH ACL for route filtering and manipulation. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | ipv6-address | peer-group-name} filter-list as-path-name {in | out} If you assign an non-existent or empty AS-PATH ACL, the software allows all routes. To view all BGP path attributes in the BGP database, use the show ip bgp paths command in EXEC Privilege mode.
neighbor {ip-address | ipv6-address | peer-group-name} route-map map-name {in | out} DellEMC# configure terminal DellEMC(conf)# router bgp 400 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 10.10.10.1 remote-as 500 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 10.10.10.
Received 6 updates, Sent 0 updates Route refresh request: received 0, sent 0 Minimum time between advertisement runs is 5 seconds Minimum time before advertisements start is 0 seconds Capabilities received from neighbor for IPv4 Unicast : MULTIPROTO_EXT(1) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) Capabilities advertised to neighbor for IPv4 Unicast : MULTIPROTO_EXT(1) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) fall-over enabled Update source set to Loopback 0 Peer active in peer-group outbound optimization
When a BGP neighbor connection with authentication configured is rejected by a passive peer-group, Dell EMC Networking OS does not allow another passive peer-group on the same subnet to connect with the BGP neighbor. To work around this, change the BGP configuration or change the order of the peer group configuration. You can constrain the number of passive sessions accepted by the neighbor. The limit keyword allows you to set the total number of sessions the neighbor will accept, between 2 and 265.
bgp graceful-restart ● Set maximum restart time, in seconds, to restart and bring-up all the peers. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp graceful-restart [restart-time time-in-seconds] The default is 120 seconds. ● Set maximum time, in seconds, to retain the restarting peer’s stale paths. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp graceful-restart [stale-path-time time-in-seconds] The default is 360 seconds. ● Enable the local router to support graceful restart as a receiver only.
○ metric-type: external or internal. ○ route-map map-name: Specify the name of a configured route map to be consulted before adding the OSPF route. DellEMC# configure terminal DellEMC(conf)# ip route 10.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 null 0 DellEMC(conf)# router bgp 400 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp_af)# redistribute static DellEMC(conf-router_bgp_af)# exit The above configuration example show how to create a static route and redistribute the static routes into the BGP routing table.
list. After you create an IP community list, you can apply routing decisions to all routers meeting the criteria in the IP community list. IETF RFC 1997 defines the COMMUNITY attribute and the predefined communities of INTERNET, NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED, NO_ADVERTISE, and NO_EXPORT. All BGP routes belong to the INTERNET community.
CONFIGURATION mode ip extcommunity-list extcommunity-list-name 2. Two types of extended communities are supported. CONFIG-COMMUNITY-LIST mode {permit | deny} {{rt | soo} {ASN:NN | IPADDR:N} | regex REGEX-LINE} Filter routes based on the type of extended communities they carry using one of the following keywords: ● rt: route target. ● soo: route origin or site-of-origin. Support for matching extended communities against regular expression is also supported.
○ confed: Chooses the bestpath MED comparison of paths learned from BGP confederations. ○ missing-as-best: Treats a path without a MED value as the most preferred one. To view the non-default values, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. Manipulating the COMMUNITY Attribute A COMMUNITY attribute indicates that all the routes with that attribute belong to the same community grouping.
To view BGP routes matching a certain community number or a pre-defined BGP community, use the show ip bgp community command in EXEC Privilege mode. DellEMC>show ip bgp community BGP table version is 3762622, local router ID is 10.114.8.48 Status codes: s suppressed, d damped, h history, * valid, > best, i - internal Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete Network * i 3.0.0.0/8 *>i 4.2.49.12/30 * i 4.21.132.0/23 *>i 4.24.118.16/30 *>i 4.24.145.0/30 *>i 4.24.187.12/30 *>i 4.24.202.0/30 *>i 4.25.88.
CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set local-preference value 3. Return to CONFIGURATION mode. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode exit 4. Enter ROUTER BGP mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number 5. Apply the route-map to the neighbor or peer group’s incoming or outgoing routes.
weight: the range is from 0 to 65535. The default is 0. ● Sets weight for the route. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set weight weight weight: the range is from 0 to 65535. NOTE: The weight assigned using the set weight command under route map configuration override the weight assigned using the neighbor weight command. DellEMC# configure terminal DellEMC(conf)# router bgp 400 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 10.10.10.1 remote-as 500 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 10.10.10.
To illustrate how these rules affect routing, refer to the following illustration and the following steps. Routers B, C, D, E, and G are members of the same AS (AS100). These routers are also in the same Route Reflection Cluster, where Router D is the Route Reflector. Router E and H are client peers of Router D; Routers B and C and nonclient peers of Router D. Figure 25. BGP Router Rules 1. Router B receives an advertisement from Router A through eBGP.
Enabling Route Flap Dampening When EBGP routes become unavailable, they “flap” and the router issues both WITHDRAWN and UPDATE notices. A ● ● ● flap is when a route: is withdrawn is readvertised after being withdrawn has an attribute change The constant router reaction to the WITHDRAWN and UPDATE notices causes instability in the BGP process. To minimize this instability, you may configure penalties (a numeric value) for routes that flap.
● View all flap statistics or for specific routes meeting the following criteria. EXEC or EXEC Privilege mode show ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] flap-statistics [ip-address [mask]] [filter-list as-path-name] [regexp regular-expression] ○ ip-address [mask]: enter the IP address and mask. ○ filter-list as-path-name: enter the name of an AS-PATH ACL. ○ regexp regular-expression: enter a regular express to match on.
Changing BGP keepalive and hold timers BGP uses timers to control the activity of sending the keepalive messages to its neighbors or peers. Also, you can adjust the interval of how long the device has to wait for a keepalive messge from a neighbor before declaring the peer dead. To configure BGP timers, use either or both of the following commands. To change the BGP timers for all neighbors, use timers bgp command.
idle-holdtime: the range is from 1 to 32767. Time interval, in seconds, during which the peer remains in idle state. The default is 15 seconds. ● Configure idle-holdtime values for all BGP neighbors. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode timers bgp extended idle holdtime idle-holdtime: the range is from 1 to 32767. Time interval, in seconds, during which the peer remains in idle state. The default is 15 seconds.
ROUTER-BGP Mode shutdown address-family-ipv6-unicast When you configure BGP, you must explicitly enable the BGP neighbors using the following commands: neighbor {ip-address | peer-group name} remote-as as-number neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} no shutdown For more information on enabling BGP, see Enabling BGP.
Configuring BGP Confederations Another way to organize routers within an AS and reduce the mesh for IBGP peers is to configure BGP confederations. As with route reflectors, BGP confederations are recommended only for IBGP peering involving many IBGP peering sessions per router. Basically, when you configure BGP confederations, you break the AS into smaller sub-AS, and to those outside your network, the confederations appear as one AS.
The following are the sample steps performed to configure a VRF, and VRF address families for IPv4 (unicast and multicast) and IPv6. DellEMC(conf)# ip vrf vrf1 DellEMC(conf-vrf)# exit DellEMC(conf)# router bgp 100 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# address-family ipv4 vrf vrf1 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp_af)# neighbor 50.0.0.2 remote-as 200 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp_af)# neighbor 50.0.0.2 maximum-prefix 10000 warning-only DellEMC(conf-router_bgp_af)# neighbor 50.0.0.
Format: IPv4 Address: A.B.C.D and IPv6 address: X:X:X:X::X. You must Configure Peer Groups before assigning it to an AS. This feature is not supported on passive peer groups. The first line in bold shows the actual AS number. The second two lines in bold show the local AS number (6500) maintained during migration. To disable this feature, use the no neighbor local-as command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. R2(conf-router_bgp)#show conf ! router bgp 65123 bgp router-id 192.168.10.2 network 10.10.21.
neighbor 100.10.92.9 local-as 6500 neighbor 100.10.92.9 no shutdown neighbor 192.168.10.1 remote-as 65123 neighbor 192.168.10.1 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.10.1 no shutdown neighbor 192.168.12.2 remote-as 65123 neighbor 192.168.12.2 allowas-in 9 neighbor 192.168.12.2 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.12.2 no shutdown R2(conf-router_bgp)#R2(conf-router_bgp)# Enabling MBGP Configurations Multiprotocol BGP (MBGP) is an enhanced BGP that carries IP multicast routes.
CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode address-family ipv6 [unicast | vrf vrf-name] unicast — Specifies the IPv6 unicast address family. The default address-family is IPv6 unicast. vrf vrf-name — Specifies the name of VRF instance associated with the IPv6 address-family configuration. ● Enable the neighbor to exchange prefixes for IPv6 unicast address family.
address family. If you want the neighbor (30.30.30.1) to exchange IPv4 multicast and/or IPv6 unicast prefixes, you have to explicitly active the neighbor using neighbor activate command. If you do not want a neighbor to exchange IPv4 unicast prefixes, you have to manually deactivate the peer with the no neighbor activate command under the CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-BGP mode.
BGP local RIB : Routes to be Added 0, Replaced 0, Withdrawn 0 2 neighbor(s) using 40960 bytes of memory Neighbor 20.20.20.1 2001::1 AS 10 10 MsgRcvd 10 40 MsgSent 20 45 TblVer 0 0 InQ 0 0 OutQ Up/Down State/Pfx 0 00:06:11 0 0 00:03:14 0 Following is the sample output of show ip bgp ipv4 multicast summary command. R2# show ip bgp ipv4 multicast summary BGP router identifier 2.2.2.
The following example configuration demonstrates how to configure BGP to automatically pick IPv6 address for IPv6 prefix advertised over an IPv4 neighbor. Example configuration performed in R1 DellEMC# configure terminal DellEMC(conf)# router bgp 655 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 10.1.1.2 remote-as 20 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 10.1.1.2 auto-local-address DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 10.1.1.2 no shutdown DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# bgp router-id 1.1.1.
*> *> 4001::/64 5001::/64 3001::1 3001::1 0 0 0 655 ? 0 655 ? BGP Regular Expression Optimization Dell EMC Networking OS optimizes processing time when using regular expressions by caching and re-using regular expression evaluated results, at the expense of some memory in RP1 processor. BGP policies that contain regular expressions to match against as-paths and communities might take a lot of CPU processing time, thus affect BGP routing convergence.
Storing Last and Bad PDUs Dell EMC Networking OS stores the last notification sent/received and the last bad protocol data unit (PDU) received on a per peer basis. The last bad PDU is the one that causes a notification to be issued. In the following example, the last seven lines shown in bold are the last PDUs. Example of the show ip bgp neighbor Command to View Last and Bad PDUs DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#do show ip bgp neighbors 1.1.1.2 BGP neighbor is 1.1.1.
10 Content Addressable Memory (CAM) CAM is a type of memory that stores information in the form of a lookup table. On Dell EMC Networking systems, CAM stores Layer 2 (L2) and Layer 3 (L3) forwarding information, access-lists (ACLs), flows, and routing policies.
Table 11. Default Cam Allocation Settings (continued) CAM Allocation Setting nlbclusteracl 0 NOTE: When you reconfigure CAM allocation, use the nlbclusteracl number command to change the number of NLB ARP entries. The range is from 0 to 2. The default value is 0. At the default value of 0, eight NLB ARP entries are available for use. This platform supports upto 512 CAM entries. Select 1 to configure 256 entries. Select 2 to configure 1024 entries.
cam-acl {default | l2acl number ipv4acl number ipv6acl number ipv4qos number l2qos number l2pt number ipmacacl number vman-qos | vman-dual-qos number ecfmacl number nlbcluster number ipv4pbr number openflow number | fcoe number [vrfv4acl number] NOTE: If you do not enter the allocation values for the CAM regions, the value is 0. 3. Execute write memory and verify that the new settings are written to the CAM on the next boot. EXEC Privilege mode show cam-acl 4. Reload the system.
Ipv6Acl : Ipv4Qos : L2Qos : L2PT : IpMacAcl : VmanQos : EtsAcl : FcoeAcl : ipv4pbr : vrfv4Acl : Openflow : fedgovacl : nlbclusteracl: 0 2 2 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DellEMC# NOTE: If you change the cam-acl setting from CONFIGURATION mode, the output of this command does not reflect any changes until you save the running-configuration and reload the chassis.
Example of the show cam-usage Command DellEMC#show cam-usage Stackunit|Portpipe|Pipeline| CAM Partition | Total CAM | Used CAM |Available CAM ========|========|========|=================|=============|=============|============== 1 | 0 | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | 0 | 0 | 0 | | | IN-L3 ACL | 512 | 1 | 511 | | | IN-L3 ECMP GRP | 2048 | 0 | 2048 | | | IN-V6 ACL | 256 | 0 | 256 | | | IN-NLB ACL | 0 | 0 | 0 | | | IPMAC ACL | 256 | 0 | 256 | | | IN-L3-UDFMIRRACL| 256 | 3 | 253 (IN-V6-MIRR ACL) | | | IN-L3-MIRR ACL | 0 | 0
Dell EMC Networking OS supports the ability to view the actual CAM usage before applying a service-policy. The test camusage service-policy command provides this test framework. For more information, refer to Pre-Calculating Available QoS CAM Space. Syslog Error When the Table is Full In the Dell EMC Networking OS, the table full condition is displayed as CAM full only for LPM. But now the LPM is split into two tables. There are two syslog errors that are displayed: 1. /65 to /128 Table full. 2.
Hardware forwarding-table mode is changed. Save the configuration and reload to take effect.
11 Control Plane Policing (CoPP) Control plane policing (CoPP) uses access control list (ACL) rules and quality of service (QoS) policies to create filters for a system’s control plane. That filter prevents traffic not specifically identified as legitimate from reaching the system control plane, rate-limits, traffic to an acceptable level.
Figure 28. CoPP Implemented Versus CoPP Not Implemented Topics: • Configure Control Plane Policing Configure Control Plane Policing The system can process a maximum of 8500 packets per second (PPS). Protocols that share a single queue may experience flaps if one of the protocols receives a high rate of control traffic even though per protocol CoPP is applied. This happens because queue-based rate limiting is applied first.
Configuring CoPP for Protocols This section lists the commands necessary to create and enable the service-policies for CoPP. For complete information about creating ACLs and QoS rules, refer to Access Control Lists (ACLs) and Quality of Service (QoS). The basics for creating a CoPP service policy are to create a Layer 2, Layer 3, and/or an IPv6 ACL rule for the desired protocol type. Then, create a QoS input policy to rate-limit the protocol traffics according to the ACL.
DellEMC(conf)#mac access-list extended lacp cpu-qos DellEMC(conf-mac-acl-cpuqos)#permit lacp DellEMC(conf-mac-acl-cpuqos)#exit DellEMC(conf)#ipv6 access-list ipv6-icmp cpu-qos DellEMC(conf-ipv6-acl-cpuqos)#permit icmp DellEMC(conf-ipv6-acl-cpuqos)#exit DellEMC(conf)#ipv6 access-list ipv6-vrrp cpu-qos DellEMC(conf-ipv6-acl-cpuqos)#permit vrrp DellEMC(conf-ipv6-acl-cpuqos)#exit The following example shows creating the QoS input policy.
1. Create a QoS input policy for the router and assign the policing. CONFIGURATION mode qos-policy-input name cpu-qos 2. Create an input policy-map to assign the QoS policy to the desired service queues.l. CONFIGURATION mode policy-map--input name cpu-qos service-queue queue-number qos-policy name 3. Enter Control Plane mode. CONFIGURATION mode control-plane-cpuqos 4. Assign a CPU queue-based service policy on the control plane in cpu-qos mode.
Table 15.
Displaying CoPP Configuration The CLI provides show commands to display the protocol traffic assigned to each control-plane queue and the current rate-limit applied to each queue. Other show commands display statistical information for trouble shooting CoPP operation. To view the rates for each queue, use the show cpu-queue rate cp command.
Example of Viewing Queue Mapping for IPv6 Protocols DellEMC#show ipv6 protocol-queue-mapping Protocol Src-Port Dst-Port TcpFlag ---------------------------TCP (BGP) any/179 179/any _ UDP (DHCPV6) 546/547 546/547 _ ICMPV6 NA any any _ ICMPV6 RA any any _ ICMPV6 NS any any _ ICMPV6 RS any any _ ICMPV6 any any _ VRRPV6 any any _ OSPFV3 any any _ DellEMC# Queue ----Q9 Q10 Q6 Q6 Q5 Q5 Q6 Q10 Q9 EgPort -----_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Rate (kbps) ----------_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Control Plane Policing (CoPP) 241
12 Data Center Bridging (DCB) Data center bridging (DCB) refers to a set of enhancements to Ethernet local area networks used in data center environments, particularly with clustering and storage area networks.
A CNA is a computer input/output device that combines the functionality of a host bus adapter (HBA) with a network interface controller (NIC). Multiple adapters on different devices for several traffic types are no longer required.
Figure 29. Illustration of Traffic Congestion The system supports loading two DCB_Config files: ● FCoE converged traffic with priority 3. ● iSCSI storage traffic with priority 4. ● FCoE converged traffic with priority 3. In the Dell EMC Networking OS, PFC is implemented as follows: ● PFC is supported on specified 802.1p priority traffic (dot1p 0 to 7) and is configured per interface.
NOTE: Use the following command to enable etsacl: cam-acl l2acl 2 ipv4acl 2 ipv6acl 0 ipv4qos 0 l2qos 0 l2pt 0 ipmacacl 0 vman-qos 0 fcoeacl 2 etsacl 3. After executing this command, you must save the configuration and then reload the system. The following figure shows how ETS allows you to allocate bandwidth when different traffic types are classed according to 802.1p priority and mapped to priority groups. Figure 30.
Data Center Bridging in a Traffic Flow The following figure shows how DCB handles a traffic flow on an interface. Figure 31. DCB PFC and ETS Traffic Handling Buffer Organization This section describes the buffer organization on the platform. A single chip architecture can allocate or share all its resource on all the ports. However, the system runs on a different 2x2 chip design. In this design, all ports are assigned to four port-sets.
(KB) (KB) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 0.0 4727 2656 1040 1040 576 1 0.1 4727 2656 1040 1040 576 1 0.2 4727 2656 1040 1040 576 1 0.
PFC Total Buffer: Maximum buffer available for lossless queues. PFC Shared Buffer: Buffer used by ingress priority groups for shared usage. PFC Headroom Buffer: Buffer used by ingress priority group for shared headroom usage. PFC Available Buffer: Current buffer available for new lossless queues to be Provisioned.
Table 17. XPE Numbering on Dell EMC Networking OS (continued) XPE Numbering XPE A of MMU Slice S 0.1 XPE B of MMU Slice R 0.2 XPE B of MMU Slice S 0.3 Enabling Data Center Bridging DCB is automatically configured when you configure FCoE or iSCSI optimization. Data center bridging supports converged enhanced Ethernet (CEE) in a data center network. DCB is disabled by default. It must be enabled to support CEE.
Important Points to Remember ● If you remove a dot1p priority-to-priority group mapping from a DCB map (no priority pgid command), the PFC and ETS parameters revert to their default values on the interfaces on which the DCB map is applied. By default, PFC is not applied on specific 802.1p priorities; ETS assigns equal bandwidth to each 802.1p priority. As a result, PFC and lossless port queues are disabled on 802.
CONFIGURATION mode priority-group group-num {bandwidth bandwidth | strict-priority} pfc on The range for priority group is from 0 to 7. Set the bandwidth in percentage. The percentage range is from 1 to 100% in units of 1%. Committed and peak bandwidth is in megabits per second. The range is from 0 to 100000. Committed and peak burst size is in kilobytes. Default is 50. The range is from 0 to 100000. The pfc on command enables priority-based flow control. 3.
For the dot1p-queue assignments, refer to the dot1p Priority-Queue Assignment table. The maximum number of lossless queues globally supported on the switch is two. The range is from 0 to 7. Separate the queue values with a comma; specify a priority range with a dash; for example, pfc no-drop queues 1,7 or pfc no-drop queues 2-7. The default: No lossless queues are configured. 3. Configure to drop the unknown unicast packets flooding on lossless priorities.
that are received in TLVs from peer devices. By applying a DCB map with PFC enabled, you enable PFC operations on ingress port traffic. To achieve complete lossless handling of traffic, configure PFC priorities on all DCB egress ports. When you apply or remove a DCB input policy from an interface, one or two CRC errors are expected to be noticed on the ingress ports for each removal or attachment of the policy. This behavior occurs because the port is brought down when PFC is configured.
Table 18. DCB Map to an Ethernet Port Step Task Command Command Mode 1 Enter interface configuration mode on an Ethernet port. interface interfacetype } CONFIGURATION 2 Apply the DCB map on the Ethernet port to configure it with the PFC and ETS settings in the map; for example: dcb-map name INTERFACE DellEMC# interface tewntyfiveGigE 1/1 DellEMC(config-if-tf-1/1)# dcb-map SAN_A_dcb_map1 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to apply a DCB map to more than one port.
PFC no-drop queues are configured for queues 1, 2 on Port B. PFC capability is enabled on priorities 3, 4 on PORT A and C. Port B acting as Egress During the congestion, [traffic pump on priorities 3 and 4 from PORT A and PORT C is at full line rate], PORT A and C send out the PFCs to rate the traffic limit. Egress drops are not observed on Port B since traffic flow on priorities is mapped to loss less queues.
Priority-Based Flow Control Using Dynamic Buffer Method In a data center network, priority-based flow control (PFC) manages large bursts of one traffic type in multiprotocol links so that it does not affect other traffic types and no frames are lost due to congestion. When PFC detects congestion on a queue for a specified priority, it sends a pause frame for the 802.1p priority traffic to the transmitting device.
This default behavior is impacted if you modify the total buffer available for PFC or assign static buffer configurations to the individual PFC queues. Shared headroom for lossless or PFC packets In switches that require lossless frame delivery, some fixed buffer is set aside to absorb any bursty traffic that arrives after flow control is configured (PFC in this case). This extra buffer space is called the PG headroom. The additional buffer space is reserved for ingress ports per PG.
In the shared headroom feature, the main assumption is that not every PG uses the headroom buffer at the same time. This approach enables the system to save the headroom buffer space that is reserved for every PG to guarantee lossless delivery during traffic bursts. For each PG, you can assign a lower value for headroom buffer. This headroom buffer is sufficient enough to guarantee lossless behavior as this buffer is global and is shared among all the lossless queues.
NOTE: The detail option display the current headroom pool usage in each of the Pipelines in the device.
Expected PFC Priority 1 2 To configure the aforementioned DSCP and PFC priority values, perform the following tasks: 1. Create class-maps to group the DSCP subsets class-map match ip ! class-map match ip match-any dscp-pfc-1 dscp 0-5,10-15 match-any dscp-pfc-2 dscp 20-25,30-35 2. Associate above class-maps to Queues Queue assignment as below. Table 23.
● dellNetFpStatsPerPgTable ● dellNetPfcPerPrioTable dellNetFpEgrQBu This table fetches the BST statistics at Egress Port for the buffer used. This table displays the Snapshot ffSnapshotTable of the Buffer cells used by Unicast and Multicast Data and Control Queues. dellNetFpIngPgB uffSnapshotTabl e This table fetches the BST statistics at the Ingress Port for the Shared Cells, and the Headroom cells used per Priority Group.
Table 24. Priority to Queue Mapping (continued) Internal-priority Queue 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 Table 24. Priority to Queue Mapping Dot1p Priority Queue 0 1 1 0 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 Default dot1p to queue configuration is as follows: Table 25. Dot1p to Queue Mapping Packet-Dot1p Queue 0 2 1 0 2 1 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 Table 25.
Table 25. Dot1p to Queue Mapping (continued) Dot1p Priority Queue 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 PFC and ETS Configuration Examples This section contains examples of how to configure and apply DCB policies on an interface. Using PFC to Manage Converged Ethernet Traffic To use PFC for managing converged Ethernet traffic, use the following command: dcb-map stack-unit all dcb-map-name Operations on Untagged Packets The below is example for enabling PFC for priority 2 for tagged packets.
Generation of PFC for a Priority for Untagged Packets In order to generate PFC for a particular priority for untagged packets, and configuring PFC for that priority, you should find the queue number associated with priority from TABLE 1 and Associate a DCB map to forward the matched DSCP packet to that queue. PFC frames gets generated with PFC priority associated with the queue when the queue gets congested.
Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: A priority group consists of 802.1p priority values that are grouped for similar bandwidth allocation and scheduling, and that share latency and loss requirements. All 802.1p priorities mapped to the same queue must be in the same priority group. Configure all 802.1p priorities in priority groups associated with an ETS output policy. You can assign each dot1p priority to only one priority group. By default, all 802.
● ETS-assigned bandwidth allocation and strict-priority scheduling apply only to data queues, not to control queues. ● Dell EMC Networking OS supports hierarchical scheduling on an interface. The control traffic on Dell EMC Networking OS is redirected to control queues as higher priority traffic with strict priority scheduling. After the control queues drain out, the remaining data traffic is scheduled to queues according to the bandwidth and scheduler configuration in the DCB map.
Priority group 1 Assigns traffic to one priority queue with 20% of the link bandwidth and strict-priority scheduling. Priority group 2 Assigns traffic to one priority queue with 30% of the link bandwidth. Priority group 3 Assigns traffic to two priority queues with 50% of the link bandwidth and strict-priority scheduling.
DCBx Operation DCBx performs the following operations: ● Discovers DCB configuration (such as PFC and ETS) in a peer device. ● Detects DCB mis-configuration in a peer device; that is, when DCB features are not compatibly configured on a peer device and the local switch. Mis-configuration detection is feature-specific because some DCB features support asymmetric configuration.
configuration source, all PFC and application priority TLVs are enabled. ETS recommend TLVs are disabled and ETS configuration TLVs are enabled. Manual The port is configured to operate only with administrator-configured settings and does not auto-configure with DCB settings received from a DCBx peer or from an internally propagated configuration from the configuration source.
○ The port is enabled with link up and DCBx enabled. ○ The port has performed a DCBx exchange with a DCBx peer. ○ The switch is capable of supporting the received DCB configuration values through either a symmetric or asymmetric parameter exchange. A newly elected configuration source propagates configuration changes received from a peer to the other auto-configuration ports.
Figure 32. DCBx Sample Topology DCBx Prerequisites and Restrictions The following prerequisites and restrictions apply when you configure DCBx operation on a port: ● For DCBx, on a port interface, enable LLDP in both Send (TX) and Receive (RX) mode (the protocol lldp mode command; refer to the example in in the chapter). If multiple DCBx peer ports are detected on a local DCBx interface, LLDP is shut down.
4. Configure the DCBx port role the interface uses to exchange DCB information. PROTOCOL LLDP mode [no] DCBx port-role {config-source | auto-downstream | auto-upstream | manual} ● auto-upstream: configures the port to receive a peer configuration. The configuration source is elected from autoupstream ports. ● auto-downstream: configures the port to accept the internally propagated DCB configuration from a configuration source.
● ieee-v2.5: configures a port to use IEEE 802.1Qaz (Draft 2.5). The default is Auto. NOTE: To configure the DCBx port role the interfaces use to exchange DCB information, use the DCBx port-role command in INTERFACE Configuration mode (Step 3). 4. Configure the PFC and ETS TLVs that advertise on unconfigured interfaces with a manual port-role.
DCBx Error Messages The following syslog messages appear when an error in DCBx operation occurs. LLDP_MULTIPLE_PEER_DETECTED: DCBx is operationally disabled after detecting more than one DCBx peer on the port interface. LLDP_PEER_AGE_OUT: DCBx is disabled as a result of LLDP timing out on a DCBx peer interface. DSM_DCBx_PEER_VERSION_CONFLICT: A local port expected to receive the IEEE, CIN, or CEE version in a DCBx TLV from a remote peer but received a different, conflicting DCBx version.
Verifying the DCB Configuration To display DCB configurations, use the following show commands. Table 26. Displaying DCB Configurations Command Output show qos dot1p-queue mapping Displays the current 802.1p priority-queue mapping. Displays the data center bridging status, number of PFCenabled ports, and number of PFC-enabled queues. show qos priority-groups Displays the ETS priority groups configured on the switch, including the 802.1p priority classes and ID of each group.
PfcMode:ON -------------------PG:0 TSA:ETS BW:50 PFC:OFF Priorities:0 1 2 5 6 7 PG:1 TSA:ETS BW:50 Priorities:3 4 PFC:ON The following example shows the show interfaces pfc summary command.
Table 27. show interface pfc summary Command Description (continued) Fields Description Operational status (local port) DCBx operational status (enabled or disabled) with a list of the configured PFC priorities. Port state for current operational PFC configuration: ● Init: Local PFC configuration parameters were exchanged with peer. ● Recommend: Remote PFC configuration parameters were received from peer. ● Internally propagated: PFC configuration parameters were received from configuration source.
Hu 1/49 Hu 1/49 Hu 1/49 DellEMC# DellEMC# P5 P6 P7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The following example shows the show interface ets summary command.
3 4 5 6 7 Priority# Bandwidth TSA 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Remote Parameters: ------------------Remote is disabled Local Parameters : -----------------Local is enabled TC-grp Priority# 0 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS 13% 13% 13% 13% 12% 12% 12% 12% ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS Bandwidth 100% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% TSA ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS Priority# Bandwidth 0 13% 1 13% 2 13% 3 13% 4 12% 5 12% 6 12% 7 12% Oper status is init Conf TLV Tx Status is disabled Traffic
Table 28. show interface ets detail Command Description (continued) Field Description Local Parameters ETS configuration on local port, including Admin mode (enabled when a valid TLV is received from a peer), priority groups, assigned dot1p priorities, and bandwidth allocation. Operational status (local port) Port state for current operational ETS configuration: ● Init: Local ETS configuration parameters were exchanged with peer. ● Recommend: Remote ETS configuration parameters were received from peer.
Interface twentyFiveGigE 1/14 Remote Mac Address 00:01:e8:8a:df:a0 Port Role is Auto-Upstream DCBx Operational Status is Enabled Is Configuration Source? FALSE Local DCBx Compatibility mode is CEE Local DCBx Configured mode is CEE Peer Operating version is CEE Local DCBx TLVs Transmitted: ErPFi Local DCBx Status ----------------DCBx Operational Version is 0 DCBx Max Version Supported is 0 Sequence Number: 1 Acknowledgment Number: 1 Protocol State: In-Sync Peer DCBx Status: ---------------DCBx Operational Ve
Table 29. show interface DCBx detail Command Description (continued) Field Description Peer DCBx Status: DCBx Operational Version DCBx version advertised in Control TLVs received from peer device. Peer DCBx Status: DCBx Max Version Supported Highest DCBx version supported in Control TLVs received from peer device. Peer DCBx Status: Sequence Number Sequence number transmitted in Control TLVs received from peer device.
dcb pfc-total-buffer-size value Add dcb pfc-headroom-buffer-size value The buffer size range is from 0 to 4727. The Default value for PFC total buffer is 2656 KB and that of PFC shared buffer and headroom buffer is 1040 KB. 3. Configure the number of PFC queues. CONFIGURATION mode dcb enable pfc-queues pfc-queues The number of ports supported based on lossless queues configured depends on the buffer. The default number of PFC queues in the system is two.
Figure 33. PFC and ETS Applied to LAN, IPC, and SAN Priority Traffic QoS Traffic Classification: The service-class dynamic dot1p command has been used in Global Configuration mode to map ingress dot1p frames to the queues shown in the following table. For more information, refer to QoS dot1p Traffic Classification and Queue Assignment.
The following describes the priority group-bandwidth assignment. Priority Group Bandwidth Assignment IPC 5% SAN 50% LAN 45% PFC and ETS Configuration Command Examples The following examples show PFC and ETS configuration commands to manage your data center traffic. 1. Enabling DCB DellEMC(conf)#dcb enable 2. Configure DCB map and enable PFC, and ETS DellEMC(conf)# service-class dynamic dot1p Or DellEMC(conf)# interface twentyFiveGigE 1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/1)# service-class dynamic dot1p 3.
13 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) DHCP is an application layer protocol that dynamically assigns IP addresses and other configuration parameters to network end-stations (hosts) based on configuration policies determined by network administrators.
Option Number and Description Subnet Mask Option 1 Specifies the client’s subnet mask. Router Option 3 Specifies the router IP addresses that may serve as the client’s default gateway. Domain Name Server Option 6 Domain Name Option 15 Specifies the domain name servers (DNSs) that are available to the client. Specifies the domain name that clients should use when resolving hostnames via DNS.
1. The client initially broadcasts a DHCPDISCOVER message on the subnet to discover available DHCP servers. This message includes the parameters that the client requires and might include suggested values for those parameters. 2. Servers unicast or broadcast a DHCPOFFER message in response to the DHCPDISCOVER that offers to the client values for the requested parameters. Multiple servers might respond to a single DHCPDISCOVER; the client might wait a period of time and then act on the most preferred offer.
● All platforms support Dynamic ARP Inspection on 16 VLANs per system. For more information, refer to Dynamic ARP Inspection. NOTE: If the DHCP server is on the top of rack (ToR) and the VLTi (ICL) is down due to a failed link, when a VLT node is rebooted in BMP (Bare Metal Provisioning) mode, it is not able to reach the DHCP server, resulting in BMP failure.
DHCP mode show config After an IP address is leased to a client, only that client may release the address. Dell EMC Networking OS performs a IP + MAC source address validation to ensure that no client can release another clients address. This validation is a default behavior and is separate from IP+MAC source address validation.
Configure a Method of Hostname Resolution Dell systems are capable of providing DHCP clients with parameters for two methods of hostname resolution—using DNS or NetBIOS WINS. Using DNS for Address Resolution A domain is a group of networks. DHCP clients query DNS IP servers when they need to correlate host names to IP addresses. 1. Create a domain. DHCP domain-name name 2. Specify in order of preference the DNS servers that are available to a DHCP client.
Debugging the DHCP Server To debug the DHCP server, use the following command. ● Display debug information for DHCP server. EXEC Privilege mode debug ip dhcp server [events | packets] Using DHCP Clear Commands To clear DHCP binding entries, address conflicts, and server counters, use the following commands. ● Clear DHCP binding entries for the entire binding table. EXEC Privilege mode. clear ip dhcp binding ● Clear a DHCP binding entry for an individual IP address. EXEC Privilege mode.
address, use the shutdown command on the interface. To display the dynamic IP address and show DHCP as the mode of IP address assignment, use the show interface type slot/port[/subport] command. To unconfigure the IP address, use the no shutdown command when the lease timer for the dynamic IP address is expired. The interface acquires a new dynamic IP address from the DHCP server. To configure a secondary (backup) IP address on an interface, use the ip address command at the INTERFACE configuration level.
DHCP Client on a Management Interface These conditions apply when you enable a management interface to operate as a DHCP client. ● The management default route is added with the gateway as the router IP address received in the DHCP ACK packet. It is required to send and receive traffic to and from other subnets on the external network. The route is added irrespective when the DHCP client and server are in the same or different subnets.
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Do not enable the DHCP client on an interface and set the priority to 255 or assign the same DHCP interface IP address to a VRRP virtual group. Doing so guarantees that this router becomes the VRRP group owner. To use the router as the VRRP owner, if you enable a DHCP client on an interface that is added to a VRRP group, assign a priority less than 255 but higher than any other priority assigned in the group.
{ip | ipv6} dhcp relay source-interface interface Following are the steps to configure interface specific source IPv4 or IPv6 configuration for DHCP relay. The below example shows when the DHCP relay uses the interface specific configuration and global source interface configuration depending on the configuration. 1. Configuring L3 interface with IPv4 or IPv6 address. Following are the steps to configure a L3 interface (loopback) with IPv4 and IPv6 address in INTERFACE MODE.
Option 82 (DHCPv4 relay options) RFC 3046 (the relay agent information option, or Option 82) is used for class-based IP address assignment. The code for the relay agent information option is 82, and includes two suboptions, circuit ID and remote ID. Circuit ID This is the interface on which the client-originated message is received. Remote ID This identifies the host from which the message is received. The value of this suboption is the MAC address of the relay agent that adds Option 82.
● Default Agent Interface ID is constructed in the format VLANID:LagID:SlotID:PortStr. When the port is fanned-out, the PortStr is represented as mainPort:subPort (all in ASCII format). ● Default Agent Remote ID is the system MAC address of the relay agent that adds Option 37 (in binary format). DHCP Snooping DHCP snooping is a feature that protects networks from spoofing. It acts as a firewall between the DHCP server and DHCP clients. DHCP snooping places the ports either in trusted or non-trusted mode.
Enabling DHCP Snooping To enable DHCP snooping, use the following commands. 1. Enable DHCP snooping globally. CONFIGURATION mode ip dhcp snooping 2. Specify ports connected to DHCP servers as trusted. INTERFACE mode INTERFACE PORT EXTENDER mode ip dhcp snooping trust 3. Enable DHCP snooping on a VLAN. CONFIGURATION mode ip dhcp snooping vlan name Enabling IPv6 DHCP Snooping To enable IPv6 DHCP snooping, use the following commands. 1. Enable IPv6 DHCP snooping globally.
clear ip dhcp snooping binding Clearing the DHCP IPv6 Binding Table To clear the DHCP IPv6 binding table, use the following command. ● Delete all of the entries in the binding table. EXEC Privilege mode clear ipv6 dhcp snooping binding DellEMC# clear ipv6 dhcp snooping? binding Clear the snooping binding database Displaying the Contents of the Binding Table To display the contents of the binding table, use the following command. ● Display the DHCP snooping information.
The following example output of the show ip dhcp snooping binding command displays that different IP addresses are mapped to the same MAC address: DellEMC#show ip dhcp snooping binding Codes : S - Static D - Dynamic IP Address MAC Address Expires(Sec) Type VLAN Interface ========================================================================= 10.1.1.100 00:00:a0:00:00:00 39735 S Vl 200 Tw 1/4 10.1.1.101 00:00:a0:00:00:00 39736 S Vl 200 Tw 1/4 10.1.1.
Debugging the IPv6 DHCP To debug the IPv6 DHCP, use the following command. ● Display debug information for IPV6 DHCP. EXEC Privilege mode debug ipv6 dhcp IPv6 DHCP Snooping MAC-Address Verification Configure to enable verify source mac-address in the DHCP packet against the mac address stored in the snooping binding table. ● Enable IPV6 DHCP snooping .
Broadcast An attacker can broadcast an ARP reply that specifies FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF as the gateway’s MAC address, resulting in all clients broadcasting all internet-bound packets. MAC flooding An attacker can send fraudulent ARP messages to the gateway until the ARP cache is exhausted, after which, traffic from the gateway is broadcast.
The rate burst interval range is from 1 to 15 seconds. The default is 1. DellEMC# show running-config interface twentyFiveGigE 1/1 interface twentyFiveGigE 1/1 no ip address switchport arp inspection-limit rate 15 interval 1 no shutdown DellEMC# Bypassing the ARP Inspection You can configure a port to skip ARP inspection by defining the interface as trusted, which is useful in multi-switch environments. ARPs received on trusted ports bypass validation against the binding table.
● Enable IP source address validation. INTERFACE mode ip dhcp source-address-validation ● Enable IP source address validation with VLAN option. INTERFACE mode ip dhcp source-address-validation vlan vlan-id NOTE: Before enabling SAV With VLAN option, allocate at least one FP block to the ipmacacl CAM region. DHCP MAC Source Address Validation DHCP MAC source address validation (SAV) validates a DHCP packet’s source hardware address against the client hardware address field (CHADDR) in the payload.
Viewing the Number of SAV Dropped Packets The following output of the show ip dhcp snooping source-address-validation discard-counters command displays the number of SAV dropped packets.
14 Equal Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) This chapter describes configuring ECMP. This chapter describes configuring ECMP. Topics: • • ECMP for Flow-Based Affinity Link Bundle Monitoring ECMP for Flow-Based Affinity ECMP for flow-based affinity includes link bundle monitoring. Configuring the Hash Algorithm TeraScale has one algorithm that is used for link aggregation groups (LAGs), ECMP, and NH-ECMP, and ExaScale can use three different algorithms for each of these features.
Configuring the Hash Algorithm Seed Deterministic ECMP sorts ECMPs in order even though RTM provides them in a random order. However, the hash algorithm uses as a seed the lower 12 bits of the chassis MAC, which yields a different hash result for every chassis. This behavior means that for a given flow, even though the prefixes are sorted, two unrelated chassis can select different hops.
Managing ECMP Group Paths To avoid path degeneration, configure the maximum number of paths for an ECMP route that the L3 CAM can hold. When you do not configure the maximum number of routes, the CAM can hold a maximum ECMP per route. To configure the maximum number of paths, use the following command. NOTE: For the new settings to take effect, save the new ECMP settings to the startup-config (write-mem) then reload the system. ● Configure the maximum number of paths per ECMP group. CONFIGURATION mode.
NOTE: An ecmp-group index is generated automatically for each unique ecmp-group when you configure multipath routes to the same network. The system can generate a maximum of 512 unique ecmp-groups. The ecmp-group indices are generated in even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6... 1022) and are for information only. You can configure ecmp-group with id 2 for link bundle monitoring. This ecmp-group is different from the ecmp-group index 2 that is created by configuring routes and is automatically generated.
15 FIP Snooping The Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Transit feature is supported on Ethernet interfaces. When you enable the switch for FCoE transit, the switch functions as a FIP snooping bridge. NOTE: FIP snooping is not supported on Fibre Channel interfaces or in a switch stack.
Table 33. FIP Functions FIP Function Description FIP VLAN discovery FCoE devices (ENodes) discover the FCoE VLANs on which to transmit and receive FIP and FCoE traffic. FIP discovery FCoE end-devices and FCFs are automatically discovered. Initialization FCoE devices learn ENodes from the FLOGI and FDISC to allow immediate login and create a virtual link with an FCoE switch. Maintenance A valid virtual link between an FCoE device and an FCoE switch is maintained and the LOGO functions properly.
Port-based ACLs These ACLs are applied on all three port modes: on ports directly connected to an FCF, server-facing ENode ports, and bridge-to-bridge links. Port-based ACLs take precedence over global ACLs. FCoE-generated ACLs These take precedence over user-configured ACLs. A user-configured ACL entry cannot deny FCoE and FIP snooping frames. The following illustration shows a switch used as a FIP snooping bridge in a converged Ethernet network.
● Process FIP VLAN discovery requests and responses, advertisements, solicitations, FLOGI/FDISC requests and responses, FLOGO requests and responses, keep-alive packets, and clear virtual-link messages. Using FIP Snooping There are four steps to configure FCoE transit. 1. Enable the FCoE transit feature on a switch. 2. Enable FIP snooping globally on all Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) or individual VLANs on a FIP snooping bridge. 3.
Current Settings(in 1 block = 256 Double Wide Regions: : Triple Wide Regions: L2Acl : 2 Ipv4Acl : 2 Ipv6Acl : 0 Ipv4Qos : 0 L2Qos : 0 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 EtsAcl : 1 FcoeAcl : 2 iscsiOptAcl : 2 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl : 0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : 0 nlbclusteracl : 0 ipv4udfmirracl: 0 ipv4mirracl : 0 block sizes) entries L2Acl, Ipv4Acl, Ipv4Qos, L2Qos, L2PT FcoeAcl, ipv4pbr, vrfv4Acl Ipv6Acl, VmanQos, Openflow, ipv4udfmirracl -- stack-unit 1 -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 256 entries
Enabling the FCoE Transit Feature The following sections describe how to enable FCoE transit. NOTE: FCoE transit is disabled by default. To enable this feature, you must follow the Configure FIP Snooping. As soon as you enable the FCoE transit feature on a switch-bridge, existing VLAN-specific and FIP snooping configurations are applied. The FCoE database is populated when the switch connects to a converged network adapter (CNA) or FCF port and compatible DCB configurations are synchronized.
Impact on Other Software Features When you enable FIP snooping on a switch, other software features are impacted. The following table lists the impact of FIP snooping. Table 34. Impact of Enabling FIP Snooping Impact Description MAC address learning MAC address learning is not performed on FIP and FCoE frames, which are denied by ACLs dynamically created by FIP snooping on server-facing ports in ENode mode.
feature fip-snooping 5. Enable FIP snooping on all VLANs or on a specified VLAN. CONFIGURATION mode or VLAN INTERFACE mode. fip-snooping enable 6. Configure the port for bridge-to-FCF links. INTERFACE mode or CONFIGURATION mode fip-snooping port-mode fcf NOTE: To disable the FCoE transit feature or FIP snooping on VLANs, use the no version of a command; for example, no feature fip-snooping or no fip-snooping enable.
aa:bb:cc:00:00:00 aa:bb:cc:00:00:00 Tf 1/4 Tf 1/4 aa:bb:cd:00:00:00 aa:bb:cd:00:00:00 Tf 1/4 Tf 1/4 FCoE MAC 0e:fc:00:01:00:01 0e:fc:00:01:00:02 0e:fc:00:01:00:03 0e:fc:00:01:00:04 0e:fc:00:01:00:05 FC-ID 01:00:01 01:00:02 01:00:03 01:00:04 01:00:05 Port WWPN 31:00:0e:fc:00:00:00:00 41:00:0e:fc:00:00:00:00 41:00:0e:fc:00:00:00:01 41:00:0e:fc:00:00:00:02 41:00:0e:fc:00:00:00:03 100 100 Port WWNN 21:00:0e:fc:00:00:00:00 21:00:0e:fc:00:00:00:00 21:00:0e:fc:00:00:00:00 21:00:0e:fc:00:00:00:00 21:00:0e:f
The following example shows the show fip-snooping fcf command. DellEMC# show fip-snooping fcf FCF MAC FCF Interface VLAN FC-MAP FKA_ADV_PERIOD No. of Enodes ------------------- ---- ------------------- ------------54:7f:ee:37:34:40 Po 22 100 0e:fc:00 4000 2 The following table describes the show fip-snooping fcf command fields. Table 38. show fip-snooping fcf Command Description Field Description FCF MAC MAC address of the FCF.
Number Number Number Number Number Number Number of of of of of of of FDISC Rejects FLOGO Accepts FLOGO Rejects CVL FCF Discovery Timeouts VN Port Session Timeouts Session failures due to Hardware Config :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 The following example shows the show fip-snooping statistics port-channel command.
Table 39. show fip-snooping statistics Command Descriptions (continued) Field Description Number of FLOGI Accepts Number of FIP FLOGI accept frames received on the interface. Number of FLOGI Rejects Number of FIP FLOGI reject frames received on the interface. Number of FDISC Accepts Number of FIP FDISC accept frames received on the interface. Number of FDISC Rejects Number of FIP FDISC reject frames received on the interface.
FCoE Transit Configuration Example The following illustration shows a switch used as a FIP snooping bridge for FCoE traffic between an ENode (server blade) and an FCF (ToR switch). The ToR switch operates as an FCF and FCoE gateway. Figure 38. Configuration Example: FIP Snooping on a Switch In this example, DCBx and PFC are enabled on the FIP snooping bridge and on the FCF ToR switch.
Example of Configuring the ENode Server-Facing Port DellEMC(conf)# interface twentyFiveGigE 1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/1)# portmode hybrid DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/1)# switchport DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/1)# protocol lldp DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/1-lldp)# dcbx port-role auto-downstream NOTE: A port is enabled by default for bridge-ENode links.
16 Flex Hash and Optimized Boot-Up This chapter describes the Flex Hash enhancements. Topics: • • • • Flex Hash Capability Overview Configuring the Flex Hash Mechanism RDMA Over Converged Ethernet (RoCE) Overview Preserving 802.1Q VLAN Tag Value for Lite Subinterfaces Flex Hash Capability Overview The flex hash functionality enables you to configure a packet search key and matches packets based on the search key.
2. Use the load-balance flexhash command to specify whether IPv4 or IPv6 packets must be subjected to the flex hash functionality, a unique protocol number, the offset of hash fields from the start of the L4 header to be used for hash calculation, and a meaningful description to associate the protocol number with the name.
If a VLAN is split into multiple, different sub-VLANs, each VLAN is denoted by a unique 8021.Q tag to enable the nodes that receive the traffic frames determine the VLAN for which the frames are destined. Typically, a Layer 3 physical interface processes only untagged or priority-tagged packets. Tagged packets that are received on Layer 3 physical interfaces are dropped.
17 Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP) FRRP provides fast network convergence to Layer 2 switches interconnected in a ring topology, such as a metropolitan area network (MAN) or large campuses. FRRP is similar to what can be achieved with the spanning tree protocol (STP), though even with optimizations, STP can take up to 50 seconds to converge (depending on the size of network and node of failure) and may require 4 to 5 seconds to reconverge.
Ring Status The ring failure notification and the ring status checks provide two ways to ensure the ring remains up and active in the event of a switch or port failure. Ring Checking At specified intervals, the Master node sends a ring health frame (RHF) through the ring. If the ring is complete, the frame is received on its secondary port and the Master node resets its fail-period timer and continues normal operation.
Figure 39. Example of Multiple Rings Connected by Single Switch Important FRRP Points FRRP provides a convergence time that can generally range between 150ms and 1500ms for Layer 2 networks. The Master node originates a high-speed frame that circulates around the ring. This frame, appropriately, sets up or breaks down the ring. ● The Master node transmits ring status check frames at specified intervals. ● You can run multiple physical rings on the same switch.
Important FRRP Concepts The following table lists some important FRRP concepts. Concept Explanation Ring ID Each ring has a unique 8-bit ring ID through which the ring is identified (for example, FRRP 101 and FRRP 202, as shown in the illustration in Member VLAN Spanning Two Rings Connected by One Switch. Control VLAN Each ring has a unique Control VLAN through which tagged ring health frames (RHF) are sent. Control VLANs are used only for sending RHF, and cannot be used for any other purpose.
● If multiple rings share one or more member VLANs, they cannot share any links between them. ● Member VLANs across multiple rings are not supported in Master nodes. ● Each ring has only one Master node; all others are transit nodes. FRRP Configuration These are the tasks to configure FRRP.
● ● ● ● For For For For a a a a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/por[/subport]t information. 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the slot/port information. 3.
interface primary interface secondary interface control-vlan vlan id Interface: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/por[/subport]t information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
Viewing the FRRP Information To view general FRRP information, use one of the following commands. ● Show the information for the identified FRRP group. EXEC or EXEC PRIVELEGED mode. show frrp ring-id Ring ID: the range is from 1 to 255. ● Show the state of all FRRP groups. EXEC or EXEC PRIVELEGED mode. show frrp summary Ring ID: the range is from 1 to 255. Troubleshooting FRRP To troubleshoot FRRP, use the following information. Configuration Checks ● ● ● ● ● Each Control Ring must use a unique VLAN ID.
mode master no disable Example of R2 TRANSIT interface twentyFiveGigE 1/14 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface twentyFiveGigE 1/11 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface Vlan 101 no ip address tagged twentyFiveGigE 1/14,1/11 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 201 no ip address tagged twentyFiveGigE 1/14,1/11 no shutdown ! protocol frrp 101 interface primary twentyFiveGigE 1/14 secondary twentyFiveGigE 1/11 control-vlan 101 member-vlan 201 mode transit no disable Example of R3 TRANSIT interf
You can configure a simple FRRP ring that connects a VLT device in one data center to a VLT devices in two or more Data Centers. NOTE: This configuration connects VLT devices across Data Centers using FRRP; however, the VLTi may or may not participate as a ring interface of any FRRP ring. Following figure shows a simple FRRP ring inter-connecting VLT device: Figure 40.
configured (for example, M11 through Mn) that carry the data traffic across the FRRP rings. The secondary port P1 is tagged to the control VLAN (V1). VLTi is implicitly tagged to the member VLANs when these VLANs are configured in the VLT peer. As a result of the VLT Node1 configuration on R2, the FRRP ring R2 becomes active. The primary interface VLTi and the secondary interface P1 act as forwarding ports for the member VLANs (M11 to Mn). VLT Node2 is the master node.
18 GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) The generic attribute registration protocol (GARP) VLAN registration protocol (GVRP), defined by the IEEE 802.1q specification, is a Layer 2 network protocol that provides for automatic VLAN configuration of switches. GVRP-compliant switches use GARP to register and de-register attribute values, such as VLAN IDs, with each other.
Configure GVRP To begin, enable GVRP. To facilitate GVRP communications, enable GVRP globally on each switch. Then, GVRP configuration is per interface on a switch-by-switch basis. Enable GVRP on each port that connects to a switch where you want GVRP information exchanged. In the following example, GVRP is configured on VLAN trunk ports. Figure 42. Global GVRP Configuration Example Basic GVRP configuration is a two-step process: 1. Enabling GVRP Globally 2.
gvrp enable DellEMC(conf)#protocol gvrp DellEMC(config-gvrp)#no disable DellEMC(config-gvrp)#show config ! protocol gvrp no disable DellEMC(config-gvrp)# To inspect the global configuration, use the show gvrp brief command. Enabling GVRP on a Layer 2 Interface To enable GVRP on a Layer 2 interface, use the following command. ● Enable GVRP on a Layer 2 interface.
no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/2)# Configure a GARP Timer Set GARP timers to the same values on all devices that are exchanging information using GVRP. There are three GARP timer settings. ● Join — A GARP device reliably transmits Join messages to other devices by sending each Join message two times. To define the interval between the two sending operations of each Join message, use this parameter. The Dell EMC Networking OS default is 200ms.
19 Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Internet group management protocol (IGMP) is a Layer 3 multicast protocol that hosts use to join or leave a multicast group. Multicast is premised on identifying many hosts by a single destination IP address; hosts represented by the same IP address are a multicast group. Multicast routing protocols (such as protocol-independent multicast [PIM]) use the information in IGMP messages to discover which groups are active and to populate the multicast routing table.
Figure 43. IGMP Messages in IP Packets Join a Multicast Group There are two ways that a host may join a multicast group: it may respond to a general query from its querier or it may send an unsolicited report to its querier. Responding to an IGMP Query The following describes how a host can join a multicast group. 1. One router on a subnet is elected as the querier. The querier periodically multicasts (to all-multicast-systems address 224.0.0.1) a general query to all hosts on the subnet. 2.
IGMP Version 3 Conceptually, IGMP version 3 behaves the same as version 2. However, there are differences. ● Version 3 adds the ability to filter by multicast source, which helps multicast routing protocols avoid forwarding traffic to subnets where there are no interested receivers. ● To enable filtering, routers must keep track of more state information, that is, the list of sources that must be filtered.
Joining and Filtering Groups and Sources The following illustration shows how multicast routers maintain the group and source information from unsolicited reports. 1. The first unsolicited report from the host indicates that it wants to receive traffic for group 224.1.1.1. 2. The host’s second report indicates that it is only interested in traffic from group 224.1.1.1, source 10.11.1.1. Include messages prevents traffic from all other sources in the group from reaching the subnet.
Leaving and Staying in Groups The following illustration shows how multicast routers track and refresh state changes in response to group-and-specific and general queries. 1. Host 1 sends a message indicating it is leaving group 224.1.1.1 and that the included filter for 10.11.1.1 and 10.11.1.2 are no longer necessary. 2.
● ● ● ● ● ● Adjusting Timers Preventing a Host from Joining a Group Enabling IGMP Immediate-Leave IGMP Snooping Fast Convergence after MSTP Topology Changes Designating a Multicast Router Interface Viewing IGMP Enabled Interfaces Interfaces that are enabled with PIM-SM are automatically enabled with IGMP. To view IGMP-enabled interfaces, use the following command. ● View IGMP-enabled IPv4 interfaces. EXEC Privilege mode show ip igmp interface ● View IGMP-enabled IPv6 interfaces.
Viewing IGMP Groups To view both learned and statically configured IGMP groups, use the following command. ● View both learned and statically configured IGMP groups. EXEC Privilege mode show ip igmp groups show ipv6 mld groups DellEMC#show ip igmp groups Total Number of Groups: 2 IGMP Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface 225.1.1.1 twentyFiveGigE 1/1 225.1.2.1 twentyFiveGigE 1/1 Mode IGMPV2 IGMPV2 Uptime 00:11:19 00:10:19 Expires 00:01:50 00:01:50 Last Reporter 165.87.34.100 165.87.31.
● Adjust the last member query interval. INTERFACE mode ip igmp last-member-query-interval ● Adjust the amount of time the querier waits, for the initial query response, before sending the next IPv6 query. Interface mode ipv6 mld last-member-query-interval Enabling IGMP Immediate-Leave If the querier does not receive a response to a group-specific or group-and-source query, it sends another (querier robustness value). Then, after no response, it removes the group from the outgoing interface for the subnet.
ip igmp snooping enable ● View the configuration. CONFIGURATION mode show running-config ● Disable snooping on a VLAN.
ip igmp snooping mrouter ● View the ports that are connected to multicast routers. EXEC Privilege mode. show ip igmp snooping mrouter Configuring the Switch as Querier To configure the switch as a querier, use the following command. Hosts that do not support unsolicited reporting wait for a general query before sending a membership report. When the multicast source and receivers are in the same VLAN, multicast traffic is not routed and so there is no querier.
Transit traffic (destination IP not configured in the switch) that is received on the front-end port with destination on the management port is dropped and received in the management port with destination on the front-end port is dropped. Switch-destined traffic (destination IP configured in the switch) is: ● Received in the front-end port with destination IP equal to management port IP address or management port subnet broadcast address is dropped.
If you configure a source interface is for any EIS management application, EIS might not coexist with that interface and the behavior is undefined in such a case. You can configure the source interface for the following applications: FTP, ICMP (ping and traceroute utilities), NTP, RADIUS, TACACS, Telnet, TFTP, syslog, and SNMP traps. Out of these applications, EIS can coexist with only syslog and SNMP traps because these applications do not require a response after a packet is sent.
Handling of Management Route Configuration When the EIS feature is enabled, the following processing occurs: ● All existing management routes (connected, static and default) are duplicated and added to the management EIS routing table. ● Any management static route newly added using the management route CLI is installed to both the management EIS routing table and default routing table.
● Because fallback support is removed, if the management port is down or the route lookup in EIS table fails packets are dropped. Therefore, switch-initiated traffic sessions that used to work previously via fallback may not work now. Handling of Switch-Destined Traffic ● The switch processes all traffic received on the management port destined to the management port IP address or the front-end port destined to the front-end IP address.
Table 41. Mapping of Management Applications and Traffic Type Traffic type / Application type Switch initiated traffic Switch-destined traffic Transit Traffic EIS Management Application Management is the preferred egress port selected based on route lookup in EIS table. If the management port is down or the route lookup fails, packets are dropped.
EIS Behavior for ICMP: ICMP packets do not have TCP/UDP ports. To do an EIS route lookup for ICMP-based applications (ping and traceroute) using the source ip option, the management port IP address should be specified as the source IP address. If management port is down or route lookup fails, packets are dropped. Default Behavior: Route lookup is done in the default routing table and appropriate egress port is selected. Table 42.
Table 43. Behavior of Various Applications for Switch-Destined Traffic (continued) Protocol Behavior when EIS is Enabled Behavior when EIS is Disabled ssh EIS Behavior Default Behavior Snmp (snmp mib response) EIS Behavior Default Behavior telnet EIS Behavior Default Behavior icmp (ping and traceroute) EIS Behavior for ICMP Default Behavior Interworking of EIS With Various Applications Stacking ● The management EIS is enabled on the master and the standby unit.
20 Interfaces This chapter describes interface types, both physical and logical, and how to configure them with Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS). The system supports 10–Gigabit, 25–Gigabit, 40–Gigbit, 50–Gigabit, and 100–Gigabit QSFP 28 interfaces. NOTE: Only Dell-qualified optics are supported on these interfaces. Non-Dell 40G optics are set to error-disabled state.Non-Dell optics for 40–Gigbit, 25–Gigabit, 50–Gigabit, and 100–Gigabit are set to error-disabled state.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Splitting 100G Ports Link Dampening Link Bundle Monitoring Using Ethernet Pause Frames for Flow Control Configure the MTU Size on an Interface Configuring wavelength for 10–Gigabit SFP+ optics Port-Pipes CR4 Auto-Negotiation Setting the Speed of Ethernet Interfaces Speed Setting on 25G Interfaces Configuring 10G speed on 25G ports FEC Configuration View Advanced Interface Information Configuring the Traffic Sampling Size Globally Dynamic Counters Enhanced Validation of I
NOTE: The CLI output may be incorrectly displayed as 0 (zero) for the Rx/Tx power values. To obtain the correct power information, perform a simple network management protocol (SNMP) query. The following example shows the configuration and status information for one interface.
! interface hundredGigE 1/51 no ip address shutdown ! interface hundredGigE 1/52 no ip address shutdown Resetting an Interface to its Factory Default State You can reset the configurations applied on an interface to its factory default state. To reset the configuration, perform the following steps: 1. View the configurations applied on an interface.
● For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the slot/port information. 2. Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode no shutdown To confirm that the interface is enabled, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode. To leave INTERFACE mode, use the exit command or end command. You cannot delete a physical interface. Physical Interfaces The Management Ethernet interface is a single RJ-45 Fast Ethernet port on a switch.
Table 45. Layer Modes (continued) Type of Interface Possible Modes Requires Creation Default State Shutdown (disabled for Layer 3) Configuring Layer 2 (Data Link) Mode Do not configure switching or Layer 2 protocols such as spanning tree protocol (STP) on an interface unless the interface has been set to Layer 2 mode. To set Layer 2 data transmissions through an individual interface, use the following command. ● Enable Layer 2 data transmissions through an individual interface.
If an interface is in the incorrect layer mode for a given command, an error message is displayed (shown in bold). In the following example, the ip address command triggered an error message because the interface is in Layer 2 mode and the ip address command is a Layer 3 command only. DellEMC(conf-if)#show config ! interface twentyFiveGigE 1/2 no ip address switchport no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if)#ip address 10.10.1.1 /24 % Error: Port is in Layer 2 mode Tf 1/2.
Important Points to Remember ● Deleting a management route removes the route from both the EIS routing table and the default routing table. ● If the management port is down or route lookup fails in the management EIS routing table, the outgoing interface is selected based on route lookup from the default routing table. ● If a route in the EIS table conflicts with a front-end port route, the front-end port route has precedence.
Configuring a Management Interface on an Ethernet Port You can manage the system through any port using remote access such as Telnet. To configure an IP address for the port, use the following commands. There is no separate management routing table, so configure all routes in the IP routing table (the ip route command). ● Configure an IP address. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address mask ● Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode no shutdown ● The interface is the management interface.
NOTE: You cannot assign an IP address to the default VLAN, which is VLAN 1 (by default). To assign another VLAN ID to the default VLAN, use the default vlan-id vlan-id command. To assign an IP address to an interface, use the following command. ● Configure an IP address and mask on the interface. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address mask [secondary] ○ ip-address mask: enter an address in dotted-decimal format (A.B.C.D). The mask must be in slash format (/24).
Port Channel Interfaces Port channel interfaces support link aggregation, as described in IEEE Standard 802.3ad. This section covers the following topics: ● Port Channel Definition and Standards ● Port Channel Benefits ● Port Channel Implementation ● Configuration Tasks for Port Channel Interfaces Port Channel Definition and Standards Link aggregation is defined by IEEE 802.
Interfaces in Port Channels When interfaces are added to a port channel, the interfaces must share a common speed. When interfaces have a configured speed different from the port channel speed, the software disables those interfaces. The common speed is determined when the port channel is first enabled. Then, the software checks the first interface listed in the port channel configuration. If you enabled that interface, its speed configuration becomes the common speed of the port channel.
You can add any physical interface to a port channel if the interface configuration is minimal. You can configure only the following commands on an interface if it is a member of a port channel: ● description ● shutdown/no shutdown ● mtu NOTE: A logical port channel interface cannot have flow control. Flow control can only be present on the physical interfaces if they are part of a port channel. NOTE: The system supports jumbo frames by default (the default maximum transmission unit (MTU) is 9416 bytes).
DellEMC> When more than one interface is added to a Layer 2-port channel, Dell EMC Networking OS selects one of the active interfaces in the port channel to be the primary port. The primary port replies to flooding and sends protocol data units (PDUs). An asterisk in the show interfaces port-channel brief command indicates the primary port. As soon as a physical interface is added to a port channel, the properties of the port channel determine the properties of the physical interface.
Configuring the Minimum Oper Up Links in a Port Channel You can configure the minimum links in a port channel (LAG) that must be in “oper up” status to consider the port channel to be in “oper up” status. To set the “oper up” status of your links, use the following command. ● Enter the number of links in a LAG that must be in “oper up” status. INTERFACE mode minimum-links number The default is 1.
EXEC mode DellEMC(conf)# interface twentyFiveGigE 1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/1/1)#switchport DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/1/1)# vlan tagged 2-5,100,4010 DellEMC#show interfaces switchport twentyFiveGigE 1/1 Codes: U x G i - Untagged, T - Tagged Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged GVRP tagged, M - Trunk, H - VSN tagged Internal untagged, I - Internal tagged, v - VLT untagged, V - VLT tagged Name: twentyFiveGigE 1/1 802.
Load-Balancing Method By default, LAG hashing uses the source IP, destination IP, source transmission control protocol (TCP)/user datagram protocol (UDP) port, and destination TCP/UDP port for hash computation. For packets without a Layer 3 header, Dell EMC Networking OS automatically uses load-balance mac source-dest-mac. Do not configure IP hashing or MAC hashing at the same time.
hash-algorithm [ecmp{crc16|crc16cc|crc32LSB|crc32MSB|crc-upper|dest-ip|lsb|xor1|xor2| xor4|xor8|xor16}] DellEMC(conf)#hash-algorithm ecmp xor 26 lag crc 26 nh-ecmp checksum 26 DellEMC(conf)# The hash-algorithm command is specific to ECMP group. The default ECMP hash configuration is crc-lower. This command takes the lower 32 bits of the hash key to compute the egress port.
Bulk Configuration Examples Use the interface range command for bulk configuration. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Create a Single-Range Create a Multiple-Range Exclude Duplicate Entries Exclude a Smaller Port Range Overlap Port Ranges Commas Add Ranges Create a Single-Range The following is an example of a single range.
Overlap Port Ranges The following is an example showing how the interface-range prompt extends a port range from the smallest start port number to the largest end port number when port ranges overlap. handles overlapping port ranges.
The following example shows how to change to the interface-range configuration mode using the interface-range macro named “test.” DellEMC(config)# interface range macro test DellEMC(config-if)# Monitoring and Maintaining Interfaces Monitor interface statistics with the monitor interface command. This command displays an ongoing list of the interface status (up/down), number of packets, traffic statistics, and so on. To view the interface’s statistics, use the following command.
q DellEMC# Maintenance Using TDR The time domain reflectometer (TDR) is supported on all Dell EMC Networking switches. TDR is an assistance tool to resolve link issues that helps detect obvious open or short conditions within any of the four copper pairs. TDR sends a signal onto the physical cable and examines the reflection of the signal that returns.
Non-qualified pluggable media present, SFP28 type is 25GBASE-LR AutoNegotiation is OFF Forward Error Correction(FEC) configured is default FEC status is OFF OUI is 0x6a737d Wavelength is 1310nm QSFP28 receive power reading is 0.3507dBm Interface index is 2102796 For information about which optics and transceivers are supported, contact your Dell representative.
You configure link dampening using the dampening [[[[half-life] [reuse-threshold]] [suppressthreshold]] [max-suppress-time]] command on the interface. Following is the detailed explanation of interface state change events: ● suppress-threshold— The suppress threshold is a value that triggers a flapping interface to dampen. The system adds penalty when the interface state goes up and down.
Figure 48. Interface State Change Consider an interface periodically flaps as shown above. Every time the interface goes down, a penalty (1024) is added. In the above example, during the first interface flap (flap 1), the penalty is added to 1024. And, the accumulated penalty will exponentially decay based on the set half-life, which is set as 10 seconds in the above example. During the second interface flap (flap 2), again the penalty (1024) is accumulated.
Enabling Link Dampening To enable link dampening, use the following command. ● Enable link dampening. INTERFACE mode dampening To view the link dampening configuration on an interface, use the show config command. R1(conf-if-tf-1/1)#show config ! interface twentyFiveGigE 1/1 ip address 10.10.19.1/24 dampening 1 2 3 4 no shutdown To view dampening information on all or specific dampened interfaces, use the show interfaces dampening command from EXEC Privilege mode.
Configure MTU Size on an Interface In Dell EMC Networking OS, Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) is defined as the entire Ethernet packet (Ethernet header + FCS + payload). The following table lists the range for each transmission media. Transmission Media MTU Range (in bytes) Ethernet 594-12000 = link MTU 576-9234 = IP MTU Link Bundle Monitoring Monitoring linked LAG bundles allows traffic distribution amounts in a link to be monitored for unfair distribution at any given time.
The PAUSE frame is defined by IEEE 802.3x and uses MAC Control frames to carry the PAUSE commands. Ethernet pause frames are supported on full duplex only. If a port is over-subscribed, Ethernet Pause Frame flow control does not ensure no-loss behavior. Restriction: Ethernet Pause Frame flow control is not supported if PFC is enabled on an interface. Control how the system responds to and generates 802.3x pause frames on Ethernet interfaces. The default is rx off tx off. INTERFACE mode.
Table 46. Layer 2 Overhead Layer 2 Overhead Difference Between Link MTU and IP MTU Ethernet (untagged) 18 bytes VLAN Tag 22 bytes Untagged Packet with VLAN-Stack Header 22 bytes Tagged Packet with VLAN-Stack Header 26 bytes Link MTU and IP MTU considerations for port channels and VLANs are as follows. Port Channels: ● All members must have the same link MTU value and the same IP MTU value.
Port-Pipes A port pipe is a Dell EMC Networking-specific term for the hardware packet-processing elements that handle network traffic to and from a set of front-end I/O ports. The physical, front-end I/O ports are referred to as a port-set. In the command-line interface, a port pipe is entered as port-set port-pipe-number. CR4 Auto-Negotiation You can configure interface type as CR4 with auto-negotiation enabled. Many DAC cable link issues are resolved by setting the interface type as CR4.
speed {10 | 100 | 1000 | 10000 | auto} NOTE: If you use an active optical cable (AOC), you can convert the QSFP+ port to a 10 Gigabit SFP+ port or 1 Gigabit SFP port. You can use the speed command to enable the required speed. 6. Optionally, set full- or half-duplex. INTERFACE mode duplex {half | full} 7. Disable auto-negotiation on the port. INTERFACE mode no negotiation auto If the speed was set to 1000, do not disable auto-negotiation. 8. Verify configuration changes.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 SFP+ SFP28 SFP28 SFP28 Media not present Media not present Media not present Media not present 10GBASE-CU1M Media not present Media not present Media not present 25GBASE-CR1-3M 25GBASE-CR1-3M 25GBASE-CR1-3M or or or or accessible accessible accessible accessible CN0V250M3BM4307 or accessible or accessible or accessible CN07696259N0MU7 CN07696259N0MU7 CN07696259N0MU7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Oct 4 18:24:52 %S5048F-ON:1 %IFAGT-5-INSERT_OPTICS_PLUS: Optics SFP+ in
The system generates a syslog warning that the change of speed will be applied for all 4 ports in the group and prompts for confirmation. Following is the sample syslog warning displayed after executing the speed command on the interface: %Warning:Port with SFP28-DAC inserted on a port group alone will be supported & its group of 4 ports will be configured with speed 10G.
! interface hundredGigE 1/49 no ip address shutdown intf-type cr4 autoneg fec enable Example of the fec enable cl74 command on a 25G interface. DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/3)#fec en cl74 DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/3)#show config ! interface twentyFiveGigE 1/3 no ip address no shutdown fec enable cl74 Example of the fec enable cl108 command on a 25G interface.
AutoNegotiation is ON Forward Error Correction(FEC) configured is cl91 FEC status is cl91Interface index is 2101774 Internet address is not set Mode of IPv4 Address Assignment : NONE DHCP Client-ID :001232124213 MTU 9416 bytes, IP MTU 9398 bytes LineSpeed 100000 Mbit Flowcontrol rx off tx off ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interface" counters 00:31:23 Queueing strategy: fifo Input Statistics: 32992398774 packets, 2243483116632 bytes 0 64-byte pkts, 32992398774 over 64-byte pkts,
Vlan 2 Name: twentyFiveGigE 1/3 802.1QTagged: True Vlan membership: Vlan 2 Name: twentyFiveGigE 1/4 802.1QTagged: True Vlan membership: Vlan 2 --More-- Configuring the Interface Sampling Size Although you can enter any value between 30 and 299 seconds (the default), software polling is done once every 15 seconds. So, for example, if you enter “19”, you actually get a sample of the past 15 seconds. All LAG members inherit the rate interval configuration from the LAG.
0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts Received 0 input symbol errors, 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 IP Checksum, 0 overrun, 0 discarded 0 packets output, 0 bytes, 0 underruns Output 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts 0 IP Packets, 0 Vlans, 0 MPLS 0 throttles, 0 discarded Rate info (interval 100 seconds): Input 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate Output 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.
DellEMC#show int po 20 Port-channel 20 is up, line protocol is up Hardware address is 4c:76:25:f4:ab:02, Current address is 4c:76:25:f4:ab:02 Interface index is 1258301440 Minimum number of links to bring Port-channel up is 1 Internet address is not set Mode of IPv4 Address Assignment : NONE DHCP Client-ID :4c7625f4ab02 MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes LineSpeed 80000 Mbit Members in this channel: Hu 1/49(U) Hu 1/50(U) ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Queueing strategy: fifo Input Statistics: 13932 pac
● Clear the counters used in the show interface commands for all VRRP groups, VLANs, and physical interfaces or selected ones. Without an interface specified, the command clears all interface counters. EXEC Privilege mode clear counters [interface] [vrrp [vrid] | learning-limit] (OPTIONAL) Enter the following interface keywords and slot/port or number information: ○ For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information.
Table 48.
Table 48. Standard and Compressed Configurations Uncompressed Compressed interface Vlan 5 tagged tw 1/1 no ip address shutdown ! interface Vlan 100 no ip address no shutdown ! interface Vlan 1000 ip address 1.1.1.1/16 no shutdown Uncompressed config size – 52 lines write memory compressed The write memory compressed CLI will write the operating configuration to the startup-config file in the compressed mode. In stacking scenario, it will also take care of syncing it to all the standby and member units.
DellEMC(Config)interface twentyfiveGigE 1/50/1 DellEMC(Conf-tf-1/49/1)# oui 0x78abcd Interfaces 401
21 IPv4 Routing The Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) supports various IP addressing features. This chapter describes the basics of domain name service (DNS), address resolution protocol (ARP), and routing principles and their implementation in the Dell EMC Networking OS.
IP Addresses Dell EMC Networking OS supports IP version 4 (as described in RFC 791), classful routing, and variable length subnet masks (VLSM). With VLSM, you can configure one network with different masks. Supernetting, which increases the number of subnets, is also supported. To subnet, you add a mask to the IP address to separate the network and host portions of the IP address.
no shutdown 3. Configure a primary IP address and mask on the interface. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address mask [secondary] ● ip-address mask: the IP address must be in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). The mask must be in slash prefixlength format (/24). ● secondary: add the keyword secondary if the IP address is the interface’s backup IP address. You can configure up to eight secondary IP addresses.
S 6.1.2.8/32 S 6.1.2.9/32 S 6.1.2.10/32 S 6.1.2.11/32 S 6.1.2.12/32 S 6.1.2.13/32 S 6.1.2.14/32 S 6.1.2.15/32 S 6.1.2.16/32 S 6.1.2.17/32 S 11.1.1.0/24 Direct, Lo 0 --More-- via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.
Configure Static Routes for the Management Interface When an IP address that a protocol uses and a static management route exists for the same prefix, the protocol route takes precedence over the static management route. To configure a static route for the management port, use the following command. ● Assign a static route to point to the management interface or forwarding router.
occurs on the device. You can set the wait time to be 10 seconds or lower. If the device does not contain any BGP connections with the BGP neighbors across WAN links, you must set this interval to a higher value, depending on the complexity of your network and the configuration attributes. To configure the duration for which the device waits for the ACK packet to be sent from the requesting host to establish the TCP connection, perform the following steps: 1.
The order you entered the servers determines the order of their use. To view current bindings, use the show hosts command. DellEMC>show host Default domain is force10networks.com Name/address lookup uses domain service Name servers are not set Host Flags TTL Type Address -------- ----- ------- ------ks (perm, OK) - IP 2.2.2.2 patch1 (perm, OK) - IP 192.68.69.2 tomm-3 (perm, OK) - IP 192.68.99.2 gxr (perm, OK) - IP 192.71.18.2 f00-3 (perm, OK) - IP 192.71.23.
The following text is example output of DNS using the traceroute command. DellEMC#traceroute www.force10networks.com Translating "www.force10networks.com"...domain server (10.11.0.1) [OK] Type Ctrl-C to abort. ---------------------------------------------------------------------Tracing the route to www.force10networks.com (10.11.84.18), 30 hops max, 40 byte packets ---------------------------------------------------------------------TTL Hostname Probe1 Probe2 Probe3 1 10.11.199.190 001.000 ms 001.
○ interface: enter the interface type slot/port information. These entries do not age and can only be removed manually. To remove a static ARP entry, use the no arp ip-address command. To view the static entries in the ARP cache, use the show arp static command in EXEC privilege mode. DellEMC#show arp Protocol Address Age(min) Hardware Address Interface VLAN CPU -------------------------------------------------------------------------------Internet 10.1.2.
In the request, the host uses its own IP address in the Sender Protocol Address and Target Protocol Address fields. Enabling ARP Learning via Gratuitous ARP To enable ARP learning via gratuitous ARP, use the following command. ● Enable ARP learning via gratuitous ARP. CONFIGURATION mode arp learn-enable ARP Learning via ARP Request In Dell EMC Networking OS versions prior to 8.3.1.
Configuring ARP Retries You can configure the number of ARP retries. The default backoff interval remains at 20 seconds. To set and display ARP retries, use the following commands. ● Set the number of ARP retries. CONFIGURATION mode arp retries number The default is 5. The range is from 1 to 20. ● Set the exponential timer for resending unresolved ARPs. CONFIGURATION mode arp backoff-time The default is 30. The range is from 1 to 3600. ● Display all ARP entries learned via gratuitous ARP.
ICMP Redirects When a host sends a packet to a destination, it sends the packet to the configured default gateway. If the gateway router finds that a better route is available through a different router in the same network, that is, the same data link, the gateway router sends the source host an ICMP redirect message with the better route. The gateway router routes the packet to its destination and the host sends subsequent packets to that particular destination through the correct router.
UDP Helper User datagram protocol (UDP) helper allows you to direct the forwarding IP/UDP broadcast traffic by creating special broadcast addresses and rewriting the destination IP address of packets to match those addresses. Configure UDP Helper To configure Dell EMC Networking OS to direct UDP broadcast, enable UDP helper and specify the UDP ports for which traffic is forwarded.
● Configure a broadcast address on an interface. ip udp-broadcast-address DellEMC(conf-if-vl-100)#ip udp-broadcast-address 1.1.255.255 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-100)#show config ! interface Vlan 100 ip address 1.1.0.1/24 ip udp-broadcast-address 1.1.255.255 untagged twentyFiveGigE 1/2 no shutdown To view the configured broadcast address for an interface, use show interfaces command.
Figure 52. UDP Helper with Broadcast-All Addresses UDP Helper with Subnet Broadcast Addresses When the destination IP address of an incoming packet matches the subnet broadcast address of any interface, the system changes the address to the configured broadcast address and sends it to matching interface. In the following illustration, Packet 1 has the destination IP address 1.1.1.255, which matches the subnet broadcast address of VLAN 101.
Figure 54. UDP Helper with Configured Broadcast Addresses UDP Helper with No Configured Broadcast Addresses The following describes UDP helper with no broadcast addresses configured. ● If the incoming packet has a broadcast destination IP address, the unaltered packet is routed to all Layer 3 interfaces. ● If the Incoming packet has a destination IP address that matches the subnet broadcast address of any interface, the unaltered packet is routed to the matching interfaces.
22 IPv6 Routing Internet protocol version 6 (IPv6) routing is the successor to IPv4. Due to the rapid growth in internet users and IP addresses, IPv4 is reaching its maximum usage. IPv6 will eventually replace IPv4 usage to allow for the constant expansion. This chapter provides a brief description of the differences between IPv4 and IPv6, and the Dell EMC Networking support of IPv6. This chapter is not intended to be a comprehensive description of IPv6.
recommended MTU for IPv6 is 1280. Greater MTU settings increase the processing efficiency because each packet carries more data while protocol overheads (for example, headers) or underlying per-packet delays remain fixed. Figure 55. Path MTU discovery process Stateless Autoconfiguration When a booting device comes up in IPv6 and asks for its network prefix, the device can get the prefix (or prefixes) from an IPv6 router on its link.
The router redirect functionality in the neighbor discovery protocol (NDP) is similar to IPv4 router redirect messages. NDP uses ICMPv6 redirect messages (Type 137) to inform nodes that a better router exists on the link. IPv6 Headers The IPv6 header has a fixed length of 40 bytes. This fixed length provides 16 bytes each for source and destination information and 8 bytes for general header information.
NOTE: All packets in the flow must have the same source and destination addresses. Payload Length (16 bits) The Payload Length field specifies the packet payload. This is the length of the data following the IPv6 header. IPv6 Payload Length only includes the data following the header, not the header itself. The Payload Length limit of 2 bytes requires that the maximum packet payload be 64 KB. However, the Jumbogram option type Extension header supports larger packet sizes when required.
Source Address (128 bits) The Source Address field contains the IPv6 address for the packet originator. Destination Address (128 bits) The Destination Address field contains the intended recipient’s IPv6 address. This can be either the ultimate destination or the address of the next hop router. Extension Header Fields Extension headers are used only when necessary. Due to the streamlined nature of the IPv6 header, adding extension headers do not severely impact performance.
Addressing IPv6 addresses are normally written as eight groups of four hexadecimal digits, where each group is separated by a colon (:). For example, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:0000:0000:1428:57ab is a valid IPv6 address. If one or more four-digit group(s) is 0000, the zeros may be omitted and replaced with two colons(::). For example, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:0000:0000:1428:57ab can be shortened to 2001:0db8::1428:57ab. Only one set of double colons is supported in a single address.
Generally, ICMPv6 uses two message types: ● Error reporting messages indicate when the forwarding or delivery of the packet failed at the destination or intermediate node. These messages include Destination Unreachable, Packet Too Big, Time Exceeded and Parameter Problem messages. ● Informational messages provide diagnostic functions and additional host functions, such as Neighbor Discovery and Multicast Listener Discovery. These messages also include Echo Request and Echo Reply messages.
With ARP, each node broadcasts ARP requests on the entire link. This approach causes unnecessary processing by uninterested nodes. With NDP, each node sends a request only to the intended destination via a multicast address with the unicast address used as the last 24 bits. Other hosts on the link do not participate in the process, greatly increasing network bandwidth efficiency. Figure 58.
DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/1)#ipv6 nd dns-server 1000::1 ? <0-4294967295> Max lifetime (sec) which RDNSS address may be used for name resolution infinite Infinite lifetime (sec) which RDNSS address may be used for name resolution DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/1)#ipv6 nd dns-server 1000::1 1 Debugging IPv6 RDNSS Information Sent to the Host To verify that the IPv6 RDNSS information sent to the host is configured correctly, use the debug ipv6 nd command in EXEC Privilege mode.
ND advertised retransmit interval is 0 milliseconds ND router advertisements are sent every 198 to 600 seconds ND router advertisements live for 1800 seconds ND advertised hop limit is 64 IPv6 hop limit for originated packets is 64 ND dns-server address is 1000::1 with lifetime of 1 seconds ND dns-server address is 3000::1 with lifetime of 1 seconds ND dns-server address is 2000::1 with lifetime of 0 seconds IP unicast RPF check is not supported To display IPv6 RDNSS information, use the show configuration
To have the changes take effect, save the new CAM settings to the startup-config (write-mem or copy run start) then reload the system for the new settings. ● Allocate space for IPV6 ACLs. Enter the CAM profile name then the allocated amount. CONFIGURATION mode cam-acl { ipv6acl } When not selecting the default option, enter all of the profiles listed and a range for each. The total space allocated must equal 13. The ipv6acl range must be a factor of 2. ● Show the current CAM settings.
○ prefix: IPv6 route prefix ○ slot/port [/subport]: interface type and slot/port[/subport] ○ forwarding router: forwarding router’s address ○ tag: route tag Enter the keyword interface then the type of interface and slot/port information: ○ For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ○ For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
show ipv6 ? DellEMC#show accounting cam fib interface mbgproutes mld mroute neighbors ospf pim prefix-list route rpf DellEMC# ipv6 ? IPv6 accounting information IPv6 CAM Entries IPv6 FIB Entries IPv6 interface information MBGP routing table MLD information IPv6 multicast-routing table IPv6 neighbor information OSPF information PIM V6 information List IPv6 prefix lists IPv6 routing information RPF table Displaying an IPv6 Interface Information To view the IPv6 configuration for a specific interface, use th
Showing IPv6 Routes To view the global IPv6 routing information, use the following command. ● Show IPv6 routing information for the specified route type. EXEC mode show ipv6 route [vrf vrf-name] type The following keywords are available: ○ To display information about a network, enter ipv6 address (X:X:X:X::X). ○ To display information about a host, enter hostname. ○ To display information about all IPv6 routes (including non-active routes), enter all.
----------------------------------------------------S 8888:9999:5555:6666:1111:2222::/96 [1/0] via 2222:2222:3333:3333::1, Te 9/1/1, 00:03:16 S 9999:9999:9999:9999::/64 [1/0] via 8888:9999:5555:6666:1111:2222:3333:4444, 00:03:16 Showing the Running-Configuration for an Interface To view the configuration for any interface, use the following command. ● Show the currently running configuration for the specified interface.
CONFIGURATION mode ipv6 nd ra-guard enable 3. Create the policy. POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode ipv6 nd ra-guard policy policy-name 4. Define the role of the device attached to the port. POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode device-role {host | router} Use the keyword host to set the device role as host. Use the keyword router to set the device role as router. 5. Set the hop count limit. POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode hop-limit {maximum | minimum limit} The hop limit range is from 0 to 254. 6.
Example of the show config Command DellEMC(conf-ra_guard_policy_list)#show config ! ipv6 nd ra-guard policy test device-role router hop-limit maximum 251 mtu 1350 other-config-flag on reachable-time 540 retrans-timer 101 router-preference maximum medium trusted-port DellEMC(conf-ra_guard_policy_list)# 434 IPv6 Routing
23 iSCSI Optimization This chapter describes how to configure internet small computer system interface (iSCSI) optimization, which enables qualityof-service (QoS) treatment for iSCSI traffic.
message. This cannot be inferred as the maximum supported iSCSI sessions are reached. Also, number of iSCSI sessions displayed on the system may show any number equal to or less than the maximum. The following illustration shows iSCSI optimization between servers and a storage array in which a stack of three switches connect installed servers (iSCSI initiators) to a storage array (iSCSI targets) in a SAN network.
Application of Quality of Service to iSCSI Traffic Flows You can configure iSCSI CoS mode. This mode controls whether CoS (dot1p priority) queue assignment and/or packet marking is performed on iSCSI traffic. When you enable iSCSI CoS mode, the CoS policy is applied to iSCSI traffic. When you disable iSCSI CoS mode, iSCSI sessions and connections are still detected and displayed in the status tables, but no CoS policy is applied to iSCSI traffic.
Detection and Auto-Configuration for Dell EqualLogic Arrays The iSCSI optimization feature includes auto-provisioning support with the ability to detect directly connected Dell EqualLogic storage arrays and automatically reconfigure the switch to enhance storage traffic flows. The switch uses the link layer discovery protocol (LLDP) to discover Dell EqualLogic devices on the network. LLDP is enabled by default. For more information about LLDP, refer to Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP).
● Additional updates to connections (including aging updates) that are learnt on VLT lag members are synced to the peer. ● When receiving an iSCSI login request on a non-VLT interface followed by a response from a VLT interface, the session is not synced since it is initially learnt on a non-VLT interface through the request packet. ● The peer generates a new connection log that sees the login response packet.
Table 49. iSCSI Optimization Defaults (continued) Parameter Default Value iSCSI optimization target ports iSCSI well-known ports 3260 and 860 are configured as default (with no IP address or name) but can be removed as any other configured target. iSCSI session monitoring Disabled. The CAM allocation for iSCSI is set to zero (0). iSCSI Optimization Prerequisites The following are iSCSI optimization prerequisites. ● iSCSI optimization requires LLDP on the switch.
CONFIGURATION mode [no] iscsi target port tcp-port-1 [tcp-port-2...tcp-port-16] [ip-address address] ● tcp-port-n is the TCP port number or a list of TCP port numbers on which the iSCSI target listens to requests. You can configure up to 16 target TCP ports on the switch in one command or multiple commands. The default is 860, 3260. Separate port numbers with a comma.
Displaying iSCSI Optimization Information To display information on iSCSI optimization, use the following show commands. ● Display the currently configured iSCSI settings. show iscsi ● Display information on active iSCSI sessions on the switch. show iscsi sessions ● Display detailed information on active iSCSI sessions on the switch . To display detailed information on specified iSCSI session, enter the session’s iSCSI ID.
Up Time:00:00:01:28(DD:HH:MM:SS) Time for aging out:00:00:09:34(DD:HH:MM:SS) ISID:806978696102 Initiator Initiator Target Target IP Address TCP Port IP Address TCPPort 10.10.0.53 33432 10.10.0.
24 Intermediate System to Intermediate System The intermediate system to intermediate system (IS-IS) protocol that uses a shortest-path-first algorithm. Dell EMC Networking supports both IPv4 and IPv6 versions of IS-IS.
Figure 60. ISO Address Format Multi-Topology IS-IS Multi-topology IS-IS (MT IS-IS) allows you to create multiple IS-IS topologies on a single router with separate databases. Use this feature to place a virtual physical topology into logical routing domains, which can each support different routing and security policies. All routers on a LAN or point-to-point must have at least one common supported topology when operating in Multi-Topology IS-IS mode.
Graceful Restart Graceful restart is a protocol-based mechanism that preserves the forwarding table of the restarting router and its neighbors for a specified period to minimize the loss of packets. A graceful-restart router does not immediately assume that a neighbor is permanently down and so does not trigger a topology change. Normally, when an IS-IS router is restarted, temporary disruption of routing occurs due to events in both the restarting router and the neighbors of the restarting router.
● Computes routes to IPv6 destinations. ● Downloads IPv6 routes to the RTM for installing in the FIB. ● Accepts external IPv6 information and advertises this information in the PDUs. The following table lists the default IS-IS values. Table 50.
In IS-IS, neighbors form adjacencies only when they are same IS type. For example, a Level 1 router never forms an adjacency with a Level 2 router. A Level 1-2 router forms Level 1 adjacencies with a neighboring Level 1 router and forms Level 2 adjacencies with a neighboring Level 2 router. NOTE: Even though you enable IS-IS globally, enable the IS-IS process on an interface for the IS-IS process to exchange protocol information and form adjacencies. To configure IS-IS globally, use the following commands.
The default IS type is level-1-2. To change the IS type to Level 1 only or Level 2 only, use the is-type command in ROUTER ISIS mode. To view the IS-IS configuration, enter the show isis protocol command in EXEC Privilege mode or the show config command in ROUTER ISIS mode. DellEMC#show isis protocol IS-IS Router: System Id: EEEE.EEEE.EEEE IS-Type: level-1-2 Manual area address(es): 47.0004.004d.0001 Routing for area address(es): 21.2223.2425.2627.2829.3031.3233 47.0004.004d.
NOTE: When you do not enable transition mode, you do not have IPv6 connectivity between routers operating in single-topology mode and routers operating in multi-topology mode. 2. Exclude this router from other router’s SPF calculations. ROUTER ISIS AF IPV6 mode set-overload-bit 3. Set the minimum interval between SPF calculations.
● Configure graceful restart timer T3 to set the time used by the restarting router as an overall maximum time to wait for database synchronization to complete. ROUTER-ISIS mode graceful-restart t3 {adjacency | manual seconds} ○ adjacency: the restarting router receives the remaining time value from its peer and adjusts its T3 value so if user has configured this option. ○ manual: allows you to specify a fixed value that the restarting router should use. The range is from 50 to 120 seconds.
LSP Interval: 33 Next IS-IS LAN Level-1 Hello in 4 seconds Next IS-IS LAN Level-2 Hello in 6 seconds LSP Interval: 33 Restart Capable Neighbors: 2, In Start: 0, In Restart: 0 DellEMC# Changing LSP Attributes IS-IS routers flood link state PDUs (LSPs) to exchange routing information. LSP attributes include the generation interval, maximum transmission unit (MTU) or size, and the refresh interval. You can modify the LSP attribute defaults, but it is not necessary.
example, if you configure the metric as narrow, and a link state PDU (LSP) with wide metrics is received, the route is not installed. Dell EMC Networking OS supports the following IS-IS metric styles. Table 51. Metric Styles Metric Style Characteristics Cost Range Supported on IS-IS Interfaces narrow Sends and accepts narrow or old TLVs (Type, Length, Value). 0 to 63 wide Sends and accepts wide or new TLVs. 0 to 16777215 transition Sends both wide (new) and narrow (old) TLVs.
○ default-metric: the range is from 0 to 63 if the metric-style is narrow, narrow-transition, or transition. The range is from 0 to 16777215 if the metric style is wide or wide transition. ● Assign a metric for an IPv6 link or interface. INTERFACE mode isis ipv6 metric default-metric [level-1 | level-2] ○ default-metric: the range is from 0 to 63 for narrow and transition metric styles. The range is from 0 to 16777215 for wide metric styles. The default is 10. The default level is level-1.
LSPID LSP Seq Num LSP Checksum B233.00-00 0x00000003 0x07BF eljefe.00-00 * 0x00000009 0xF76A eljefe.01-00 * 0x00000001 0x68DF eljefe.02-00 * 0x00000001 0x2E7F Force10.00-00 0x00000002 0xD1A7 IS-IS Level-2 Link State Database LSPID LSP Seq Num LSP Checksum B233.00-00 0x00000006 0xC38A eljefe.00-00 * 0x0000000D 0x51C6 eljefe.01-00 * 0x00000001 0x68DF eljefe.02-00 * 0x00000001 0x2E7F Force10.
○ For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ○ For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. ● Apply a configured prefix list to all outgoing IPv4 IS-IS routes. ROUTER ISIS mode distribute-list prefix-list-name out [bgp as-number | connected | ospf process-id | rip | static] You can configure one of the optional parameters: ○ connected: for directly connected routes. ○ ospf process-id: for OSPF routes only. ○ rip: for RIP routes only.
Redistributing IPv4 Routes In addition to filtering routes, you can add routes from other routing instances or protocols to the IS-IS process. With the redistribute command syntax, you can include BGP, OSPF, RIP, static, or directly connected routes in the IS-IS process. NOTE: Do not route iBGP routes to IS-IS unless there are route-maps associated with the IS-IS redistribution. To add routes from other routing instances or protocols, use the following commands.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ process-id: the range is from 1 to 65535. level-1, level-1-2, or level-2: assign all redistributed routes to a level. The default is level-2. metric value: the range is from 0 to 16777215. The default is 0. metric value: the range is from 0 to 16777215. The default is 0. match external: the range is 1 or 2. match internal metric-type: external or internal. map-name: name of a configured route map.
When the bit is set, a 1 is placed in the OL column in the show isis database command output. The overload bit is set in both the Level-1 and Level-2 database because the IS type for the router is Level-1-2. DellEMC#show isis database IS-IS Level-1 Link State Database LSPID LSP Seq Num LSP Checksum B233.00-00 0x00000003 0x07BF eljefe.00-00 * 0x0000000A 0xF963 eljefe.01-00 * 0x00000001 0x68DF eljefe.02-00 * 0x00000001 0x2E7F Force10.
To disable a specific debug command, enter the keyword no then the debug command. For example, to disable debugging of IS-IS updates, use the no debug isis updates-packets command. To disable all IS-IS debugging, use the no debug isis command. To disable all debugging, use the undebug all command. IS-IS Metric Styles The following sections provide additional information about the IS-IS metric styles.
Table 52. Metric Value When the Metric Style Changes (continued) Beginning Metric Style Final Metric Style Resulting IS-IS Metric Value show config and show runningconfig commands and is used if you change back to transition metric style. NOTE: A truncated value is a value that is higher than 63, but set back to 63 because the higher value is not supported. wide narrow transition default value (10) if the original value is greater than 63. A message is sent to the console.
Table 53. Metric Value when the Metric Style Changes Multiple Times (continued) Beginning Metric Style Next Metric Style Resulting Metric Value Next Metric Style Final Metric Value wide transition truncated value narrow default value (10). A message is sent to the logging buffer wide transition transition truncated value narrow transition default value (10).
NOTE: Whenever you make IS-IS configuration changes, clear the IS-IS process (re-started) using the clear isis command. The clear isis command must include the tag for the ISIS process. The following example shows the response from the router: DellEMC#clear isis * % ISIS not enabled. DellEMC#clear isis 9999 * You can configure IPv6 IS-IS routes in one of the following three different methods: ● Congruent Topology — You must configure both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses on the interface.
IS-IS Sample Configuration — Multi-topology DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/17)#show config ! interface twentyFiveGigE 1/17 ipv6 address 24:3::1/76 ipv6 router isis no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/17)# DellEMC(conf-router_isis)#show config ! router isis net 34.0000.0000.AAAA.
25 Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) A link aggregation group (LAG), referred to as a port channel by the Dell EMC Networking OS, can provide both load-sharing and port redundancy across line cards. You can enable LAGs as static or dynamic.
● You can configure link dampening on individual members of a LAG. LACP Modes Dell EMC Networking OS provides three modes for configuration of LACP — Off, Active, and Passive. ● Off — In this state, an interface is not capable of being part of a dynamic LAG. LACP does not run on any port that is configured to be in this state. ● Active — In this state, the interface is said to be in the “active negotiating state.” LACP runs on any link that is configured to be in this state.
Creating a LAG To create a dynamic port channel (LAG), use the following command. First you define the LAG and then the LAG interfaces. ● Create a dynamic port channel (LAG). CONFIGURATION mode interface port-channel ● Create a dynamic port channel (LAG). CONFIGURATION mode switchport DellEMC(conf)#interface port-channel 32 DellEMC(conf-if-po-32)#no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-po-32)#switchport The LAG is in the default VLAN. To place the LAG into a non-default VLAN, use the tagged command on the LAG.
NOTE: The 30-second timeout is available for dynamic LAG interfaces only. You can enter the lacp long-timeout command for static LAGs, but it has no effect. To configure LACP long timeout, use the following command. ● Set the LACP timeout value to 30 seconds.
Figure 62. Shared LAG State Tracking To avoid packet loss, redirect traffic through the next lowest-cost link (R3 to R4). Dell EMC Networking OS has the ability to bring LAG 2 down if LAG 1 fails, so that traffic can be redirected. This redirection is what is meant by shared LAG state tracking. To achieve this functionality, you must group LAG 1 and LAG 2 into a single entity, called a failover group.
Figure 63. Configuring Shared LAG State Tracking The following are shared LAG state tracking console messages: ● 2d1h45m: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Po 1 ● 2d1h45m: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Po 2 To view the status of a failover group member, use the show interface port-channel command.
LACP Basic Configuration Example The screenshots in this section are based on the following example topology. Two routers are named ALPHA and BRAVO, and their hostname prompts reflect those names. Figure 64. LACP Basic Configuration Example Configure a LAG on ALPHA The following example creates a LAG on ALPHA.
0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded Output Statistics 136 packets, 16718 bytes, 0 underruns 0 64-byte pkts, 15 over 64-byte pkts, 121 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 136 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts 0 Vlans, 0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions, 0 wreddrops Rate info (interval 299 seconds): Input 00.00 Mbits/sec,0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate Output 00.00 Mbits/sec,0 packets/sec, 0.
Figure 66.
Figure 67.
Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#switch Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#no shut Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#show config ! interface Port-channel 10 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#exit Bravo(conf)#int twentyFiveGigE 1/3 Bravo(conf)#no ip address Bravo(conf)#no switchport Bravo(conf)#shutdown Bravo(conf-if-tf-1/3)#port-channel-protocol lacp Bravo(conf-if-tf-1/3-lacp)#port-channel 10 mode active Bravo(conf-if-tf-1/3-lacp)#no shut Bravo(conf-if-tf-1/3)#end ! interface twentyFiveGigE 1/3 no ip address ! port-chan
Figure 68.
Figure 69.
Figure 70. Inspecting the LAG Status Using the show lacp command The point-to-point protocol (PPP) is a connection-oriented protocol that enables layer two links over various different physical layer connections. It is supported on both synchronous and asynchronous lines, and can operate in Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex mode. It was designed to carry IP traffic but is general enough to allow any type of network layer datagram to be sent over a PPP connection.
26 Layer 2 This chapter describes the Layer 2 features supported on the device. Topics: • • • • • • • Manage the MAC Address Table MAC Learning Limit Disabling MAC Address Learning on the System Enabling port security NIC Teaming Configure Redundant Pairs Far-End Failure Detection Manage the MAC Address Table You can perform the following management tasks in the MAC address table.
The range is from 10 to 1000000. Configuring a Static MAC Address A static entry is one that is not subject to aging. Enter static entries manually. To create a static MAC address entry, use the following command. ● Create a static MAC address entry in the MAC address table. CONFIGURATION mode mac-address-table static Displaying the MAC Address Table To display the MAC address table, use the following command. ● Display the contents of the MAC address table.
Setting the MAC Learning Limit To set a MAC learning limit on an interface, use the following command. ● Specify the number of MAC addresses that the system can learn off a Layer 2 interface. INTERFACE mode mac learning-limit address_limit Three options are available with the mac learning-limit command: ○ dynamic ○ no-station-move ○ station-move NOTE: An SNMP trap is available for mac learning-limit station-move. No other SNMP traps are available for MAC Learning Limit, including limit violations.
mac learning-limit no-station-move The no-station-move option, also known as “sticky MAC,” provides additional port security by preventing a station move. When you configure this option, the first entry in the table is maintained instead of creating an entry on the new interface. no-station-move is the default behavior. Entries created before you set this option are not affected. To display a list of all interfaces with a MAC learning limit, use the following command.
● Display a list of all of the interfaces configured with MAC learning limit or station move violation. CONFIGURATION mode show mac learning-limit violate-action NOTE: When the MAC learning limit (MLL) is configured as no-station-move, the MLL will be processed as static entries internally. For static entries, the MAC address will be installed in all port-pipes, irrespective of the VLAN membership.
mac port-security NIC Teaming NIC teaming is a feature that allows multiple network interface cards in a server to be represented by one MAC address and one IP address in order to provide transparent redundancy, balancing, and to fully utilize network adapter resources. The following illustration shows a topology where two NICs have been teamed together. In this case, if the primary NIC fails, traffic switches to the secondary NIC because they are represented by the same set of addresses. Figure 71.
Figure 72. Configuring the mac-address-table station-move refresh-arp Command Configure Redundant Pairs Networks that employ switches that do not support the spanning tree protocol (STP) — for example, networks with digital subscriber line access multiplexers (DSLAM) — cannot have redundant links between switches because they create switching loops (as shown in the following illustration).
Figure 73. Configuring Redundant Layer 2 Pairs without Spanning Tree You configure a redundant pair by assigning a backup interface to a primary interface with the switchport backup interface command. Initially, the primary interface is active and transmits traffic and the backup interface remains down. If the primary fails for any reason, the backup transitions to an active Up state. If the primary interface fails and later comes back up, it remains as the backup interface for the redundant pair.
02:28:04: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Tw 1/12 02:28:04: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-STATE_ACT_STBY: Changed interface state to standby: tw 1/13 Example of Configuring Redundant Layer 2 Pairs DellEMC(conf-if-range-tf-1/1-1/2)#switchport backup interface twentyFiveGigE 1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-range-tf-1/1-1/2)#show config ! interface twentyFiveGigE 1/1 no ip address switchport switchport backup interface twentyFiveGigE 1/2 no shutdown ! interface twentyFiveGigE 1/2 no ip address switch
Far-End Failure Detection Far-end failure detection (FEFD) is a protocol that senses remote data link errors in a network. FEFD responds by sending a unidirectional report that triggers an echoed response after a specified time interval. You can enable FEFD globally or locally on an interface basis. Disabling the global FEFD configuration does not disable the interface configuration. Figure 74.
5. If the FEFD system has been set to Aggressive mode and neighboring echoes are not received after three intervals, the state changes to Err-disabled. You must manually reset all interfaces in the Err-disabled state using the fefd reset [interface] command in EXEC privilege mode (it can be done globally or one interface at a time) before the FEFD enabled system can become operational again. Table 55.
To display information about the state of each interface, use the show fefd command in EXEC privilege mode. DellEMC#show fefd FEFD is globally 'ON', interval is 3 seconds, mode is 'Normal'.
Debugging FEFD To debug FEFD, use the first command. To provide output for each packet transmission over the FEFD enabled connection, use the second command. ● Display output whenever events occur that initiate or disrupt an FEFD enabled connection. EXEC Privilege mode debug fefd events ● Provide output for each packet transmission over the FEFD enabled connection.
27 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) This chapter describes how to configure and use the link layer discovery protocol (LLDP). Topics: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 802.
TLVs are encapsulated in a frame called an LLDP data unit (LLDPDU) (shown in the following table), which is transmitted from one LLDP-enabled device to its LLDP-enabled neighbors. LLDP is a one-way protocol. LLDP-enabled devices (LLDP agents) can transmit and/or receive advertisements, but they cannot solicit and do not respond to advertisements. There are five types of TLVs. All types are mandatory in the construction of an LLDPDU except Optional TLVs.
Figure 77. Organizationally Specific TLV IEEE Organizationally Specific TLVs Eight TLV types have been defined by the IEEE 802.1 and 802.3 working groups as a basic part of LLDP; the IEEE OUI is 00-80-C2. You can configure the Dell EMC Networking system to advertise any or all of these TLVs. Table 57. Optional TLV Types Type TLV Description 4 Port description A user-defined alphanumeric string that describes the port. Dell EMC Networking OS does not currently support this TLV.
Table 57. Optional TLV Types (continued) Type TLV Description (non-configurable) in the LLDP-MED implementation. 127 Power via MDI Dell EMC Networking supports the LLDP-MED protocol, which recommends that Power via MDI TLV be not implemented, and therefore Dell EMC Networking implements Extended Power via MDI TLV only. 127 Link Aggregation Indicates whether the link is capable of being aggregated, whether it is currently in a LAG, and the port identification of the LAG.
Table 58. TIA-1057 (LLDP-MED) Organizationally Specific TLVs (continued) Type SubType TLV Description 127 2 Network Policy Indicates the application type, VLAN ID, Layer 2 Priority, and DSCP value. 127 3 Location Identification Indicates that the physical location of the device expressed in one of three possible formats: ● Coordinate Based LCI ● Civic Address LCI ● Emergency Call Services ELIN 127 4 Location Identification Indicates power requirements, priority, and power status.
Figure 78. LLDP-MED Capabilities TLV Table 59. Dell EMC Networking OS LLDP-MED Capabilities Bit Position TLV Dell EMC Networking OS Support 0 LLDP-MED Capabilities Yes 1 Network Policy Yes 2 Location Identification Yes 3 Extended Power via MDI-PSE Yes 4 Extended Power via MDI-PD No 5 Inventory No 6–15 reserved No Table 60.
Table 61. Network Policy Applications (continued) Type Application Description 1 Voice Specify this application type for dedicated IP telephony handsets and other appliances supporting interactive voice services. 2 Voice Signaling Specify this application type only if voice control packets use a separate network policy than voice data.
● Dell EMC Networking systems support up to eight neighbors per interface. ● Dell EMC Networking systems support a maximum of 8000 total neighbors per system. If the number of interfaces multiplied by eight exceeds the maximum, the system does not configure more than 8000. ● INTERFACE level configurations override all CONFIGURATION level configurations. ● LLDP is not hitless. LLDP Compatibility ● Spanning tree and force10 ring protocol “blocked” ports allow LLDPDUs. ● 802.
no disable Disabling and Undoing LLDP To disable or undo LLDP, use the following command. ● Disable LLDP globally or for an interface. disable To undo an LLDP configuration, precede the relevant command with the keyword no. Enabling LLDP on Management Ports LLDP on management ports is enabled by default. To enable LLDP on management ports, use the following command. 1. Enter Protocol LLDP mode. CONFIGURATION mode protocol lldp 2. Enter LLDP management-interface mode.
2. Advertise one or more TLVs. PROTOCOL LLDP mode advertise {dcbx-appln-tlv | dcbx-tlv | dot3-tlv | interface-port-desc | management-tlv | med } Include the keyword for each TLV you want to advertise. ● For management TLVs: system-capabilities, system-description. ● For 802.1 TLVs: port-protocol-vlan-id, port-vlan-id . ● For 802.3 TLVs: max-frame-size.
no disable DellEMC(conf-lldp)# DellEMC(conf-lldp)#exit DellEMC(conf)#interface twentyFiveGigE 1/31 DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/31)#show config ! interface twentyFiveGigE 1/31 no ip address switchport no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/31)#protocol lldp DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/31-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/31-lldp)# Viewing Information Advertised by Adjacent LLDP Neighbors To view brief information about adjacent devices or to view all the information that neighbors are advertising, use the
Local Port ID: ManagementEthernet 1/1 Locally assigned remote Neighbor Index: 2 Remote TTL: 120 Information valid for next 94 seconds Time since last information change of this neighbor: 5d5h9m Remote MTU: 1532 Remote System Name: swlab2-maa-tor-C4 Remote Management Address (IPv4): 100.104.70.201 Remote System Desc: Dell EMC Networking OS10-Enterprise. Copyright (c) 1999-2019 by Dell Inc. All Rights Reserved. System Description: OS10 Enterprise. OS Version: 10.4.3.4.
Configuring LLDPDU Intervals LLDPDUs are transmitted periodically; the default interval is 30 seconds. To configure LLDPDU intervals, use the following command. ● Configure a non-default transmit interval.
rx Rx only tx Tx only R1(conf-lldp)#mode tx R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description mode tx no disable R1(conf-lldp)#no mode R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description no disable R1(conf-lldp)# Configuring
Debugging LLDP You can view the TLVs that your system is sending and receiving. To view the TLVs, use the following commands. ● View a readable version of the TLVs. debug lldp brief ● View a readable version of the TLVs plus a hexadecimal version of the entire LLDPDU, including unrecognized TLVs. debug lldp detail To stop viewing the LLDP TLVs sent and received by the system, use the no debug lldp command. Figure 81.
Relevant Management Objects Dell EMC Networking OS supports all IEEE 802.1AB MIB objects. The following tables list the objects associated with: ● received and transmitted TLVs ● the LLDP configuration on the local agent ● IEEE 802.1AB Organizationally Specific TLVs ● received and transmitted LLDP-MED TLVs Table 62.
Table 63.
Table 64. LLDP 802.
Table 65.
28 Microsoft Network Load Balancing Network load balancing (NLB) is a clustering functionality that is implemented by Microsoft on Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 operating systems (OSs). NLB uses a distributed methodology or pattern to equally split and balance the network traffic load across a set of servers that are part of the cluster or group.
Limitations of the NLB Feature The following limitations apply to switches on which you configure NLB: ● The NLB Unicast mode uses switch flooding to transmit all packets to all the servers that are part of the VLAN. When a large volume of traffic is processed, the clustering performance might be impacted in a small way. This limitation is applicable to switches that perform unicast flooding in the software. ● The ip vlan-flooding command applies globally across the system and for all VLANs.
There might be some ARP table entries that are resolved through ARP packets, which had the Ethernet MAC SA different from the MAC information inside the ARP packet. This unicast data traffic flooding occurs only for those packets that use these ARP entries. Enabling a Switch for Multicast NLB To enable a switch for Multicast NLB mode, perform the following steps: 1.
29 Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) Multicast source discovery protocol (MSDP) is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. Protocol Overview MSDP is a Layer 3 protocol that connects IPv4 protocol-independent multicast-sparse mode (PIM-SM) domains. A domain in the context of MSDP is a contiguous set of routers operating PIM within a common boundary defined by an exterior gateway protocol, such as border gateway protocol (BGP).
Figure 83.
Implementation Information The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of MSDP is in accordance with RFC 3618 and Anycast RP is in accordance with RFC 3446. Configure Multicast Source Discovery Protocol Configuring MSDP is a four-step process. 1. Enable an exterior gateway protocol (EGP) with at least two routing domains. Refer to the following figures. The MSDP Sample Configurations show the OSPF-BGP configuration used in this chapter for MSDP.
Figure 84.
Figure 85.
Figure 86.
Figure 87. Configuring MSDP Enable MSDP Enable MSDP by peering RPs in different administrative domains. 1. Enable MSDP. CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-msdp 2. Peer PIM systems in different administrative domains. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp peer connect-source R3(conf)#ip multicast-msdp R3(conf)#ip msdp peer 192.168.0.
Multicast sources in remote domains are stored on the RP in the source-active cache (SA cache). The system does not create entries in the multicast routing table until there is a local receiver for the corresponding multicast group. R3#show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.1 Local Addr: 192.168.0.
CONFIGURATION mode clear ip msdp sa-cache [group-address | local | rejected-sa] Enabling the Rejected Source-Active Cache To cache rejected sources, use the following command. Active sources can be rejected because the RPF check failed, the SA limit is reached, the peer RP is unreachable, or the SA message has a format error. ● Cache rejected sources.
Figure 88.
Figure 89.
Figure 90. MSDP Default Peer, Scenario 4 Specifying Source-Active Messages To specify messages, use the following command. ● Specify the forwarding-peer and originating-RP from which all active sources are accepted without regard for the RPF check. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp default-peer ip-address list If you do not specify an access list, the peer accepts all sources that peer advertises. All sources from RPs that the ACL denies are subject to the normal RPF check. DellEMC(conf)#ip msdp peer 10.0.50.
DellEMC#ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa MSDP Rejected SA Cache 3 rejected SAs received, cache-size 32766 UpTime GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr 00:33:18 229.0.50.64 24.0.50.64 200.0.1.50 00:33:18 229.0.50.65 24.0.50.65 200.0.1.50 00:33:18 229.0.50.66 24.0.50.66 200.0.1.50 LearnedFrom 10.0.50.2 10.0.50.2 10.0.50.2 Reason Rpf-Fail Rpf-Fail Rpf-Fail Limiting the Source-Active Messages from a Peer To limit the source-active messages from a peer, use the following commands. 1.
Preventing MSDP from Caching a Remote Source To prevent MSDP from caching a remote source, use the following commands. 1. OPTIONAL: Cache sources that the SA filter denies in the rejected SA cache. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp cache-rejected-sa 2. Prevent the system from caching remote sources learned from a specific peer based on source and group. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp sa-filter list out peer list ext-acl As shown in the following example, R1 is advertising source 10.11.4.2.
GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr LearnedFrom 239.0.0.1 10.11.4.2 192.168.0.1 local R3(conf)#do show ip msdp sa-cache MSDP Source-Active Cache - 1 entries GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr LearnedFrom 239.0.0.1 10.11.4.2 192.168.0.1 192.168.0.1 Expire 70 UpTime 00:27:20 Expire 1 UpTime 00:10:29 [Router 3] R3(conf)#do show ip msdp sa-cache R3(conf)# To display the configured SA filters for a peer, use the show ip msdp peer command from EXEC Privilege mode.
clear ip msdp peer peer-address R3(conf)#do show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.1 Local Addr: 192.168.0.3(639) Connect Source: Lo 0 State: Established Up/Down Time: 00:04:26 Timers: KeepAlive 30 sec, Hold time 75 sec SourceActive packet count (in/out): 5/0 SAs learned from this peer: 0 SA Filtering: Input (S,G) filter: myremotefilter Output (S,G) filter: none R3(conf)#do clear ip msdp peer 192.168.0.1 R3(conf)#do show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.1 Local Addr: 0.0.0.
1. All the RPs serving a given group are configured with an identical anycast address. 2. Sources then register with the topologically closest RP. 3. RPs use MSDP to peer with each other using a unique address. Figure 91. MSDP with Anycast RP Configuring Anycast RP To configure anycast RP, use the following commands. 1. In each routing domain that has multiple RPs serving a group, create a Loopback interface on each RP serving the group with the same IP address. CONFIGURATION mode interface loopback 2.
ip msdp peer 5. Advertise the network of each of the unique Loopback addresses throughout the network. ROUTER OSPF mode network Reducing Source-Active Message Flooding RPs flood source-active messages to all of their peers away from the RP. When multiple RPs exist within a domain, the RPs forward received active source information back to the originating RP, which violates the RFP rule. You can prevent this unnecessary flooding by creating a mesh-group.
ip msdp peer 192.168.0.22 connect-source Loopback 1 ip msdp mesh-group AS100 192.168.0.22 ip msdp originator-id Loopback 1! ip pim rp-address 192.168.0.1 group-address 224.0.0.0/4 The following example shows an R2 configuration for MSDP with Anycast RP. ip multicast-routing ! interface twentyFiveGigE 2/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.4.1/24 no shutdown ! interface twentyFiveGigE 2/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.
interface Loopback 0 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 192.168.0.3/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.6.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.3/32 area 0 redistribute static redistribute connected redistribute bgp 200 ! router bgp 200 redistribute ospf 1 neighbor 192.168.0.22 remote-as 100 neighbor 192.168.0.22 ebgp-multihop 255 neighbor 192.168.0.22 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.0.22 no shutdown ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.11 connect-source Loopback 0 ip msdp peer 192.168.0.
MSDP Sample Configuration: R2 Running-Config ip multicast-routing ! interface twentyFiveGigE 1/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.4.1/24 no shutdown ! interface twentyFiveGigE 1/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.21/24 no shutdown ! interface twentyFiveGigE 1/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.0.23/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 0 ip address 192.168.0.2/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.1.0/24 area 0 network 10.11.4.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.
router bgp 200 redistribute ospf 1 neighbor 192.168.0.2 remote-as 100 neighbor 192.168.0.2 ebgp-multihop 255 neighbor 192.168.0.2 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.0.2 no shutdown ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.1 connect-source Loopback 0 ! ip route 192.168.0.2/32 10.11.0.23 MSDP Sample Configuration: R4 Running-Config ip multicast-routing ! interface twentyFiveGigE 1/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.1/24 no shutdown ! interface twentyFiveGigE 1/22 ip address 10.10.42.
30 Multicast Listener Discovery Protocol Dell Networking OS Supports Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol. Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) is a Layer 3 protocol that IPv6 routers use to learn of the multicast receivers that are directly connected to them and the groups in which the receivers are interested. Multicast routing protocols (like PIM) use the information learned from MLD to route multicast traffic to all interested receivers.
Joining a Multicast Group The Querier periodically sends a General Query to the all-nodes multicast address FF02::1. A host that wants to join a multicast group responds to the general query with a report that contains the group address; the report is also addressed to the group (in the IPv6 Destination Address field). To avoid duplicate reporting, any host that hears a report from another host for the same group in which it itself is interested cancels its report for that group.
| | * * | | +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [2] * | | * * | | +. -+ . . . . . . +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [N] * | | * * | | +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ Version 2 multicast listener reports are sent by IP nodes to report (to neighboring routers) the current multicast listening state, or changes in the multicast listening state, of their interfaces.
| | * Source Address [1] * | | * * | | +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [2] * | | * * | | +-+ . . . . . . . . . +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [N] * | | * * | | +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ | | . . . Auxiliary Data . . .
a report when the timer expires. Increasing this value spreads host responses over a greater period of time, and so reduces response burstiness. To adjust the query response time, use the following command: INTERFACE Mode ipv6 mld query-max-resp-time Configuring MLD Version To configure MLD version on the system, follow this procedure: Select the MLD version INTERFACE Mode ipv6 mld version {1 | 2} If you do not configure the MLD version, the system defaults to version 2.
retransmissions. Lowering the Last Listener Query Interval reduces the time to detect that there are no remaining receivers for a group, and so can reduce the amount of unnecessarily forwarded traffic. To adjust the last-member query interval, use the following command: INTERFACE Mode ipv6 mld last-member-query-interval Displaying MLD groups table Display MLD groups. Group information can be filtered.
Enable MLD Snooping MLD is automatically enabled when you enable IPv6 PIM, but MLD snooping must be explicitly enabled. To enable MLD snooping, use the following command: CONFIGURATION Mode ipv6 mld snooping enable Disable MLD Snooping When MLD is enabled globally, it is by default enabled on all the VLANs.
EXEC Pivilege show ipv6 mld snooping groups explicit Display the MLD Snooping Table 1. To display the MLD snooping table, use the following command: EXEC Privilege show ipv6 mroute snooping vlan 2.
31 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) Multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP) — specified in IEEE 802.1Q-2003 — is a rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP)-based spanning tree variation that improves per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+). MSTP allows multiple spanning tree instances and allows you to map many VLANs to one spanning tree instance to reduce the total number of required instances. Protocol Overview MSTP — specified in IEEE 802.
• • • • • • • Modifying Global Parameters Modifying the Interface Parameters Setting STP path cost as constant Configuring an EdgePort Flush MAC Addresses after a Topology Change MSTP Sample Configurations Debugging and Verifying MSTP Configurations Spanning Tree Variations The Dell EMC Networking OS supports four variations of spanning tree, as shown in the following table. Table 66. Spanning Tree Variations Dell EMC Networking Term IEEE Specification Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 802 .
● Enabling SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes ● Configuring Spanning Trees as Hitless Enable Multiple Spanning Tree Globally MSTP is not enabled by default. To enable MSTP globally, use the following commands. When you enable MSTP, all physical, VLAN, and port-channel interfaces that are enabled and in Layer 2 mode are automatically part of the MSTI 0. ● Within an MSTI, only one path from any bridge to any other bridge is enabled.
MSTI 1 VLAN 100 MSTI 2 VLAN 200-300 All bridges in the MSTP region must have the same VLAN-to-instance mapping. To view which instance a VLAN is mapped to, use the show spanning-tree mst vlan command from EXEC Privilege mode.
Designated port id is 128.384, designated path cost 20000 Number of transitions to forwarding state 1 BPDU (MRecords): sent 39291, received 7547 The port is not in the Edge port mode Influencing MSTP Root Selection MSTP determines the root bridge, but you can assign one bridge a lower priority to increase the probability that it becomes the root bridge. To change the bridge priority, use the following command. ● Assign a number as the bridge priority.
PROTOCOL MSTP mode revision number To view the current region name and revision, use the show spanning-tree mst configuration command from EXEC Privilege mode. DellEMC(conf-mstp)#name my-mstp-region DellEMC(conf-mstp)#exit DellEMC(conf)#do show spanning-tree mst config MST region name: my-mstp-region Revision: 0 MSTI VID 1 100 2 200-300 Modifying Global Parameters The root bridge sets the values for forward-delay, hello-time, max-age, and max-hops and overwrites the values set on other MSTP bridges.
To view the current values for MSTP parameters, use the show running-config spanning-tree mstp command from EXEC privilege mode.
The range is from 0 to 240, in increments of 16. The default is 128. To view the current values for these interface parameters, use the show config command from INTERFACE mode. Setting STP path cost as constant You can set the path cost to be constant for port-channel regardless of the operation status of the port-channel member ports. To set the STP path cost, use the port-channel path-cost custom command from the PROTOCOL SPANNING-TREE mode.
switchport spanning-tree mstp edge-port spanning-tree MSTI 1 priority 144 no shutdown Flush MAC Addresses after a Topology Change Dell EMC Networking OS has an optimized MAC address flush mechanism for RSTP, MSTP, and PVST+ that flushes addresses only when necessary, which allows for faster convergence during topology changes. However, you may activate the flushing mechanism defined by 802.1Q-2003 using the tc-flush-standard command, which flushes MAC addresses after every topology change notification.
interface twentyFiveGigE 1/21 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface twentyFiveGigE 1/31 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! (Step 3) interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged twentyFiveGigE 1/21,1/31 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip address tagged twentyFiveGigE 1/21,1/31 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged twentyFiveGigE 1/21,1/31 no shutdown Router 2 Running-Configuration This example uses the following steps: 1.
tagged twentyFiveGigE 1/3,1/4 no shutdown (Step 1) protocol spanning-tree mstp no disable name Tahiti revision 123 MSTI 1 VLAN 100 MSTI 2 VLAN 200,300 ! (Step 2) interface twentyFiveGigE 1/11 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface twentyFiveGigE 1/31 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! (Step 3) interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged twentyFiveGigE 1/11,1/31 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip address tagged twentyFiveGigE 1/11,1/31 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged twent
no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip address tagged twentyFiveGigE 1/1,1/2 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged twentyFiveGigE 1/1,1/2 no shutdown (Step 1) protocol spanning-tree mstp no disable name Tahiti revision 123 MSTI 1 VLAN 100 MSTI 2 VLAN 200,300 ! (Step 2) interface twentyFiveGigE 1/11 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface twentyFiveGigE 1/21 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! (Step 3) interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged twentyFiveGigE 1/11,1/21 no shutdown !
switchport protected 0 exit interface 1/0/32 no shutdown spanning-tree port mode enable switchport protected 0 exit (Step 3) interface vlan 100 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit interface vlan 200 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit interface vlan 300 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit Debugging and Verifying MSTP Configurations To debut and verify MSTP configuration, use the following commands. ● Display BPDUs. EXEC Privilege mode debug spanning-tree mstp bpdu ● Display MSTP-triggered topology change messages.
revision 123 MSTI 1 VLAN 100 MSTI 2 VLAN 200,300 The following example shows viewing the debug log of a successful MSTP configuration. DellEMC#debug spanning-tree mstp bpdu MSTP debug bpdu is ON DellEMC# 4w0d4h : MSTP: Sending BPDU on Tf 1/1 : ProtId: 0, Ver: 3, Bpdu Type: MSTP, Flags 0x6e CIST Root Bridge Id: 32768:0001.e806.953e, Ext Path Cost: 0 Regional Bridge Id: 32768:0001.e806.
32 Multicast Features NOTE: Multicast routing is supported on secondary IP addresses; it is not supported on IPv6. NOTE: Multicast routing is supported across default and non-default virtual routing and forwarding (VRFs).
Protocol Ethernet Address RIP 01:00:5e:00:00:09 NTP 01:00:5e:00:01:01 VRRP 01:00:5e:00:00:12 PIM-SM 01:00:5e:00:00:0d ● ● ● ● The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of MTRACE is in accordance with IETF draft draft-fenner-traceroute-ipm. Multicast is not supported on secondary IP addresses. If you enable multicast routing, egress Layer 3 ACL is not applied to multicast data traffic. Multicast traffic can be forwarded to a maximum of 15 VLANs with the same outgoing interface.
● Limit the total number of multicast routes on the system. CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-limit The range is from 1 to . The default is 4000. NOTE: The IN-L3-McastFib CAM partition stores multicast routes and is a separate hardware limit that exists per port-pipe. Any software-configured limit may supersede this hardware space limitation. The opposite is also true, the CAM partition might not be exhausted at the time the system-wide route limit is reached using the ip multicast-limit command.
Figure 94. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group The following table lists the location and description shown in the previous illustration. Table 68. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group — Description Location Description 1/21/1 ● ● ● ● Interface twentyfiveGigE 1/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.1/24 no shutdown 1/31/1 ● ● ● ● Interface twentyfiveGigE 1/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
Table 68. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group — Description (continued) Location Description 2/11/1 ● ● ● ● Interface twentyfiveGigE 1/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.2/24 no shutdown 2/31/1 ● ● ● ● Interface twentyfiveGigE 1/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.23.1/24 no shutdown 3/1/1 ● ● ● ● Interface twentyfiveGigE 1/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.1/24 no shutdown 3/11/1 ● ● ● ● Interface twentyfiveGigE 1/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
multicast traffic flows only from the RP to the receivers. Once a receiver receives traffic from the RP, PM-SM switches to SPT to forward multicast traffic, which connects the receiver directly to the source. You can configure PIM to switch over to the SPT when the router receives multicast packets at or beyond a specified rate. Table 69.
Figure 95. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group The following table lists the location and description shown in the previous illustration. Table 70. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group — Description Location Description 1/21 ● ● ● ● Interface TwentyfiveGigE 1/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.1/24 no shutdown 1/31 ● ● ● ● Interface TwentyfiveGigE 1/2 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
Table 70. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group — Description (continued) Location Description 2/11 ● ● ● ● Interface TwentyfiveGigE 2/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.2/24 no shutdown 2/31 ● ● ● ● Interface TwentyfiveGigE 2/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.23.1/24 no shutdown 3/1 ● ● ● ● Interface TwentyfiveGigE 3/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.1/24 no shutdown 3/11 ● ● ● ● Interface TwentyfiveGigE 3/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
Understanding Multicast Traceroute (mtrace) Multicast Traceroute (mtrace) is a multicast diagnostic facility used for tracing multicast paths. Mtrace enables you to trace the path that a multicast packet takes from its source to the destination. When you initiate mtrace from a source to a destination, an mtrace Query packet with IGMP type 0x1F is sent to the last-hop multicast router for the given destination. The mtrace query packet is forwarded hop-by-hop untill it reaches the last-hop router.
● MTRACE Transit — when a Dell EMC Networking system is an intermediate router between the source and destination in an MTRACE query, Dell EMC Networking OS computes the RPF neighbor for the source, fills in the request, and forwards the request to the RPF neighbor. When a Dell EMC Networking system is the last hop to the destination, Dell EMC Networking OS sends a response to the query. To print the network path, use the following command.
Table 71. mtrace Command Output — Explained (continued) Command Output Description From source (?) to destination (?) In case the provided source or destination IP can be resolved to a hostname the corresponding name will be displayed. In cases where the IP cannot be resolved, it is displayed as (?) 0 1.1.1.1 --> Destination The first row in the table corresponds to the destination provided by the user. -1 1.1.1.1 PIM Reached RP/Core 103.103.103.
Table 72. Supported Error Codes (continued) Error Code Error Name Description 0x81 NO_SPACE There is not enough room to insert another response data block in the packet. mtrace Scenarios This section describes various scenarios that may result when an mtrace command is issued. The following table describes various scenarios when the mtrace command is issued: Table 73.
Table 73. Mtrace Scenarios (continued) Scenario You invoke a weak mtrace request by specifying only the source without specifying the mulicast tree or multicast group information for the source. Mtrace traces a path towards the source by using the RPF neighbor at each node. Output R1>mtrace 103.103.103.3 Type Ctrl-C to abort. Querying reverse path for source 103.103.103.
Table 73. Mtrace Scenarios (continued) Scenario When you issue the mtrace command with the source and multicast group information, if a multicast route is not present on a particular node, then the NO ROUTE error code is displayed on the node. In this scenario, the Source Network/Mask column for that particular node displays the the value as default.
Table 73. Mtrace Scenarios (continued) Scenario Output ----------------------------------------------------------------- If the destination provided in the command is not a valid receiver for the multicast group, the last hop router for the destination provides the WRONG LAST HOP error code. If the last-hop router contains a path to the source, the path is traced irrespective of the incorrect destination.
Table 73. Mtrace Scenarios (continued) Scenario Output 0 1.1.1.1 --> Destination -1 * * * * ----------------------------------------------------------------Timed out receiving responses Perhaps no local router has a route for source, the receiver is not a member of the multicast group or the multicast ttl is too low. While traversing the path from source to destination, if the mtrace packet exhausts the maximum buffer size of the packet, then NO SPACE error is displayed in the output.
Table 73. Mtrace Scenarios (continued) Scenario Output Querying reverse path for source 6.6.6.6 to destination 4.4.4.5 via RPF From source (?) to destination (?) ---------------------------------------------------------------|Hop| OIF IP |Proto| Forwarding Code |Source Network/Mask| ---------------------------------------------------------------0 4.4.4.5 --> Destination -1 4.4.4.4 PIM 6.6.6.0/24 -2 20.20.20.2 PIM 6.6.6.0/24 -3 10.10.10.1 PIM RPF Interface 6.6.6.
33 Object Tracking IPv4 or IPv6 object tracking is available on Dell EMC Networking OS. Object tracking allows the Dell EMC Networking OS client processes, such as virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP), to monitor tracked objects (for example, interface or link status) and take appropriate action when the state of an object changes. NOTE: In Dell EMC Networking OS release version 8.4.1.0, object tracking is supported only on VRRP.
Figure 96. Object Tracking Example When you configure a tracked object, such as an IPv4/IPv6 a route or interface, you specify an object number to identify the object. Optionally, you can also specify: ● UP and DOWN thresholds used to report changes in a route metric. ● A time delay before changes in a tracked object’s state are reported to a client. Track Layer 2 Interfaces You can create an object to track the line-protocol state of a Layer 2 interface.
A tracked route matches a route in the routing table only if the exact address and prefix length match an entry in the routing table. For example, when configured as a tracked route, 10.0.0.0/24 does not match the routing table entry 10.0.0.0/8. If no route-table entry has the exact address and prefix length, the tracked route is considered to be DOWN.
VRRP Object Tracking As a client, VRRP can track up to 20 objects (including route entries, and Layer 2 and Layer 3 interfaces) in addition to the 12 tracked interfaces supported for each VRRP group. You can assign a unique priority-cost value from 1 to 254 to each tracked VRRP object or group interface. The priority cost is subtracted from the VRRP group priority if a tracked VRRP object is in a DOWN state.
show track object-id DellEMC(conf)#track 100 interface twentyFiveGigE 1/1 line-protocol DellEMC(conf-track-100)#delay up 20 DellEMC(conf-track-100)#description San Jose data center DellEMC(conf-track-100)#end DellEMC#show track 100 Track 100 Interface twentyFiveGigE 1/1 line-protocol Description: San Jose data center Tracking a Layer 3 Interface You can create an object that tracks the routing status of an IPv4 or IPv6 Layer 3 interface.
The following is an example of configuring object tracking for an IPv4 interface: DellEMC(conf)#track 101 interface twentyFiveGigE 1/2 ip routing DellEMC(conf-track-101)#delay up 20 DellEMC(conf-track-101)#description NYC metro DellEMC(conf-track-101)#end DellEMC#show track 101 Track 101 Interface twentyFiveGigE 1/2 ip routing Description: NYC metro The following is an example of configuring object tracking for an IPv6 interface: DellEMC(conf)#track 103 interface twentyFiveGigE 1/11 ipv6 routing DellEMC(con
○ For ISIS, you can set the resolution in the range from 1 to 1000, where the default is 10. ○ For OSPF, you can set the resolution in the range from 1 to 1592, where the default is 1. ○ The resolution value used to map static routes is not configurable. By default, Dell EMC Networking OS assigns a metric of 0 to static routes. ○ The resolution value used to map RIP routes is not configurable. The RIP hop-count is automatically multiplied by 16 to scale it.
Track 105 IPv6 route 1234::/64 reachability Description: Headquarters Reachability is Down (route not in route table) 2 changes, last change 00:03:03 Configuring track reachability refresh interval If there is no entry in ARP table or if the next-hop address in the ARP cache ages out for a route tracked for its reachability, an attempt is made to check if the next-hop address is reachable after a certain refresh interval to see if the next-hop address appear in the ARP cache before considering it as DOWN.
Valid delay times are from 0 to 180 seconds. The default is 0. 4. (Optional) Identify the tracked object with a text description. OBJECT TRACKING mode description text The text string can be up to 80 characters. 5. (Optional) Configure the metric threshold for the UP and/or DOWN routing status to be tracked for the specified route. OBJECT TRACKING mode threshold metric {[up number] [down number]} The default UP threshold is 254.
2 changes, last change 00:16:08 Tracked by: Track 2 IPv6 route 2040::/64 metric threshold Metric threshold is Up (STATIC/0/0) 5 changes, last change 00:02:16 Metric threshold down 255 up 254 First-hop interface is twentyFiveGigE 1/2 Tracked by: VRRP twentyFiveGigE 1/30 IPv6 VRID 1 Track 3 IPv6 route 2050::/64 reachability Reachability is Up (STATIC) 5 changes, last change 00:02:16 First-hop interface is twentyFiveGigE 1/4 Tracked by: VRRP twentyFiveGigE 1/5 IPv6 VRID 1 Track 4 Interface twentyFiveGigE 1/8 i
track 5 ip route 192.168.0.
34 Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) Open shortest path first (OSPFv2 for IPv4) and OSPF version 3 (OSPF for IPv6) are supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. This chapter provides a general description of OSPFv2 (OSPF for IPv4) and OSPFv3 (OSPF for IPv6) as supported in the Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS). NOTE: The fundamental mechanisms of OSPF (flooding, DR election, area support, SPF calculations, and so on) are the same between OSPFv2 and OSPFv3.
Figure 97. Autonomous System Areas Area Types The backbone of the network is Area 0. It is also called Area 0.0.0.0 and is the core of any AS. All other areas must connect to Area 0. An OSPF backbone is responsible for distributing routing information between areas. It consists of all area border routers, networks not wholly contained in any area, and their attached routers. NOTE: If you configure two non-backbone areas, then you must enable the B bit in OSPF.
Networks and Neighbors As a link-state protocol, OSPF sends routing information to other OSPF routers concerning the state of the links between them. The state (up or down) of those links is important. Routers that share a link become neighbors on that segment. OSPF uses the Hello protocol as a neighbor discovery and keep alive mechanism. After two routers are neighbors, they may proceed to exchange and synchronize their databases, which creates an adjacency.
Backbone Router (BR) A backbone router (BR) is part of the OSPF Backbone, Area 0. This includes all ABRs. It can also include any routers that connect only to the backbone and another ABR, but are only part of Area 0, such as Router I in the previous example. Area Border Router (ABR) Within an AS, an area border router (ABR) connects one or more areas to the backbone. The ABR keeps a copy of the link-state database for every area it connects to, so it may keep multiple copies of the link state database.
● Type 3: Summary LSA (OSPFv2), Inter-Area-Prefix LSA (OSPFv3) — An ABR takes information it has learned on one of its attached areas and can summarize it before sending it out on other areas it is connected to. The link-state ID of the Type 3 LSA is the destination network number. ● Type 4: AS Border Router Summary LSA (OSPFv2), Inter-Area-Router LSA (OSPFv3) — In some cases, Type 5 External LSAs are flooded to areas where the detailed next-hop information may not be available.
Figure 99. Priority and Cost Examples OSPF with Dell EMC Networking OS The Dell EMC Networking OS supports up to 128,000 OSPF routes for OSPFv2. Dell EMC Networking OS version 9.4(0.0) and later support only one OSPFv2 process per VRF. Dell EMC Networking OS version 9.7(0.0) and later support OSPFv3 in VRF. Also, on OSPFv3, Dell EMC Networking OS supports only one OSPFv3 process per VRF. OSPFv2 and OSPFv3 can co-exist but you must configure them individually.
does not necessarily have to interrupt the forwarding of data packets. This behavior is supported because the forwarding tables previously computed by an active RPM have been downloaded into the forwarding information base (FIB) on the line cards (the data plane) and are still resident.
Multi-Process OSPFv2 with VRF Multi-process OSPF with VRF is supported on the Dell EMC Networking OS. Only one OSPFv2 process per VRF is supported. Multi-process OSPF allows multiple OSPFv2 processes on a single router. Multiple OSPFv2 processes allow for isolating routing domains, supporting multiple route policies and priorities in different domains, and creating smaller domains for easier management. Each OSPFv2 process has a unique process ID and must have an associated router ID.
Configuration Information The interfaces must be in Layer 3 mode (assigned an IP address) and enabled so that they can send and receive traffic. The OSPF process must know about these interfaces. To make the OSPF process aware of these interfaces, they must be assigned to OSPF areas. You must configure OSPF GLOBALLY on the system in CONFIGURATION mode. NOTE: Loop back routes are not installed in the Route Table Manager (RTM) as non-active routes.
Enabling OSPFv2 To enable Layer 3 routing, assign an IP address to an interface (physical or Loopback). By default, OSPF, similar to all routing protocols, is disabled. You must configure at least one interface for Layer 3 before enabling OSPFv2 globally. If implementing multi-process OSPF, create an equal number of Layer 3 enabled interfaces and OSPF process IDs. For example, if you create four OSPFv2 process IDs, you must have four interfaces with Layer 3 enabled. 1. Assign an IP address to an interface.
SPF schedule delay 5 secs, Hold time between two SPFs 10 secs Number of area in this router is 0, normal 0 stub 0 nssa 0 DellEMC# Assigning an OSPFv2 Area After you enable OSPFv2, assign the interface to an OSPF area. Set up OSPF areas and enable OSPFv2 on an interface with the network command. You must have at least one AS area: Area 0. This is the backbone area. If your OSPF network contains more than one area, configure a backbone area (Area ID 0.0.0.0).
Example of Viewing Active Interfaces and Assigned Areas DellEMC>show ip ospf 1 interface twentyFiveGigE 1/17 is up, line protocol is up Internet Address 10.2.2.1/24, Area 0.0.0.0 Process ID 1, Router ID 11.1.2.1, Network Type BROADCAST, Cost: 1 Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State DR, Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 11.1.2.1, Interface address 10.2.2.1 Backup Designated Router (ID) 0.0.0.0, Interface address 0.0.0.
3. Enter ROUTER OSPF mode. CONFIGURATION mode router ospf process-id [vrf] Process ID is the ID assigned when configuring OSPFv2 globally. 4. Configure the area as a stub area. CONFIG-ROUTER-OSPF-id mode area area-id stub [no-summary] Use the keywords no-summary to prevent transmission into the area of summary ASBR LSAs. Area ID is the number or IP address assigned when creating the area.
Designated Router (ID) 10.1.2.100, Interface address 0.0.0.0 Backup Designated Router (ID) 0.0.0.0, Interface address 0.0.0.0 Timer intervals configured, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 40, Retransmit 5 Hello due in 13:39:46 Neighbor Count is 0, Adjacent neighbor count is 0 twentyFiveGigE 1/2 is up, line protocol is down Internet Address 10.1.3.100/24, Area 2.2.2.2 Process ID 34, Router ID 10.1.2.100, Network Type BROADCAST, Cost: 10 Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State DR, Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 10.1.2.
Convergence Level 0 Min LSA origination 5 secs, Min LSA arrival 1 secs Number of area in this router is 0, normal 0 stub 0 nssa 0 DellEMC# Changing OSPFv2 Parameters on Interfaces In Dell EMC Networking OS, you can modify the OSPF settings on the interfaces. Some interface parameter values must be consistent across all interfaces to avoid routing errors. For example, set the same time interval for the hello packets on all routers in the OSPF network to prevent misconfiguration of OSPF neighbors.
The transmit delay must be the same on all routers in the OSPF network. To view interface configurations, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION INTERFACE mode. To view interface status in the OSPF process, use the show ip ospf interface command in EXEC mode. The bold lines in the example show the change on the interface. The change is reflected in the OSPF configuration. DellEMC(conf-if)#ip ospf cost 45 DellEMC(conf-if)#show config ! interface TwentyfiveGigE 1/1 ip address 10.1.2.100 255.255.255.
To enable and configure OSPFv2 graceful restart, use the following commands. 1. Enable OSPFv2 graceful-restart globally and set the grace period. CONFIG-ROUTEROSPF- id mode graceful-restart grace-period seconds The seconds range is from 40 and 3000. This setting is the time that an OSPFv2 router’s neighbors advertises it as fully adjacent, regardless of the synchronization state, during a graceful restart. OSPFv2 terminates this process when the grace period ends. 2.
ip prefix-list prefix-name You are in PREFIX LIST mode. ● Create a prefix list with a sequence number and a deny or permit action. CONFIG- PREFIX LIST mode seq sequence-number {deny |permit} ip-prefix [ge min-prefix-length] [le max-prefixlength] The optional parameters are: ○ ge min-prefix-length: is the minimum prefix length to match (from 0 to 32). ○ le max-prefix-length: is the maximum prefix length to match (from 0 to 32).
Troubleshooting OSPFv2 Use the information in this section to troubleshoot OSPFv2 operation on the switch. Be sure to check the following, as these questions represent typical issues that interrupt an OSPFv2 process. NOTE: The following tasks are not a comprehensive; they provide some examples of typical troubleshooting checks.
default-information originate always router-id 10.10.10.10 DellEMC# Sample Configurations for OSPFv2 The following configurations are examples for enabling OSPFv2. These examples are not comprehensive directions. They are intended to give you some guidance with typical configurations. You can copy and paste from these examples to your CLI. To support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on, be sure that you make the necessary changes.
network 10.0.13.0/24 area 0 network 10.0.23.0/24 area 0 ! interface Loopback 30 ip address 192.168.100.100/24 no shutdown ! interface TwentyfiveGigE 1/1 ip address 10.1.13.3/24 no shutdown ! interface TwentyfiveGigE 1/2 ip address 10.2.13.3/24 no shutdown OSPF Area 0 — Tw 2/1 and 2/2 router ospf 22222 network 192.168.100.0/24 area 0 network 10.2.21.0/24 area 0 network 10.2.22.0/24 area 0 ! interface Loopback 20 ip address 192.168.100.20/24 no shutdown ! interface TwentyfiveGigE 2/1 ip address 10.2.21.
Example DellEMC#conf DellEMC(conf)#ipv6 router ospf 1 DellEMC(conf-ipv6-router_ospf)#timer spf 2 5 msec DellEMC(conf-ipv6-router_ospf)# DellEMC(conf-ipv6-router_ospf)#show config ! ipv6 router ospf 1 timers spf 2 5 msec DellEMC(conf-ipv6-router_ospf)# DellEMC(conf-ipv6-router_ospf)#end DellEMC# Enabling IPv6 Unicast Routing To enable IPv6 unicast routing, use the following command. ● Enable IPv6 unicast routing globally.
CONFIGURATION mode ipv6 router ospf {process ID} The range is from 0 to 65535. ● Assign the router ID for this OSPFv3 process. CONF-IPV6-ROUTER-OSPF mode router-id {number} ○ number: the IPv4 address. The format is A.B.C.D. NOTE: Enter the router-id for an OSPFv3 router as an IPv4 IP address. ● Disable OSPF. CONFIGURATION mode no ipv6 router ospf process-id ● Reset the OSPFv3 process.
Configuring Passive-Interface To suppress the interface’s participation on an OSPFv3 interface, use the following command. This command stops the router from sending updates on that interface. ● Specify whether some or all some of the interfaces are passive. CONF-IPV6-ROUTER-OSPF mode passive-interface {interface-type} Interface: identifies the specific interface that is passive. ○ For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information.
Applying cost for OSPFv3 Change in bandwidth directly affects the cost of OSPF routes. ● Explicitly specify the cost of sending a packet on an interface. INTERFACE mode ipv6 ospf interface-cost ○ interface-cost:The range is from 1 to 65535. Default cost is based on the bandwidth. ● Specify how the OSPF interface cost is calculated based on the reference bandwidth method. The cost of an interface is calculated as Reference Bandwidth/Interface speed.
The default is both planned and unplanned restarts trigger an OSPFv3 graceful restart. Selecting one or the other mode restricts OSPFv3 to the single selected mode. ● Disable OSPFv3 graceful-restart. CONF-IPV6-ROUTER-OSPF mode no graceful-restart grace-period Displaying Graceful Restart To display information on the use and configuration of OSPFv3 graceful restart, enter any of the following commands. ● Display the graceful-restart configuration for OSPFv2 and OSPFv3 (shown in the following example).
Inter Area Rtr LSA Count 0 Group Mem LSA Count 0 The following example shows the show ipv6 ospf database grace-lsa command. DellEMC#show ipv6 ospf database grace-lsa ! Type-11 Grace LSA (Area 0) LS Age Link State ID Advertising Router LS Seq Number Checksum Length Associated Interface Restart Interval Restart Reason : : : : : : : : : 10 6.16.192.66 100.1.1.
○ You can only enable one security protocol (AH or ESP) at a time on an interface or for an area. Enable IPsec AH with the ipv6 ospf authentication command; enable IPsec ESP with the ipv6 ospf encryption command. ○ The security policy configured for an area is inherited by default on all interfaces in the area. ○ The security policy configured on an interface overrides any area-level configured security for the area to which the interface is assigned.
no ipv6 ospf authentication null ● Display the configuration of IPsec authentication policies on the router. show crypto ipsec policy ● Display the security associations set up for OSPFv3 interfaces in authentication policies. show crypto ipsec sa ipv6 Configuring IPsec Encryption on an Interface To configure, remove, or display IPsec encryption on an interface, use the following commands.
If you have enabled IPSec encryption in an OSPFv3 area using the area encryption command, you cannot use the area authentication command in the area at the same time. The configuration of IPSec authentication on an interface-level takes precedence over an area-level configuration. If you remove an interface configuration, an area authentication policy that has been configured is applied to the interface. ● Enable IPSec authentication for OSPFv3 packets in an area.
○ key: specifies the text string used in authentication. All neighboring OSPFv3 routers must share key to exchange information. For MD5 authentication, the key must be 32 hex digits (non-encrypted) or 64 hex digits (encrypted). For SHA-1 authentication, the key must be 40 hex digits (non-encrypted) or 80 hex digits (encrypted). ○ key-authentication-type: (optional) specifies if the authentication key is encrypted. The valid values are 0 or 7. ● Remove an IPsec encryption policy from an OSPFv3 area.
Policy name : OSPFv3-0-501 Policy refcount : 1 Inbound ESP SPI : 501 (0x1F5) Outbound ESP SPI : 501 (0x1F5) Inbound ESP Auth Key : bbdd96e6eb4828e2e27bc3f9ff541e43faa759c9ef5706ba8ed8bb5efe91e97eb7c0c30808825fb5 Outbound ESP Auth Key : bbdd96e6eb4828e2e27bc3f9ff541e43faa759c9ef5706ba8ed8bb5efe91e97eb7c0c30808825fb5 Inbound ESP Cipher Key : bbdd96e6eb4828e2e27bc3f9ff541e43faa759c9ef5706ba10345a1039ba8f8a Outbound ESP Cipher Key : bbdd96e6eb4828e2e27bc3f9ff541e43faa759c9ef5706ba10345a1039ba8f8a Transform set
Troubleshooting OSPFv3 The system provides several tools to troubleshoot OSPFv3 operation on the switch. This section describes typical, OSPFv3 troubleshooting scenarios. NOTE: The following troubleshooting section is meant to be a comprehensive list, but only to provide some examples of typical troubleshooting checks.
MIB Support for OSPFv3 SNMPv3 context name support implements MIB views on multiple OSPV3 instances. Table 74. MIB Objects for OSPFv3 MIB Object OID Description ospfv3GeneralGroup 1.3.6.1.2.1.191.1.1 Contains a 32-bit unsigned integer uniquely identifying the router in the autonomous system. ospfv3AreaEntry 1.3.6.1.2.1.191.1.2.1 Contains information describing the parameter configuration and cumulative statistics of the router’s attached areas. ospfv3AsLsdbEntry 1.3.6.1.2.1.191.1.3.
35 Policy-based Routing (PBR) Policy-based routing (PBR) allows a switch to make routing decisions based on policies applied to an interface. Topics: • • • • Overview Implementing PBR Configuration Task List for Policy-based Routing Sample Configuration Overview When a router receives a packet, the router decides where to forward the packet based on the destination address in the packet, which is used to look up an entry in a routing table.
● ● ● ● Destination IP address and mask Source port Destination port TCP Flags After you apply a redirect-list to an interface, all traffic passing through it is subjected to the rules defined in the redirect-list. Traffic is forwarded based on the following: ● ● ● ● Next-hop addresses are verified. If the specified next hop is reachable, traffic is forwarded to the specified next-hop. If the specified next-hops are not reachable, the normal routing table is used to forward the traffic.
PBR Exceptions (Permit) To create an exception to a redirect list, use thepermit command. Exceptions are used when a forwarding decision should be based on the routing table rather than a routing policy. The Dell EMC Networking OS assigns the first available sequence number to a rule configured without a sequence number and inserts the rule into the PBR CAM region next to the existing entries. Because the order of rules is important, ensure that you configure any necessary sequence numbers.
● ● ● ● source ip-address or any or host ip-address is the Source’s IP address FORMAT: A.B.C.D/NN, or ANY or HOST IP address destination ip-address or any or host ip-address is the Destination’s IP address FORMAT: A.B.C.D/NN, or ANY or HOST IP address To delete a rule, use the no redirect command.
multiple seq redirect commands with the same source and destination address and specify a different next-hop IP address. In this way, the recursive routes are used as different forwarding routes for dynamic failover. If the primary path goes down and the recursive route is removed from the routing table, the seq redirect command is ignored and the next command in the list with a different route is used.
EXEC mode show ip redirect-list redirect-list-name 2. View the redirect list entries programmed in the CAM. EXEC mode show cam pbr show cam-usage List the redirect list configuration using the show ip redirect-list redirect-list-name command. The noncontiguous mask displays in dotted format (x.x.x.x). The contiguous mask displays in /x format. DellEMC#show ip redirect-list explicit_tunnel IP redirect-list explicit_tunnel: Defined as: seq 5 redirect tunnel 1 track 1 tcp 155.55.2.0/24 222.22.2.
00002 Fi 1/49/1 N/A 19 0x0 0 0 155.55.0.0/16 222.22.2.0/24 00:00:00:00:00:04 Tf 1/1 00003 Fi 1/49/1 N/A UDP 0x0 0 0 155.55.0.0/16 222.22.2.0/24 00:00:00:00:00:04 Tf 1/1 Sample Configuration You can use the following example configuration to set up a PBR. These are not comprehensive directions but are intended to give you a guidance with typical configurations. You can copy and paste from these examples to your CLI. Make the necessary changes to support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on.
seq 10 redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.2.0/24 any seq 15 permit ip any any Assign Redirect-List GOLD to Interface 2/11 EDGE_ROUTER(conf)#int tw 2/11 EDGE_ROUTER(conf-if-Tf-2/11)#ip add 192.168.3.
3 4 IP Host reachability IP Host reachability 42.1.1.2/32 43.1.1.2/32 Up Up 00:00:59 00:00:59 Apply the Redirect Rule to an Interface: DellEMC# DellEMC(conf)#int twentyFiveGigE 2/28 DellEMC(conf-if-tf-2/28)#ip redirect-group redirect_list_with_track DellEMC(conf-if-tf-2/28)#end Verify the Applied Redirect Rules: DellEMC#show ip redirect-list redirect_list_with_track IP redirect-list redirect_list_with_track Defined as: seq 5 redirect 42.1.1.2 track 3 tcp 155.55.2.0/24 222.22.2.
2 Interface ipv6 routing DellEMC# Tunnel 2 Up 00:00:00 Create a Redirect-list with Track Objects pertaining to Tunnel Interfaces: DellEMC#configure terminal DellEMC(conf)#ip redirect-list explicit_tunnel DellEMC(conf-redirect-list)#redirect tunnel 1 track DellEMC(conf-redirect-list)#redirect tunnel 1 track DellEMC(conf-redirect-list)#redirect tunnel 1 track 144.144.144.
36 PIM Sparse-Mode (PIM-SM) Protocol-independent multicast sparse-mode (PIM-SM) is a multicast protocol that forwards multicast traffic to a subnet only after a request using a PIM Join message; this behavior is the opposite of PIM-Dense mode, which forwards multicast traffic to all subnets until a request to stop.
2. The last-hop DR sends a PIM Join message to the RP. All routers along the way, including the RP, create an (*,G) entry in their multicast routing table, and the interface on which the message was received becomes the outgoing interface associated with the (*,G) entry. This process constructs an RPT branch to the RP. 3. If a host on the same subnet as another multicast receiver sends an IGMP report for the same multicast group, the gateway takes no action.
CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-routing [vrf vrf-name] Related Configuration Tasks The following are related PIM-SM configuration tasks. ● ● ● ● Configuring S,G Expiry Timers Configuring a Static Rendezvous Point Configuring a Designated Router Creating Multicast Boundaries and Domains Enable PIM-SM You must enable PIM-SM on each participating interface. 1. Enable IPv4 multicast routing on the system. CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-routing [vrf vrf-name] 2. Enable PIM-Sparse mode.
(*, 192.1.2.1), uptime 00:29:36, expires 00:03:26, RP 10.87.2.6, flags: SCJ Incoming interface: twentyFiveGigE 1/12, RPF neighbor 10.87.3.5 Outgoing interface list: twentyFiveGigE 1/11 twentyFiveGigE 1/13 (10.87.31.5, 192.1.2.1), uptime 00:01:24, expires 00:02:26, flags: FT Incoming interface: twentyFiveGigE 1/10, RPF neighbor 0.0.0.
Following is an example of show ip pim rp mapping command output: DellEMC#show ip pim rp mapping PIM Group-to-RP Mappings Group(s): 224.0.0.0/4, Static RP: 165.87.50.5, v2 Configuring a Designated Router Multiple PIM-SM routers might be connected to a single local area network (LAN) segment. One of these routers is elected to act on behalf of directly connected hosts. This router is the designated router (DR). The DR is elected using hello messages.
0/0 pim-assert messages sent/received 0/0 register messages sent/received DellEMC# Creating Multicast Boundaries and Domains A PIM domain is a contiguous set of routers that all implement PIM and are configured to operate within a common boundary defined by PIM multicast border routers (PMBRs). PMBRs connect each PIM domain to the rest of the Internet. Create multicast boundaries and domains by filtering inbound and outbound bootstrap router (BSR) messages per interface.
ipv6 pim rp-candidate 3. Display IPv4 or IPv6 Bootstrap Router information. EXEC Privilege show ip pim bsr-router Example: DellEMC# show ip pim bsr-router PIMv2 Bootstrap information This system is the Bootstrap Router (v2) BSR address: 7.7.7.7 (?) BSR Priority: 0, Hash mask length: 30 Next bootstrap message in 00:00:08 This system is a candidate BSR Candidate BSR address: 7.7.7.
37 PIM Source-Specific Mode (PIM-SSM) PIM source-specific mode (PIM-SSM) is a multicast protocol that forwards multicast traffic from a single source to a subnet. In the other versions of protocol independent multicast (PIM), a receiver subscribes to a group only. The receiver receives traffic not just from the source in which it is interested but from all sources sending to that group.
Related Configuration Tasks ● Use PIM-SSM with IGMP Version 2 Hosts Enabling PIM-SSM To enable PIM-SSM, follow these steps. 1. Create an ACL that uses permit rules to specify what range of addresses should use SSM. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list standard name 2. Enter the ip pim ssm-range command and specify the ACL you created. CONFIGURATION mode ip pim ssm-range acl-name To display address ranges in the PIM-SSM range, use the show ip pim ssm-range command from EXEC Privilege mode.
Configuring PIM-SSM with IGMPv2 R1(conf)#do show run pim ! ip pim rp-address 10.11.12.2 group-address 224.0.0.0/4 ip pim ssm-range ssm R1(conf)#do show run acl ! ip access-list standard map seq 5 permit host 239.0.0.2 ! ip access-list standard ssm seq 5 permit host 239.0.0.2 R1(conf)#ip igmp ssm-map map 10.11.5.2 R1(conf)#do show ip igmp groups Total Number of Groups: 2 IGMP Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface Mode Uptime Expires 239.0.0.
1. C-BSRs flood their candidacy throughout the domain in a BSM. Each message contains a BSR priority value, and the C-BSR with the highest priority value becomes the BSR. 2. Each C-RP unicasts periodic Candidate-RP-Advertisements to the BSR. Each message contains an RP priority value and the group ranges for which it is a C-RP. 3. The BSR collects the most efficient group-to-RP mappings and periodically updates it to all PIM routes in the network. 4.
Enabling RP to Server Specific Multicast Groups When you configure an RP candidate, its advertisement is sent to the entire multicast address range and the group-to-RP mapping is advertised for the entire range of multicast address. Starting with Dell EMC Networking OS 9.11.0.0, you can configure an RP candidate for a specified range of multicast group address. The Configured multicast group ranges are used by the BSR protocol to advertise the candidate RPs in the bootstrap messages.
38 Port Monitoring Port monitoring (also referred to as mirroring ) allows you to monitor ingress and/or egress traffic on specified ports. The mirrored traffic can be sent to a port to which a network analyzer is connected to inspect or troubleshoot the traffic. Mirroring is used for monitoring Ingress or Egress or both Ingress and Egress traffic on a specific port(s). This mirrored traffic can be sent to a port where a network sniffer can connect and monitor the traffic.
Port Monitoring Port monitoring is supported on both physical and logical interfaces, such as VLAN and port-channel interfaces. The source port (MD) with monitored traffic and the destination ports (MG) to which an analyzer can be attached must be on the same switch. You can configure up to 128 source ports in a monitoring session. Only one destination port is supported in a monitoring session. The platform supports multiple source-destination statements in a single monitor session.
Figure 101. Port Monitoring Configurations Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: All monitored frames are tagged if the configured monitoring direction is egress (TX), regardless of whether the monitored port (MD) is a Layer 2 or Layer 3 port. If the MD port is a Layer 2 port, the frames are tagged with the VLAN ID of the VLAN to which the MD belongs. If the MD port is a Layer 3 port, the frames are tagged with VLAN ID 4095.
DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-0)#source po 10 dest twentyFiveGigE 1/2 dir rx DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-0)#do show monitor session SessID Source Destination Dir Mode Source IP Dest IP Rate Gre-Protocol FcMonitor ------ ------------------ ---- ----------------------------- --------0 Tf 1/1 Tf 1/2 rx Port 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 N/A N/A No 0 Po 10 Tf 1/2 rx Port 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.
Configuring Monitor Multicast Queue To configure monitor QoS multicast queue ID, use the following commands. 1. Configure monitor QoS multicast queue ID. CONFIGURATION mode monitor multicast-queue queue-id DellEMC(conf)#monitor multicast-queue 7 2. Verify information about monitor configurations.
EtherType, ICMP, and TCP packets. The ACL rule describes the traffic that you want to monitor, and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. Flow monitoring is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, standard and extended IPv6 ACLs, and standard and extended MAC ACLs.
monitor session session-id 2. Enable flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session. MONITOR SESSION mode flow-based enable 3. Specify the source and destination port and direction of traffic. MONITOR SESSION mode source source—port destination destination-port direction rx 4. Define IP access-list rules that include the monitor keyword. For port monitoring, Dell EMC Networking OS only considers traffic matching rules with the monitor keyword.
no disable DellEMC#show run acl ! ip access-list extended acl2 seq 10 permit tcp any 2.1.1.0/24 lt 140 count bytes monitor ! ip access-list extended acl3 seq 15 permit udp 4.1.1.0/24 any neq 150 count bytes monitor ! ip access-list extended acl4 seq 20 permit ip any any count bytes monitor DellEMC(conf)#do show ip access-lists in Extended Ingress IP access list acl3 seq 15 permit udp 4.1.1.
Figure 103. Remote Port Mirroring Configuring Remote Port Mirroring Remote port mirroring requires a source session (monitored ports on different source switches), a reserved tagged VLAN for transporting mirrored traffic (configured on source, intermediate, and destination switches), and a destination session (destination ports connected to analyzers on destination switches).
● Reserved Vlan cannot have untagged ports In the reserved L2 VLAN used for remote port mirroring: ● MAC address learning in the reserved VLAN is automatically disabled. ● The reserved VLAN for remote port mirroring can be automatically configured in intermediate switches by using GVRP. ● There is no restriction on the VLAN IDs used for the reserved remote-mirroring VLAN. Valid VLAN IDs are from 2 to 4094. The default VLAN ID is not supported.
monitor session 2 type rpm source fortyGigE 1/49/1 destination remote-vlan 300 direction rx source Port-channel 10 destination remote-vlan 300 direction rx no disable To display the currently configured source and destination sessions for remote port mirroring on a switch, enter the show monitor session command in EXEC Privilege mode.
VLAN INTERFACE mode tagged interface You can repeat this command to configure additional tagged ports for the VLAN. Configuring a source session Following are the steps for configuring a source session on a switch. You can configure the below steps on other source switches to configure additional source ports for this RPM session. 1. Configure a new RPM session and specifying type as rpm defined a RPM session. CONFIGURATION mode monitor session session-id type rpm The session-id needs to be unique. 2.
Configuration Example of Remote Port Mirroring This example provides a sample configuration of remote port mirroring (RPM) on a source switch, an intermediate switch, and a destination switch based on the following illustration. Figure 104.
Following is a sample configuration of RPM on an a destination switch.
Configuration Example of RPM for port-channel This example provides a sample configuration of remote port mirroring for the port-channel source interface. Configuring Remote Port Mirroring on source switch The below configuration example shows that the source is a source port-channel and the destination is the reserved VLAN (for example, remote-vlan 30).
● You can configure up to four ERPM source sessions on switch. ● Configure the system MTU to accommodate the increased size of the ERPM mirrored packet. ● The maximum number of source ports you can define in a session is 128. ● The system encapsulates the complete ingress or egress data under GRE header, IP header, and outer MAC header and sends it out at the next hop interface as pointed by the routing table.
SessID Source Destination Dir Protocol FcMonitor Status ------ ---------------- -------------- --------- ------0 Tf 1/9 remote-ip rx No Enabled 0 Po 1 remote-ip tx No Enabled 1 Vl 11 remote-ip rx No Enabled Mode Source IP Dest IP DSCP TTL ---- --------- -------- ---- --- Drop Rate Gre---- ---- Port 1.1.1.1 7.1.1.2 0 255 No 100 111 Port 1.1.1.1 7.1.1.2 0 255 No 100 111 Flow 5.1.1.1 3.1.1.
As seen in the above figure, the packets received/transmitted on Port A will be encapsulated with an IP/GRE header plus a new L2 header and sent to the destination ip address (Port D’s ip address) on the sniffer. The Header that gets attached to the packet is 38 bytes long. If the sniffer does not support IP interface, a destination switch will be needed to receive the encapsulated ERPM packet and locally mirror the whole packet to the Sniffer or a Linux Server.
The port monitoring or mirroring function when applied to VLT devices works as expected except with some restrictions. You can configure RPM or ERPM monitoring between two VLT peers. As VLT devices are seen as a single device in the network, when a fail over occurs, the source or destination port on one of the VLT peers becomes inactive causing the monitoring session to fail. As a result, Dell EMC Networking OS does not allow local Port mirroring based monitoring to be configured between VLT peers.
Table 76. RPM over VLT Scenarios (continued) Scenario RPM Restriction Recommended Solution The packet analyzer is connected to the VLT device through the orphan port.. Mirroring using Intermediate VLT device No restrictions apply — In this scenario, the VLT device acts as the intermediate device in remote mirroring. The TOR switch contains the source-RPM configurations that enable mirroring of the VLT lag (of the TOR switch) to any orphan port in the VLT device.
39 Private VLANs (PVLAN) The private VLAN (PVLAN) feature is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. For syntax details about the commands described in this chapter, refer to the Private VLANs commands chapter in the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Private VLANs extend the Dell EMC Networking OS security suite by providing Layer 2 isolation between ports within the same virtual local area network (VLAN).
● Community port — a port that belongs to a community VLAN and is allowed to communicate with other ports in the same community VLAN and with promiscuous ports. ● Host port — in the context of a private VLAN, is a port in a secondary VLAN: ○ The port must first be assigned that role in INTERFACE mode. ○ A port assigned the host role cannot be added to a regular VLAN. ● Isolated port — a port that, in Layer 2, can only communicate with promiscuous ports that are in the same PVLAN.
Configuration Task List The following sections contain the procedures that configure a private VLAN. ● ● ● ● Creating Creating Creating Creating PVLAN Ports a Primary VLAN a Community VLAN an Isolated VLAN Creating PVLAN ports PVLAN ports are ports that will be assigned to the PVLAN. 1. Access INTERFACE mode for the port that you want to assign to a PVLAN. CONFIGURATION mode interface interface 2. Enable the port. INTERFACE mode no shutdown 3. Set the port in Layer 2 mode. INTERFACE mode switchport 4.
interface vlan vlan-id 2. Enable the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode no shutdown 3. Set the PVLAN mode of the selected VLAN to primary. INTERFACE VLAN mode private-vlan mode primary 4. Map secondary VLANs to the selected primary VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode private-vlan mapping secondary-vlan vlan-list The list of secondary VLANs can be: ● Specified in comma-delimited (VLAN-ID,VLAN-ID) or hyphenated-range format (VLAN-ID-VLAN-ID). ● Specified with this command even before they have been created.
You can only add host (isolated) ports to the VLAN. Creating an Isolated VLAN An isolated VLAN is a secondary VLAN of a primary VLAN. An isolated VLAN port can only talk with the promiscuous ports in that primary VLAN. 1. Access INTERFACE VLAN mode for the VLAN that you want to make an isolated VLAN. CONFIGURATION mode interface vlan vlan-id 2. Enable the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode no shutdown 3. Set the PVLAN mode of the selected VLAN to isolated. INTERFACE VLAN mode private-vlan mode isolated 4.
Private VLAN Configuration Example The following example shows a private VLAN topology. Figure 106. Sample Private VLAN Topology The following configuration is based on the example diagram for the Z9500: ● Te 1/1 and Te 1/23 are configured as promiscuous ports, assigned to the primary VLAN, VLAN 4000. ● Te 1/25 is configured as a PVLAN trunk port, also assigned to the primary VLAN 4000. ● Te 1/24 and Te 1/47 are configured as host ports and assigned to the isolated VLAN, VLAN 4003.
● The S4810 ports would have the same intra-switch communication characteristics as described for the Z9500. ● For transmission between switches, tagged packets originating from host PVLAN ports in one secondary VLAN and destined for host PVLAN ports in the other switch travel through the promiscuous ports in the local VLAN 4000 and then through the trunk ports (1/25 in each switch). Inspecting the Private VLAN Configuration The standard methods of inspecting configurations also apply in PVLANs.
G - GVRP tagged, M - Vlan-stack NUM * 1 100 P 200 I 201 Status Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Description Q Ports primary VLAN in PVLAN T Tf 1/19-2 isolated VLAN in VLAN 200 T Tf 1/21 The following example shows viewing a private VLAN configuration.
40 Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) Per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+) is a variation of spanning tree — developed by a third party — that allows you to configure a separate spanning tree instance for each virtual local area network (VLAN).
Figure 107. Per-VLAN Spanning Tree The Dell EMC Networking OS supports three other variations of spanning tree, as shown in the following table. Table 77. Spanning Tree Variations Dell EMC Networking OS Supports Dell EMC Networking Term IEEE Specification Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 802 .1d Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) 802 .1w Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) 802 .
Configure Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus Configuring PVST+ is a four-step process. 1. 2. 3. 4. Configure interfaces for Layer 2. Place the interfaces in VLANs. Enable PVST+. Optionally, for load balancing, select a nondefault bridge-priority for a VLAN.
Influencing PVST+ Root Selection As shown in the previous per-VLAN spanning tree illustration, all VLANs use the same forwarding topology because R2 is elected the root, and all TenGigabitEthernet ports have the same cost. The following per-VLAN spanning tree illustration changes the bridge priority of each bridge so that a different forwarding topology is generated for each VLAN. This behavior demonstrates how you can use PVST+ to achieve load balancing. Figure 108.
Current root has priority 4096, Address 0001.e80d.b6d6 Number of topology changes 5, last change occurred 00:34:37 ago on Tf 1/32 Port 375 (twentyFiveGigE 1/22) is designated Forwarding Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.375 Designated root has priority 4096, address 0001.e80d.b6:d6 Designated bridge has priority 4096, address 0001.e80d.b6:d6 Designated port id is 128.
● Port priority — influences the likelihood that a port is selected to be a forwarding port in case that several ports have the same port cost. The following tables lists the default values for port cost by interface. Table 78.
CAUTION: Configure EdgePort only on links connecting to an end station. EdgePort can cause loops if you enable it on an interface connected to a network. To enable EdgePort on an interface, use the following command. ● Enable EdgePort on an interface. INTERFACE mode spanning-tree pvst edge-port [bpduguard | shutdown-on-violation] The EdgePort status of each interface is given in the output of the show spanning-tree pvst command, as previously shown.
Figure 109. PVST+ with Extend System ID ● Augment the bridge ID with the VLAN ID. PROTOCOL PVST mode extend system-id DellEMC(conf-pvst)#do show spanning-tree pvst vlan 5 brief VLAN 5 Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 32773, Address 0001.e832.73f7 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge ID Priority 32773 (priority 32768 sys-id-ext 5), Address 0001.e832.
no shutdown ! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged twentyFiveGigE 1/22,1/32 no shutdown ! protocol spanning-tree pvst no disable vlan 100 bridge-priority 4096 Example of PVST+ Configuration (R2) interface TwentyfiveGigE 2/12 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TwentyfiveGigE 2/32 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged TwentyfiveGigE 2/12,2/32 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip address tagged TwentyfiveGigE 2/12,2/32 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 300
41 Quality of Service (QoS) This chapter describes how to use and configure Quality of Service service (QoS) features on the switch. Differentiated service is accomplished by classifying and queuing traffic, and assigning priorities to those queues. Table 79.
Table 79. Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) Support for Port-Based, Policy-Based Features (continued) Feature Direction Create Output Policy Maps Egress Specify an Aggregate QoS Policy Egress Create Output Policy Maps Egress Enabling QoS Rate Adjustment Enabling Strict-Priority Queueing Weighted Random Early Detection Egress Create WRED Profiles Egress Figure 110.
• • • • • • Configuring Policy-Based Rate Shaping Configuring Weights and ECN for WRED Configuring WRED and ECN Attributes Guidelines for Configuring ECN for Classifying and Color-Marking Packets Applying Layer 2 Match Criteria on a Layer 3 Interface Enabling Buffer Statistics Tracking Implementation Information The Dell EMC Networking QoS implementation complies with IEEE 802.1p User Priority Bits for QoS Indication.
DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/1)#switchport DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/1)#dot1p-priority 1 DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/1)#end Honoring dot1p Priorities on Ingress Traffic By default, Dell EMC Networking OS does not honor dot1p priorities on ingress traffic. You can configure this feature on physical interfaces and port-channels, but you cannot configure it on individual interfaces in a port channel. You can configure service-class dynamic dot1p from CONFIGURATION mode, which applies the configuration to all interfaces.
Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: Rate shaping is effectively rate limiting because of its smaller buffer size. Rate shaping on tagged ports is slightly greater than the configured rate and rate shaping on untagged ports is slightly less than configured rate. Rate shaping buffers, rather than drops, traffic exceeding the specified rate until the buffer is exhausted. If any stream exceeds the configured bandwidth on a continuous basis, it can consume all of the buffer space that is allocated to the port.
Classify Traffic Class maps differentiate traffic so that you can apply separate quality of service policies to different types of traffic. For both class maps, Layer 2 and Layer 3, Dell EMC Networking OS matches packets against match criteria in the order that you configure them. Creating a Layer 3 Class Map A Layer 3 class map differentiates ingress packets based on the DSCP value or IP precedence, and characteristics defined in an IP ACL.
The following example matches the IPv4 and IPv6 traffic with a precedence value of 3: DellEMC(conf)# class-map match-any test1 DellEMC(conf-class-map)#match ip-any precedence 3 Creating a Layer 2 Class Map All class maps are Layer 3 by default; however, you can create a Layer 2 class map by specifying the layer2 option with the class-map command. A Layer 2 class map differentiates traffic according to 802.1p value and/or VLAN and/or characteristics defined in a MAC ACL..
EXEC Privilege mode show qos class-map The following example shows incorrect traffic classifications.
○ SYN ○ PSH ○ RST ○ URG In the existing software, ECE/CWR TCP flag qualifiers are not supported. ● Because this functionality forcibly marks all the packets matching the specific match criteria as ‘yellow’, Dell EMC Networking OS does not support Policer based coloring and this feature concurrently.
Configuring Policy-Based Rate Policing To configure policy-based rate policing, use the following command. ● Configure rate police ingress traffic. QOS-POLICY-IN mode rate-police Setting a dot1p Value for Egress Packets To set a dot1p value for egress packets, use the following command. ● Set a dscp or dot1p value for egress packets.
Table 81. Default Bandwidth Weights (continued) Queue Default Bandwidth Percentage for 4– Default Bandwidth Percentage for 8– Queue System Queue System 2 26.67% 3% 3 53.33% 4% 4 - 5% 5 - 10% 6 - 25% 7 - 50% NOTE: The system supports data queues. When you assign a percentage to one queue, note that this change also affects the amount of bandwidth that is allocated to other queues.
● Each color map can only have one list of DSCP values for each color; any DSCP values previously listed for that color that are not in the new DSCP list are colored green. ● If you configured a DSCP color map on an interface that does not exist or you delete a DSCP color map that is configured on an interface, that interface uses an all green color policy. To create a DSCP color map: 1. Create the color-aware map QoS DSCP color map. CONFIGURATION mode qos dscp-color-map color-map-name 2.
Examples for Displaying a DSCP Color Policy Display summary information about a color policy for one or more interfaces. DellEMC# show Interface Tf 1/10 Tf 1/11 qos dscp-color-policy summary dscp-color-map mapONE mapTWO Display summary information about a color policy for a specific interface.
Honoring DSCP Values on Ingress Packets Dell EMC Networking OS provides the ability to honor DSCP values on ingress packets using Trust DSCP feature. The following table lists the standard DSCP definitions and indicates to which queues Dell EMC Networking OS maps DSCP values. When you configure trust DSCP, the matched packets and matched bytes counters are not incremented in the show qos statistics. Table 82.
Mapping dot1p Values to Service Queues All traffic is by default mapped to the same queue, Queue 0. If you honor dot1p on ingress, you can create service classes based the queueing strategy in Honoring dot1p Values on Ingress Packets. You may apply this queuing strategy globally by entering the following command from CONFIGURATION mode. ● All dot1p traffic is mapped to Queue 0 unless you enable service-class dynamic dot1p on an interface or globally.
service-queue Specifying an Aggregate QoS Policy To specify an aggregate QoS policy, use the following command. ● Specify an aggregate QoS policy. POLICY-MAP-OUT mode policy-aggregate Applying an Output Policy Map to an Interface To apply an output policy map to an interface, use the following command. ● Apply an input policy map to an interface. INTERFACE mode service-policy output You can apply the same policy map to multiple interfaces, and you can modify a policy map after you apply it.
service-policy output policy-map-name Enter the name for the policy map in character format (32 characters maximum). Queue Classification Requirements for PFC Functionality Queue classification requirements for PFC functionality are mentioned below: ● On untagged ports, Queue classification must be based on DSCP. ● On tagged ports, Queue classification must be based on Dot1p. Layer 3 classification configurations should not be present on the port.
You will also be able to mark both DSCP and Dot1p in the L3 Input Qos Policy: DellEMC(conf)#qos-policy-input qos-input DellEMC(conf-qos-policy-in)#set mac-dot1p 2 DellEMC(conf-qos-policy-in)#set ip-dscp 5 DellEMC(conf-qos-policy-in)# Weighted Random Early Detection Weighted random early detection (WRED) is a congestion avoidance mechanism that drops packets to prevent buffering resources from being consumed.
no wred enable NOTE: If you disable WRED globally, the system accepts any WRED profile you apply to traffic. But the changes do not take effect until you enable WRED globally. Creating WRED Profiles To create WRED profiles, use the following commands. 1. Create a WRED profile. CONFIGURATION mode wred-profile 2. Specify the minimum and maximum threshold values.
DellEMC# DellEMC#show qos statistics wred-profile Interface Tf 1/1 Drop-statistic Dropped Pkts Green Yellow Out of Profile 51623 51300 0 DellEMC# Displaying egress–queue Statistics To display the number of transmitted and dropped packets and their rate on the egress queues of an interface, use the following command: ● Display the number of packets and number of bytes on the egress-queue profile.
available. In this case, the system writes as many entries as possible, and then generates an CAM-full error message (shown in the following example). The partial policy-map configuration might cause unintentional system behavior.
In releases of Dell EMC Networking OS earlier than Release 9.3(0.0), you can configure only the maximum shaping attributes, such as the peak rate and the peak burst settings. You can now specify the committed or minimum burst and committed rate attributes. The committed burst and committed rate values can be defined either in bytes or pps. You can use the rate-shape pps peak-rate burst-packets command in the QoS Policy Out Configuration mode to configure the peak rate and burst size as a measure of pps.
Using ECN, the packets are marked for transmission at a later time after the network recovers from the heavy traffic state to an optimal load. In this manner, enhanced performance and throughput are achieved. Also, the devices can respond to congestion before a queue overflows and packets are dropped, enabling improved queue management. When a packet reaches the device with ECN enabled for WRED, the average queue size is computed. To measure the average queue size, a weight factor is used.
Table 84. Scenarios of WRED and ECN Configuration (continued) Queue Configuration Service-Pool Configuration WRED Threshold Relationship Expected Functionality Q threshold = Q-T, Service pool threshold = SP-T 1 1 0 X X Queue-based ECN marking above queue threshold. 1 X Q-T < SP-T ECN marking to shared buffer limits of the service-pool and then packets are tail dropped. SP-T < Q-T Same as above but ECN marking starts above SP-T.
○ FIN ○ SYN ○ PSH ○ RST ○ URG In the existing software, ECE/CWR TCP flag qualifiers are not supported. ● Because this functionality forcibly marks all the packets matching the specific match criteria as ‘yellow’, Dell EMC Networking OS does not support Policer based coloring and this feature concurrently.
Policy based ingress QOS involves the following three steps to achieve QOS: 1. Classification of incoming traffic. 2. Specify the differentiated actions for different traffic class. 3. Attach the policy-map to the interface. Dell EMC Networking OS support different types of match qualifiers to classify the incoming traffic. Match qualifiers can be directly configured in the class-map command or it can be specified through one or more ACL which in turn specifies the combination of match qualifiers.
● set the packet color as ‘yellow’ ● set the packet color as ‘yellow’ and set a new DSCP for the packet This marking action to set the color of the packet is allowed only on the ‘match-any’ logical operator of the class-map.
seq 5 permit any dscp 50 ecn 0 ! ip access-list standard dscp_40_non_ecn seq 5 permit any dscp 40 ecn 0 ! class-map match-any class_dscp_40 match ip access-group dscp_40_non_ecn set-color yellow match ip access-group dscp_40_ecn ! class-map match-any class_dscp_50 match ip access-group dscp_50_non_ecn set-color yellow match ip access-group dscp_50_ecn ! policy-map-input pmap_dscp_40_50 service-queue 2 class-map class_dscp_40 service-queue 3 class-map class_dscp_50 Applying Layer 2 Match Criteria on a Layer
important in deployments that experience congestion frequently. The receive buffer must be large enough to save all data that is received when the system processes a PFC PAUSE frame. You can use the service-class buffer shared-threshold-weight queue0 ... queue7 number command in Interface Configuration mode to specify the threshold weight for the shared buffer for each of the queues per port. 1. Create a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface. DellEMC(conf)#interface twentyfiveGigE 1/1 2.
MCAST MCAST MCAST 708 6 7 8 0 0 0 Quality of Service (QoS)
42 Routing Information Protocol (RIP) The Routing Information Protocol (RIP) tracks distances or hop counts to nearby routers when establishing network connections and is based on a distance-vector algorithm. RIP is based on a distance-vector algorithm; it tracks distances or hop counts to nearby routers when establishing network connections. RIP protocol standards are listed in the Standards Compliance chapter.
Table 85. RIP Defaults Feature Default Interfaces running RIP ● Listen to RIPv1 and RIPv2 ● Transmit RIPv1 RIP timers ● ● ● ● Auto summarization Enabled ECMP paths supported 16 update timer = 30 seconds invalid timer = 180 seconds holddown timer = 180 seconds flush timer = 240 seconds Configuration Information By default, RIP is disabled in Dell EMC Networking OS. To configure RIP, you must use commands in two modes: ROUTER RIP and INTERFACE.
To view the global RIP configuration, use the show running-config command in EXEC mode or the show config command in ROUTER RIP mode. DellEMC(conf-router_rip)#show config ! router rip network 10.0.0.0 DellEMC(conf-router_rip)# When the RIP process has learned the RIP routes, use the show ip rip database command in EXEC mode to view those routes. DellEMC#show ip rip database Total number of routes in RIP database: 978 160.160.0.0/16 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:00:26, Tf 1/4 160.160.0.0/16 auto-summary 2.0.0.
31.0.0.0/8 auto-summary 192.162.2.0/24 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:01:21, Fa 1/49 192.162.2.0/24 auto-summary 192.161.1.0/24 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:00:27, Fa 1/49 192.161.1.0/24 auto-summary 192.162.3.0/24 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:01:22, Fa 1/49 192.162.3.0/24 auto-summary To disable RIP globally, use the no router rip command in CONFIGURATION mode. Configure RIP on Interfaces When you enable RIP globally on the system, interfaces meeting certain conditions start receiving RIP routes.
Adding RIP Routes from Other Instances In addition to filtering routes, you can add routes from other routing instances or protocols to the RIP process. With the redistribute command, you can include open shortest path first (OSPF), static, or directly connected routes in the RIP process. To add routes from other routing instances or protocols, use the following commands. ● Include directly connected or user-configured (static) routes in RIP.
The following example of the show ip protocols command confirms that both versions are sent out that interface. This interface no longer sends and receives the same RIP versions as Dell EMC Networking OS does globally (shown in bold).
Controlling Route Metrics As a distance-vector protocol, RIP uses hop counts to determine the best route, but sometimes the shortest hop count is a route over the lowest-speed link. To manipulate RIP routes so that the routing protocol prefers a different route, manipulate the route by using the offset command. Exercise caution when applying an offset command to routers on a broadcast network, as the router using the offset command is modifying RIP advertisements before sending out those advertisements.
● RIP Configuration on Core 3 ● Core 3 RIP Output ● RIP Configuration Summary Figure 113. RIP Topology Example RIP Configuration on Core2 The following example shows how to configure RIPv2 on a host named Core2. Core2(conf-if-tf-1/1)# Core2(conf-if-tf-1/1)#router rip Core2(conf-router_rip)#ver 2 Core2(conf-router_rip)#network 10.200.10.0 Core2(conf-router_rip)#network 10.300.10.0 Core2(conf-router_rip)#network 10.11.10.0 Core2(conf-router_rip)#network 10.11.20.
The following example shows the show ip route command to show the RIP setup on Core 2.
! router rip network 10.0.0.0 network 192.168.1.0 network 192.168.2.0 version 2 Core3(conf-router_rip)# Core 3 RIP Output The examples in this section show the core 2 RIP output. ● To display Core 3 RIP database, use the show ip rip database command. ● To display Core 3 RIP setup, use the show ip route command. ● To display Core 3 RIP activity, use the show ip protocols command. The following example shows the show ip rip database command to view the learned RIP routes on Core 3.
Incoming filter for all interfaces is Default redistribution metric is 1 Default version control: receive version 2, send version 2 Interface Recv Send twentyFiveGigE 1/1 2 2 twentyFiveGigE 1/1 2 2 twentyFiveGigE 1/1 2 2 twentyFiveGigE 1/1 2 2 Routing for Networks: 10.11.20.0 10.11.30.0 192.168.2.0 192.168.1.0 Routing Information Sources: Gateway Distance Last Update 10.11.20.
! router rip version 2 network 10.11.20.0 network 10.11.30.0 network 192.168.1.0 network 192.168.2.
43 Remote Monitoring (RMON) RMON is an industry-standard implementation that monitors network traffic by sharing network monitoring information. RMON provides both 32-bit and 64-bit monitoring facility and long-term statistics collection on Dell EMC Networking Ethernet interfaces. RMON operates with the simple network management protocol (SNMP) and monitors all nodes on a local area network (LAN) segment. RMON monitors traffic passing through the router and segment traffic not destined for the router.
[no] rmon alarm number variable interval {delta | absolute} rising-threshold [value event-number] falling-threshold value event-number [owner string] OR [no] rmon hc-alarm number variable interval {delta | absolute} rising-threshold value event-number falling-threshold value event-number [owner string] Configure the alarm using the following optional parameters: ○ number: alarm number, an integer from 1 to 65,535, the value must be unique in the RMON Alarm Table.
this command. This configuration also generates an SNMP trap when the event is triggered using the SNMP community string “eventtrap”. DellEMC(conf)#rmon event 1 log trap eventtrap description “High ifOutErrors” owner nms1 Configuring RMON Collection Statistics To enable RMON MIB statistics collection on an interface, use the RMON collection statistics command in INTERFACE CONFIGURATION mode. ● Enable RMON MIB statistics collection.
44 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) is a Layer 2 protocol — specified by IEEE 802.1w — that is essentially the same as spanning-tree protocol (STP) but provides faster convergence and interoperability with switches configured with STP and multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP).
● ● ● ● ● ● Prevent Network Disruptions with BPDU Guard Influencing RSTP Root Selection Configuring Spanning Trees as Hitless Enabling SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes Configuring Fast Hellos for Link State Detection Flush MAC Addresses after a Topology Change Important Points to Remember ● RSTP is disabled by default. ● Dell EMC Networking OS supports only one Rapid Spanning Tree (RST) instance.
To verify that an interface is in Layer 2 mode and enabled, use the show config command from INTERFACE mode. The bold lines indicate that the interface is in Layer 2 mode. DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/1)#show config ! interface twentyFiveGigE 1/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/1)# Enabling Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Globally Enable RSTP globally on all participating bridges; it is not enabled by default.
Figure 114. Rapid Spanning Tree Enabled Globally To view the interfaces participating in RSTP, use the show spanning-tree rstp command from EXEC privilege mode. If a physical interface is part of a port channel, only the port channel is listed in the command output. DellEMC#show spanning-tree rstp Root Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.cbb4 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15, max hops 0 Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.
The port is not in the Edge port mode Port 380 (twentyFiveGigE 1/4) is designated Forwarding Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.380 Designated root has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.cbb4 Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.cbb4 Designated port id is 128.
Table 87.
Modifying Interface Parameters On interfaces in Layer 2 mode, you can set the port cost and port priority values. ● Port cost — a value that is based on the interface type. The previous table lists the default values. The greater the port cost, the less likely the port is selected to be a forwarding port. ● Port priority — influences the likelihood that a port is selected to be a forwarding port in case that several ports have the same port cost.
Configuring an EdgePort The EdgePort feature enables interfaces to begin forwarding traffic approximately 30 seconds sooner. In this mode an interface forwards frames by default until it receives a BPDU that indicates that it should behave otherwise; it does not go through the Learning and Listening states. The bpduguard shutdown-on-violation option causes the interface hardware to be shut down when it receives a BPDU.
The range is from 50 to 950 milliseconds. DellEMC(conf-rstp)#do show spanning-tree rstp brief Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 0, Address 0001.e811.2233 Root Bridge hello time 50 ms, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge ID Priority 0, Address 0001.e811.2233 We are the root Configured hello time 50 ms, max age 20, forward delay 15 NOTE: The hello time is encoded in BPDUs in increments of 1/256ths of a second.
45 Software-Defined Networking (SDN) The Dell EMC Networking OS supports software-defined networking (SDN). For more information, see the SDN Deployment Guide.
46 Security This chapter describes several ways to provide security to the Dell EMC Networking system. For details about all the commands described in this chapter, refer to the Security chapter in the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Reference Guide.
CONFIGURATION mode aaa accounting {commands level | dot1x | exec | rest | suppress | system} {default | name} {start-stop | wait-start | stop-only} {radius | tacacs+} The variables are: ○ system: sends accounting information of any other AAA configuration. ○ exec: sends accounting information when a user has logged in to EXEC mode. ○ dot1x: sends accounting information when a dot1x user has logged in to EXEC mode. ○ command level: sends accounting of commands executed at the specified privilege level.
accounting exec execAcct DellEMC(config-line-vty)# accounting commands 15 com15 DellEMC(config-line-vty)# accounting exec execAcct Monitoring AAA Accounting Dell EMC Networking OS does not support periodic interim accounting because the periodic command can cause heavy congestion when many users are logged in to the network. No specific show command exists for TACACS+ accounting. To obtain accounting records displaying information about users currently logged in, use the following command.
EAP START accounting record: Fri May 10 12:20:43 2019 NAS-IP-Address = 10.16.133.
Acct-Multi-Session-Id = "00-11-22-33-44-55-00-11-33-44-77-88-5e-50-d6-5cc" Acct-Link-Count = 1 Acct-Terminate-Cause = Lost-Carrier Acct-Status-Type = Stop Event-Timestamp = "May 10 2019 23:30:42 CDT" Tmp-String-9 = "ai:" Acct-Unique-Session-Id = "5a761462ef63b815707de5fa1c5ef348" Timestamp = 1557549042 RADIUS Accounting attributes The following tables describe the various types of attributes that identify the supplicant sessions: Table 88.
Table 89. RADIUS Accounting Stop Record Attributes for CLI user (continued) RADIUS Attribute code RADIUS Attribute Description VIRTUAL - for telnet/SSH session. Table 90. Use cases for CLI user to trigger RADIUS Accounting Start/Stop records CLI event Accounting type Attributes CLI user authentication success Start Start record attributes for CLI user. CLI user log-off Stop Stop record attributes with termination cause as User Request (1).
Table 92. RADIUS Accounting Stop Record Attributes for dot1x supplicant (continued) RADIUS Attribute code RADIUS Attribute Description 1 User-Name User name/ Supplicant MAC Address (for MAB). 5 NAS-Port Port on which session is terminated. 6 Service-Type Framed (2) for EAP /Call check (10) for MAB. 8 Framed-IP-Address IPv4 address of supplicant. 168 Framed-IPV6-Address IPv6 address of supplicant. 30 Called-Station-Id Switch MAC Address. 31 Calling-Station-Id Supplicant MAC Address.
Table 93. Use cases for dot1x supplicant to trigger RADIUS Accounting Start/Stop records (continued) dot1x event Accounting type Attributes Configure max supplicant per interface Stop Stop record attributes with termination cause as port-reinitialized (21). Supplicant goes off without explicitly sending EAP logoff Stop Stop record attributes with termination cause as Idle Timeout (4). Periodic Reauth of supplicant Stop Stop record attributes with termination cause as Supplicant restart (19).
Configuring AAA Authentication Login Methods To configure an authentication method and method list, use the following commands. Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: If you use a method list on the console port in which RADIUS or TACACS is the last authentication method, and the server is not reachable, Dell EMC Networking OS allows access even though the username and password credentials cannot be verified.
CONFIGURATION mode aaa authentication enable default radius tacacs 2. Establish a host address and password. CONFIGURATION mode radius-server host x.x.x.x key some-password 3. Establish a host address and password. CONFIGURATION mode tacacs-server host x.x.x.x key some-password To get enable authentication from the RADIUS server and use TACACS as a backup, issue the following commands. The following example shows enabling authentication from the RADIUS server.
Example: DellEMC(config)#aaa authentication login vty_auth_list radius Force all logged-in users to re-authenticate (y/n)? 3. You are prompted to force the users to re-authenticate whenever there is a change in the RADIUS server list.. CONFIGURATION mode radius-server host IP Address Example: DellEMC(config)#radius-server host 192.100.0.12 Force all logged-in users to re-authenticate (y/n)? DellEMC(config)#no radius-server host 192.100.0.
● Privilege level 1 — is the default level for EXEC mode. At this level, you can interact with the router, for example, view some show commands and Telnet and ping to test connectivity, but you cannot configure the router. This level is often called the “user” level. One of the commands available in Privilege level 1 is the enable command, which you can use to enter a specific privilege level. ● Privilege level 0 — contains only the end, enable, and disable commands.
Configuring the Enable Password Command To configure Dell EMC Networking OS, use the enable command to enter EXEC Privilege level 15. After entering the command, Dell EMC Networking OS requests that you enter a password. Privilege levels are not assigned to passwords, rather passwords are assigned to a privilege level. You can always change a password for any privilege level. To change to a different privilege level, enter the enable command, then the privilege level.
3. Configure level and commands for a mode or reset a command’s level. CONFIGURATION mode privilege mode {level level command | reset command} Configure the following required and optional parameters: ● mode: enter a keyword for the modes (exec, configure, interface, line, route-map, or router) ● level level: the range is from 0 to 15. Levels 0, 1, and 15 are pre-configured. Levels 2 to 14 are available for custom configuration. ● command: an Dell EMC Networking OS CLI keyword (up to five keywords allowed).
snmp-server Modify SNMP parameters DellEMC(conf)# Specifying LINE Mode Password and Privilege You can specify a password authentication of all users on different terminal lines. The user’s privilege level is the same as the privilege level assigned to the terminal line, unless a more specific privilege level is assigned to the user. To specify a password for the terminal line, use the following commands. ● Configure a custom privilege level for the terminal lines.
RADIUS Authentication Dell EMC Networking OS supports RADIUS for user authentication (text password) at login and can be specified as one of the login authentication methods in the aaa authentication login command. When configuring AAA authorization, you can configure to limit the attributes of services available to a user. When you enable authorization, the network access server uses configuration information from the user profile to issue the user's session.
Configuration Task List for RADIUS To authenticate users using RADIUS, you must specify at least one RADIUS server so that the system can communicate with and configure RADIUS as one of your authentication methods. The following list includes the configuration tasks for RADIUS.
Specifying a RADIUS Server Host When configuring a RADIUS server host, you can set different communication parameters, such as the UDP port, the key password, the number of retries, and the timeout. To specify a RADIUS server host and configure its communication parameters, use the following command. ● Enter the host name or IP address of the RADIUS server host.
To view the configuration of RADIUS communication parameters, use the show running-config command in EXEC Privilege mode. Monitoring RADIUS To view information on RADIUS transactions, use the following command. ● View RADIUS transactions to troubleshoot problems. EXEC Privilege mode debug radius Microsoft Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol Support for RADIUS Authentication Dell EMC Networking OS supports Microsoft Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (MS-CHAPv2) with RADIUS authentication.
TACACS+ Dell EMC Networking OS supports terminal access controller access control system (TACACS+ client, including support for login authentication. Configuration Task List for TACACS+ The following list includes the configuration task for TACACS+ functions.
! aaa authentication enable default tacacs+ enable aaa authentication enable LOCAL enable tacacs+ aaa authentication login default tacacs+ local aaa authentication login LOCAL local tacacs+ aaa authorization exec default tacacs+ none aaa authorization commands 1 default tacacs+ none aaa authorization commands 15 default tacacs+ none aaa accounting exec default start-stop tacacs+ aaa accounting commands 1 default start-stop tacacs+ aaa accounting commands 15 default start-stop tacacs+ DellEMC(conf)# DellEMC(
Specifying a TACACS+ Server Host To specify a TACACS+ server host and configure its communication parameters, use the following command. ● Enter the host name or IP address of the TACACS+ server host. CONFIGURATION mode tacacs-server host {hostname | ip-address} [port port-number] [timeout seconds] [key key] Configure the optional communication parameters for the specific host: ○ port port-number: the range is from 0 to 65535. Enter a TCP port number. The default is 49.
Enabling SCP and SSH Secure shell (SSH) is a protocol for secure remote login and other secure network services over an insecure network. Dell EMC Networking OS is compatible with SSH versions 2, in both the client and server modes. SSH sessions are encrypted and use authentication. SSH is enabled by default. For details about the command syntax, refer to the Security chapter in the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Interface Reference Guide.
CONFIGURATION MODE copy scp: flash: 4. On Switch 2, in response to prompts, enter the path to the desired file and enter the port number specified in Step 1. EXEC Privilege Mode 5. On the chassis, invoke SCP. CONFIGURATION mode copy scp: flash: The following example shows the use of SCP and SSH to copy a software image from one switch running SSH server on UDP port 99 to the local switch. Other SSH related command include: ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● crypto key generate : generate keys for the SSH server.
● rekey-interval: time-based rekey threshold for an SSH session. The range is from 10 to 1440 minutes. The default is 60 minutes. ● rekey-limit: volume-based rekey threshold for an SSH session. The range is from 1 to 4096 to megabytes. The default is 1024 megabytes. Examples The following example configures the time-based rekey threshold for an SSH session to 30 minutes. DellEMC(conf)#ip ssh rekey time 30 The following example configures the volume-based rekey threshold for an SSH session to 4096 megabytes.
● hmac-sha2-256 ● hmac-sha1 ● hmac-sha1-96 ● hmac-md5 ● hmac-md5-96 When FIPS is enabled, the default HMAC algorithm is hmac-sha2-256,hmac-sha1,hmac-sha1-96. Example of Configuring a HMAC Algorithm The following example shows you how to configure a HMAC algorithm list. DellEMC(conf)# ip ssh server mac hmac-sha1-96 Configuring the HMAC Algorithm for the SSH Client To configure the HMAC algorithm for the SSH client, use the ip ssh mac hmac-algorithm command in CONFIGURATION mode.
● aes256-cbc ● aes128-ctr ● aes192-ctr ● aes256-ctr The default cipher list is aes256-ctr, aes256-cbc, aes192-ctr, aes192-cbc, aes128-ctr, aes128-cbc, 3des-cbc. Example of Configuring a Cipher List The following example shows you how to configure a cipher list. DellEMC(conf)#ip ssh server cipher 3des-cbc aes128-cbc aes128-ctr Configuring the SSH Client Cipher List To configure the cipher list supported by the SSH client, use the ip ssh cipher cipher-list command in CONFIGURATION mode.
SSH server : enabled. SSH server version : v2. SSH server vrf : default. SSH server ciphers : 3des-cbc,aes128-cbc,aes192-cbc,aes256-cbc,aes128-ctr,aes192ctr,aes256-ctr. SSH server macs : hmac-md5,hmac-md5-96,hmac-sha1,hmac-sha1-96,hmacsha2-256,hmac-sha2-256-96. SSH server kex algorithms : diffie-hellman-group-exchange-sha1,diffie-hellman-group1sha1,diffie-hellman-group14-sha1. Password Authentication : enabled. Hostbased Authentication : disabled. RSA Authentication : disabled.
4. Copy the file shosts and rhosts to the Dell EMC Networking system. 5. Disable password authentication and RSA authentication, if configured CONFIGURATION mode or EXEC Privilege mode no ip ssh password-authentication or no ip ssh rsa-authentication 6. Enable host-based authentication. CONFIGURATION mode ip ssh hostbased-authentication enable 7. Bind shosts and rhosts to host-based authentication.
Troubleshooting SSH To troubleshoot SSH, use the following information. You may not bind id_rsa.pub to RSA authentication while logged in via the console. In this case, this message displays:%Error: No username set for this term. Enable host-based authentication on the server (Dell EMC Networking system) and the client (Unix machine). The following message appears if you attempt to log in via SSH and host-based is disabled on the client.
3. Assign an access class. 4. Enter a privilege level. You can assign line authentication on a per-VTY basis; it is a simple password authentication, using an access-class as authorization. Configure local authentication globally and configure access classes on a per-user basis. can assign different access classes to different users by username. Until users attempt to log in, does not know if they will be assigned a VTY line.
Example of Configuring VTY Authorization Based on MAC ACL for the Line (Per MAC Address) DellEMC(conf)#mac access-list standard sourcemac DellEMC(config-std-mac)#permit 00:00:5e:00:01:01 DellEMC(config-std-mac)#deny any DellEMC(conf)# DellEMC(conf)#line vty 0 9 DellEMC(config-line-vty)#access-class sourcemac DellEMC(config-line-vty)#end Role-Based Access Control With Role-Based Access Control (RBAC), access and authorization is controlled based on a user’s role.
A constrained RBAC model provides for separation of duty and as a result, provides greater security than the hierarchical RBAC model. Essentially, a constrained model puts some limitations around each role’s permissions to allow you to partition of tasks. However, some inheritance is possible. Default command permissions are based on CLI mode (such as configure, interface, router), any specific command settings, and the permissions allowed by the privilege and role commands.
line console 0 login authentication test authorization exec test exec-timeout 0 0 line vty 0 login authentication test authorization exec test line vty 1 login authentication test authorization exec test To enable role-based only AAA authorization, enter the following command in Configuration mode: DellEMC(conf)#aaa authorization role-only System-Defined RBAC User Roles By default, the Dell EMC Networking OS provides 4 system defined user roles. You can create up to 8 additional user roles.
Important Points to Remember Consider the following when creating a user role: ● Only the system administrator and user-defined roles inherited from the system administrator can create roles and user names. Only the system administrator, security administrator, and roles inherited from these can use the "role" command to modify command permissions. The security administrator and roles inherited by security administrator can only modify permissions for commands they already have access to.
line route-map router Line Configuration mode Route map configuration mode Router configuration mode Examples: Deny Network Administrator from Using the show users Command. The following example denies the netadmin role from using the show users command and then verifies that netadmin cannot access the show users command in exec mode. Note that the netadmin role is not listed in the Role access: secadmin,sysadmin, which means the netadmin cannot access the show users command.
DellEMC(conf)#do show role mode configure line Role access:sysadmin Example: Grant and Remove Security Administrator Access to Configure Protocols By default, the system defined role, secadmin, is not allowed to configure protocols. The following example first grants the secadmin role to configure protocols and then removes access to configure protocols.
Configure AAA Authentication for Roles Authentication services verify the user ID and password combination. Users with defined roles and users with privileges are authenticated with the same mechanism. There are six methods available for authentication: radius, tacacs+, local, enable, line, and none. When role-based only AAA authorization is enabled, the enable, line, and none methods are not available.
NOTE: Note that the methods were not applied to the console so the default methods (if configured) are applied there.
The following section shows you how to create an AV pair to allow a user to login from a network access server to have access to commands based on the user’s role. The format to create an AV pair for a user role is Force10avpair= ”shell:role=“ where user-role is a user defined or system-defined role. In the following example, you create an AV pair for a system-defined role, sysadmin. Force10-avpair= "shell:role=sysadmin" In the following example, you create an AV pair for a user-defined role.
Task ID 1, EXEC Accounting record, 00:00:30 Elapsed, service=shell Active accounted actions on tty3, User admin Priv 15 Role sysadmin Task ID 2, EXEC Accounting record, 00:00:26 Elapsed, service=shell Display Information About User Roles This section describes how to display information about user roles and consists of the following topics: ● Displaying User Roles ● Displaying Information About Roles Logged into the Switch ● Displaying Active Accounting Sessions for Roles Displaying User Roles To display
Displaying Information About Users Logged into the Switch To display information on all users logged into the switch, using the show users command in EXEC Privilege mode. The output displays privilege level and/or user role. The mode is displayed at the start of the output and both the privilege and roles for all users is also displayed. If the role is not defined, the system displays "unassigned" .
show ip ssh DellEMC# show ip ssh SSH server : enabled. SSH server version : v2. SSH server vrf : default. SSH server ciphers : aes256-ctr,aes256-cbc,aes192-ctr,aes192-cbc,aes128ctr,aes128-cbc,3des-cbc. SSH server macs : hmac-sha2-256,hmac-sha1,hmac-sha1-96,hmac-md5,hmac-md5-96. SSH server kex algorithms : diffie-hellman-group-exchange-sha1,diffie-hellman-group1sha1,diffie-hellman-group14-sha1. Password Authentication : enabled. Hostbased Authentication : disabled. RSA Authentication : disabled.
Table 95. Suppressed ICMP message types (continued) ICMPv4 message types Time exceeded (11) IP header bad (12) Timestamp request (13) Timestamp reply (14) Information request (15) Information reply (16) Address mask request (17) Address mask reply (18) NOTE: The Dell EMC Networking OS does not suppress the ICMP message type echo request (8). Table 96.
SSH Lockout Settings The system has a SSH protection mechanism which, by default, allows 10 login attempts (success or failure) per minute. After the 10th attempt, the system blocks the user login for one minute (since the first login attempt) before allowing the next set of login attempts. With Dell EMC Networking OS version 9.11(0.0), the SSH protection mechanism has been enhanced to allow 60 login attempts (success or failure) per minute.
47 Service Provider Bridging Service provider bridging provides the ability to add a second VLAN ID tag in an Ethernet frame and is referred to as VLAN stacking in the Dell EMC Networking OS. Topics: • • • • • VLAN Stacking VLAN Stacking Packet Drop Precedence Dynamic Mode CoS for VLAN Stacking Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Provider Backbone Bridging VLAN Stacking VLAN stacking, also called Q-in-Q, is defined in IEEE 802.1ad — Provider Bridges, which is an amendment to IEEE 802.
Figure 115. VLAN Stacking in a Service Provider Network Important Points to Remember ● Interfaces that are members of the Default VLAN and are configured as VLAN-Stack access or trunk ports do not switch untagged traffic. To switch traffic, add these interfaces to a non-default VLAN-Stack-enabled VLAN. ● Dell EMC Networking cautions against using the same MAC address on different customer VLANs, on the same VLAN-Stack VLAN.
Related Configuration Tasks ● ● ● ● Configuring the Protocol Type Value for the Outer VLAN Tag Configuring Dell EMC Networking OS Options for Trunk Ports Debugging VLAN Stacking VLAN Stacking in Multi-Vendor Networks Creating Access and Trunk Ports To create access and trunk ports, use the following commands. ● Access port — a port on the service provider edge that directly connects to the customer. An access port may belong to only one service provider VLAN.
2 3 4 5 6 Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Active DellEMC# M Po1(Te 1/12-1/21) M Tf 1/33/1 Configuring the Protocol Type Value for the Outer VLAN Tag The tag protocol identifier (TPID) field of the S-Tag is user-configurable. To set the S-Tag TPID, use the following command. ● Select a value for the S-Tag TPID. CONFIGURATION mode vlan-stack protocol-type The default is 9100. To display the S-Tag TPID for a VLAN, use the show running-config command from EXEC privilege mode.
NUM * 1 100 101 103 Status Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Description Q Ports U Tf 1/1 T Tf 1/1 M Tf 1/1 Debugging VLAN Stacking To debug VLAN stacking, use the following command. ● Debug the internal state and membership of a VLAN and its ports. debug member The port notations are as follows: ● MT — stacked trunk ● MU — stacked access port ● T — 802.1Q trunk port ● U — 802.
Therefore, a mismatched TPID results in the port not differentiating between tagged and untagged traffic. Figure 116.
Figure 117.
Figure 118. Single and Double-Tag TPID Mismatch VLAN Stacking Packet Drop Precedence VLAN stacking packet-drop precedence is supported on the switch. The drop eligible indicator (DEI) bit in the S-Tag indicates to a service provider bridge which packets it should prefer to drop when congested. Enabling Drop Eligibility Enable drop eligibility globally before you can honor or mark the DEI value. When you enable drop eligibility, DEI mapping or marking takes place according to the defaults.
Table 97. Drop Eligibility Behavior (continued) Ingress Egress DEI Disabled DEI Enabled Trunk Port Trunk Port Retain inner tag CFI Retain inner tag CFI. Retain outer tag CFI Set outer tag CFI to 0. Retain inner tag CFI Retain inner tag CFI Set outer tag CFI to 0 Set outer tag CFI to 0 Access Port Trunk Port To enable drop eligibility globally, use the following command. ● Make packets eligible for dropping based on their DEI value.
To display the DEI-marking configuration, use the show interface dei-mark [interface slot/port[/ subport] ] in EXEC Privilege mode. DellEMC#show interface dei-mark Default CFI/DEI Marking: 0 Interface Drop precedence CFI/DEI -------------------------------Tf 1/1 Green 0 Tf 1/2 Yellow 1 Tf 2/9 Yellow 0 Tf 2/10 Yellow 0 Dynamic Mode CoS for VLAN Stacking One of the ways to ensure quality of service for customer VLAN-tagged frames is to use the 802.
Examples of QoS Interface Configuration and Rate Policing policy-map-input in layer2 service-queue 3 class-map a qos-policy 3 ! class-map match-any a layer2 match mac access-group a ! mac access-list standard a seq 5 permit any ! qos-policy-input 3 layer2 rate-police 40 Likewise, in the following configuration, packets with dot1p priority 0–3 are marked as dot1p 7 in the outer tag and queued to Queue 3. Rate policing is according to qos-policy-input 3.
NOTE: Because dot1p-mapping marks and queues packets, the only remaining applicable QoS configuration is rate metering. You may use Rate Shaping or Rate Policing. Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Spanning tree bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) use a reserved destination MAC address called the bridge group address, which is 01-80-C2-00-00-00. Only spanning-tree bridges on the local area network (LAN) recognize this address and process the BPDU.
Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: In Dell EMC Networking OS versions prior to 8.2.1.0, the MAC address that Dell EMC Networking systems use to overwrite the Bridge Group Address on ingress was non-configurable. The value of the L2PT MAC address was the Dell EMC Networking-unique MAC address, 01-01-e8-00-00-00.
show cam-profile 2. Enable protocol tunneling globally on the system. CONFIGURATION mode protocol-tunnel enable 3. Tunnel BPDUs the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode protocol-tunnel stp Specifying a Destination MAC Address for BPDUs By default, Dell EMC Networking OS uses a Dell EMC Networking-unique MAC address for tunneling BPDUs. You can configure another value. To specify a destination MAC address for BPDUs, use the following command.
Provider Backbone Bridging IEEE 802.1ad—Provider Bridges amends 802.1Q—Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks so that service providers can use 802.1Q architecture to offer separate VLANs to customers with no coordination between customers, and minimal coordination between customers and the provider. 802.
48 sFlow sFlow is a standard-based sampling technology embedded within switches and routers which is used to monitor network traffic. It is designed to provide traffic monitoring for high-speed networks with many switches and routers.
To avoid the back-off, either increase the global sampling rate or configure all the line card ports with the desired sampling rate even if some ports have no sFlow configured. Important Points to Remember ● The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of the sFlow MIB supports sFlow configuration via snmpset. ● By default, sFlow collection is supported only on data ports.
If you did not enable any extended information, the show output displays the following (shown in bold).
Enabling and Disabling sFlow on an Interface By default, sFlow is disabled on all interfaces. This CLI is supported on physical ports and link aggregation group (LAG) ports. To enable sFlow on a specific interface, use the following command. ● Enable sFlow on an interface. INTERFACE mode [no] sflow ingress-enable To disable sFlow on an interface, use the no version of this command.
sflow collector 100.1.1.1 agent-addr 1.1.1.2 sflow enable sflow max-header-size extended sFlow Show Commands Dell EMC Networking OS includes the following sFlow display commands. ● Displaying Show sFlow Globally ● Displaying Show sFlow on an Interface ● Displaying Show sFlow on a Line Card Displaying Show sFlow Global To view sFlow statistics, use the following command. ● Display sFlow configuration information and statistics. EXEC mode show sflow The first bold line indicates sFlow is globally enabled.
show sflow interface interface-name The following example shows the show sflow interface command. DellEMC#show sflow interface twentyFiveGigE 1/1 Te 1/1/1 sFlow type :Ingress Configured sampling rate :16384 Actual sampling rate :16384 Counter polling interval :20 Extended max header size :128 Samples rcvd from h/w :0 The following example shows the show running-config interface command.
● Change the global default counter polling interval. CONFIGURATION mode or INTERFACE mode sflow polling-interval interval value ○ interval value: in seconds. The range is from 15 to 86400 seconds. The default is 20 seconds. Back-Off Mechanism If the sampling rate for an interface is set to a very low value, the CPU can get overloaded with flow samples under high-traffic conditions.
49 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is designed to manage devices on IP networks by monitoring device operation, which might require administrator intervention. NOTE: On Dell EMC Networking routers, standard and private SNMP management information bases (MIBs) are supported, including all Get and a limited number of Set operations (such as set vlan and copy cmd).
• Configuring SNMP context name Protocol Overview Network management stations use SNMP to retrieve or alter management data from network elements. A datum of management information is called a managed object; the value of a managed object can be static or variable. Network elements store managed objects in a database called a management information base (MIB).
SHA authentication needs to be used with the AES-CFB128 privacy algorithm only when FIPS is enabled because SHA is then the only available authentication level. If FIPS is disabled, you can use MD5 authentication in addition to SHA authentication with the AES-CFB128 privacy algorithm You cannot modify the FIPS mode if SNMPv3 users are already configured and present in the system.
Set up SNMP As previously stated, Dell EMC Networking OS supports SNMP version 1 and version 2 that are community-based security models. The primary difference between the two versions is that version 2 supports two additional protocol operations (informs operation and snmpgetbulk query) and one additional object (counter64 object). SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is a user-based security model that provides password authentication for user security and encryption for data security and privacy.
● Configure an SNMPv3 view. CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server view view-name oid-tree {included | excluded} NOTE: To give a user read and write view privileges, repeat this step for each privilege type. ● Configure the user with an authorization password (password privileges only). CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server user name group-name 3 noauth auth md5 auth-password ● Configure an SNMP group (password privileges only).
There are several UNIX SNMP commands that read data. ● Read the value of a single managed object. snmpget -v version -c community agent-ip {identifier.instance | descriptor.instance} ● Read the value of the managed object directly below the specified object. snmpgetnext -v version -c community agent-ip {identifier.instance | descriptor.instance} ● Read the value of many objects at once. snmpwalk -v version -c community agent-ip {identifier.instance | descriptor.
You may use up to 55 characters. The default is None. ● (From a Dell EMC Networking system) Identify the physical location of the system (for example, San Jose, 350 Holger Way, 1st floor lab, rack A1-1). CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server location text You may use up to 55 characters. The default is None. ● (From a management station) Identify the system manager along with this person’s contact information (for example, an email address or phone number).
snmp-server trap-source The following example lists the RFC-defined SNMP traps and the command used to enable each. The coldStart and warmStart traps are enabled using a single command. snmp authentication community string. snmp coldstart snmp linkdown snmp linkup SNMP_AUTH_FAIL:SNMP Authentication failed.Request with invalid SNMP_COLD_START: Agent Initialized - SNMP COLD_START. SNMP_WARM_START:Agent Initialized - SNMP WARM_START.
The following example shows the SNMP trap that is sent when connectivity to the syslog server is lost: DISMAN-EVENT-MIB::sysUpTimeInstance = Timeticks: (19738) 0:03:17.38 SNMPv2MIB::snmpTrapOID.0 = OID: SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.30.1.1.1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.30.1.1 = STRING: "NOT_REACHABLE: Syslog server 10.11.226.121 (port: 9140) is not reachable" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.6.1.1.2.
Table 101. MIB Objects for Copying Configuration Files via SNMP (continued) MIB Object OID Object Values Description copyUserName, and copyUserPassword. 6 = usbflash copySrcFileName .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.4 Path (if the file is not in the current directory) and filename. Specifies name of the file. ● If copySourceFileType is set to runningconfig or startup-config, copySrcFileName is not required. copyDestFileType .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.
snmp-server community community-name rw 2. Copy the f10-copy-config.mib MIB from the Dell iSupport web page to the server to which you are copying the configuration file. 3. On the server, use the snmpset command as shown in the following example. snmpset -v snmp-version -c community-name -m mib_path/f10-copy-config.mib force10systemip-address mib-object.index {i | a | s} object-value... ● Every specified object must have an object value and must precede with the keyword i. Refer to the previous table.
Copying the Startup-Config Files to the Running-Config To copy the startup-config to the running-config from a UNIX machine, use the following command. ● Copy the startup-config to the running-config from a UNIX machine. snmpset -c private -v 2c force10system-ip-address copySrcFileType.index i 3 copyDestFileType.index i 2 The following example shows how to copy configuration files from a UNIX machine using the object name. > snmpset -c public -v 2c -m ./f10-copy-config.mib 10.11.131.162 copySrcFileType.
Copy a Binary File to the Startup-Configuration To copy a binary file from the server to the startup-configuration on the Dell EMC Networking system via FTP, use the following command. ● Copy a binary file from the server to the startup-configuration on the Dell EMC Networking system via FTP. snmpset -v 2c -c public -m ./f10-copy-config.mib force10system-ip-address copySrcFileType.index i 1 copySrcFileLocation.index i 4 copySrcFileName.index s filepath/filename copyDestFileType.index i 3 copyServerAddress.
index: the index value used in the snmpset command used to complete the copy operation. NOTE: You can use the entire OID rather than the object name. Use the form: OID.index. The following examples show the snmpget command to obtain a MIB object value. These examples assume that: ● the server OS is UNIX ● you are using SNMP version 2c ● the community name is public ● the file f10-copy-config.mib is in the current directory NOTE: In UNIX, enter the snmpset command for help using this command.
MIB Support for 25G, 40G, 50G, 100G Optical Transceiver or DAC cable IDPROM user info Dell EMC Networking provides MIB objects to display the information for 25G, 40G, 50G, 100G Optical Transceiver or DAC cable IDPROM. The following table lists the related MIB objects, OID and description for the same: Table 104. MIB Objects to Display support for 25G, 40G, 50G, 100G Optical Transceiver or DAC cable IDPROM user info MIB Object OID Description dellNetIfTransceiverData 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.11.1.
DELL-NETWORKING-IF-EXTENSION-MIB::dellNetIfTransTransmitPowerLane2.2112517 = "" DELL-NETWORKING-IF-EXTENSION-MIB::dellNetIfTransTransmitPowerLane3.2112517 = "" DELL-NETWORKING-IF-EXTENSION-MIB::dellNetIfTransTransmitPowerLane4.2112517 = "" DELL-NETWORKING-IF-EXTENSION-MIB::dellNetIfTransReceivePowerLane1.2112517 = STRING: "-1.433315" dBm DELL-NETWORKING-IF-EXTENSION-MIB::dellNetIfTransReceivePowerLane2.2112517 = STRING: "0.051805" dBm DELL-NETWORKING-IF-EXTENSION-MIB::dellNetIfTransReceivePowerLane3.
Table 106. MIB Objects for Displaying the Software Core Files Generated by the System (continued) MIB Object OID Description chSysCoresFileName 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.2 Contains the core file names and the file paths. chSysCoresTimeCreated 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.3 Contains the time at which core files are created. chSysCoresStackUnitNumber 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.4 Contains information that includes which stack unit or processor the core file was originated from.
Table 107. MIB Objects to Display the Information for PFC Storm Control (continued) MIB Object OID Description dellNetFpPfcStormControlStatusEntry 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1 Table entry of PFC storm-control status counters. dellNetFpPfcStormControlQueueState 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.1 Queue state (normal/drop). dellNetFpPfcStormControlDurationInDisc 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.2 ardState Number of milli-seconds the queue is in discard state.
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.4.2097669.6 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.4.2097925.5 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.4.2097925.6 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.5.2097157.5 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.5.2097157.6 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.5.2097413.5 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.5.2097413.6 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.5.2097669.5 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.5.2097669.
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.22.1.1.1.1.2 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.22.1.1.1.1.3 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.22.1.1.1.1.4 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.22.1.1.1.1.5 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.22.1.1.1.1.6 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.22.1.1.1.1.
SNMP Support for WRED Green/Yellow/Red Drop Counters Dell EMC Networking provides MIB objects to display the information for WRED Green (Green Drops)/Yellow (Yellow Drops)/Red (Out of Profile Drops) Drop Counters. These statistics can also be obtained by using the CLI command: show qos statistics wred-profile . The following table lists the related MIB objects, OID and description for the same: Table 110.
MIB Support to Display the Available Partitions on Flash Dell EMC Networking provides MIB objects to display the information of various partitions such as /flash, /tmp, /usr/ pkg, and /f10/ConfD. The dellNetFlashStorageTable table contains the list of all partitions on disk. The following table lists the related MIB objects: Table 111. MIB Objects to Display the Available Partitions on Flash MIB Object OID Description dellNetFlashPartitionNumber 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.1 Index for the table.
.1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.4.2 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.4.3 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.4.4 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.4.5 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.1 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.2 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.3 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.4 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.5 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.6.1 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.6.2 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.6.3 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.6.4 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.6.
MIB Support to ECMP Group Count Dell EMC Networking OS provides MIB objects to display the information of the ECMP group count information. The following table lists the related MIB objects: Table 114. MIB Objects to display ECMP Group Count MIB Object OID Description dellNetInetCidrECMPGrpMax 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.9.1.6 Total CAM for ECMP group. dellNetInetCidrECMPGrpUsed 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.9.1.7 Used CAM for ECMP group. dellNetInetCidrECMPGrpAvl 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.9.1.
INTEGER: 2097157 SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.100.100.100.0.24.1.4.10.1.1.1.1.4.10.1.1.1 = INTEGER: 2098693 SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.100.100.100.0.24.1.4.20.1.1.1.1.4.20.1.1.1 = INTEGER: 1258296320 SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.100.100.100.0.24.1.4.30.1.1.1.1.4.30.1.1.1 = INTEGER: 1275078656 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.1.4.10.1.1.0.24.0.0.0.0 = "" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.1.4.10.1.1.1.32.1.4.10.1.1.1.1.4.10.1.1.
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.10.1.1.4.70.70.70.0.24.0.0.0.0 = STRING: "CP" SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.10.1.1.4.70.70.70.1.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.1 = STRING: "CP" SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.10.1.1.4.70.70.70.2.32.1.4.70.70.70.2.1.4.70.70.70.2 = STRING: "Fo 1/49/1" SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.10.1.1.4.80.80.80.0.24.1.4.10.1.1.1.1.4.10.1.1.1 = STRING: "Fo 1/49/1" SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.10.1.1.4.80.80.80.0.24.1.4.20.1.1.1.1.4.20.1.1.
SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.100.100.100.0.24.1.4.10.1.1.1.1.4.10.1.1.1 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.100.100.100.0.24.1.4.20.1.1.1.1.4.20.1.1.1 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.100.100.100.0.24.1.4.30.1.1.1.1.4.30.1.1.1 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.6.0 = Gauge32: 2048 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.7.0 = Gauge32: 1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.8.
Table 115. MIB Objects for Displaying the Details of FEC BER (continued) MIB Object OID Description dellNetFpEgInvalidVLANCounterDrops 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.3.1.18 Invalid VLAN Counter Drops. dellNetFpEgL2MCDrops 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.3.1.19 L2 MC Drops. dellNetFpEgPktDropsOfAnyCondition 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.3.1.20 Packet Drops of ANY Conditions. dellNetFpEgHgMacUnderFlow 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.3.1.21 Hg MacUnderflow. dellNetFpEgTxErrPktCounter 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.3.1.
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.25.2109966 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.25.2110478 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.25.2110990 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.25.2111502 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.25.2112014 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.25.2112526 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.25.2113038 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.25.2113540 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.25.
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.27.2103822 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.27.2104334 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.27.2104846 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.27.2105358 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.27.2105870 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.27.2106382 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.27.2106894 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.27.2107406 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.27.2107918 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.27.
.1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.3.2.1.2.30.0 = OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.2100356 .1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.3.2.1.2.31.0 = OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.2100484 MIB Support for LAG Dell EMC Networking provides a method to retrieve the configured LACP information (Actor and Partner). Actor (local interface) is to designate the parameters and flags pertaining to the sending node, while the term Partner (remote interface) is to designate the sending node’s view of its peer parameters and flags.
Table 117. MIB Objects for LAG (continued) MIB Object OID Description dot3adAggCollectorMaxDelay 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.10 Contains a 16–bit read–write attribute defining the maximum delay, in tens of microseconds, that may be imposed by the frame collector between receiving a frame from an Aggregator Parser, and either delivering the frame to its MAC Client or discarding the frame. dot3adAggPortListTable 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.
Table 118. MIB Objects for CAM (continued) MIB Object OID Description camUsageL2In 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.7.1.1.2.1.4.stack-unit.port-pipe.pipegAclUsed line camUsageL2E grAclUsed Contains information about the total CAM size allocated to layer 2 ingress ACL. 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.7.1.1.2.1.10.stack-unit.port-pipe.pipe- Contains information about the total CAM size line allocated to layer 2 egress ACL.
MIB support for MAC notification traps Dell EMC Networking OS provides MIB support to generate SNMP trap messages on learning or station move of a new or existing MAC address in the system with mac–address, vlan–id, and port details. The following table lists the related MIB objects, OID, and description for the same: Table 119. MIB Objects for MAC notification traps MIB Object OID Description dellNetMacNotifMib 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.28.1 Contains the MAC notification groups.
MIB support for interface level port security The MIB table dellNetPortSecIfConfigTable is used to achieve port security feature (MAC address learning limit) on an interface. NOTE: Port Security is not supported in VLT port channels. The following table shows the MIB objects of the table dellNetPortSecIfConfigTable. The OID of the MIB table is 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.31.1.2.1. Table 121.
snmpset –v 2c –c public 10.16.129.26 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.31.1.2.1.1.3. 2101252 i 2147483647 To retrieve dellNetPortSecIfSecureMacLimit configured on an interface whose ifIndex is 2101252, use the following command. snmpwalk -v 2c -c public 10.16.129.26 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.31.1.2.1.1.3. 2101252 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.31.1.2.1.1.3.
● VLAN ID Table 123. MIB Objects for configuring MAC addresses MIB Object OID Access or Permission Description dellNetSecureMacIfIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.31.1.3.1.1.3 read-only Shows in which interface the dellNetSecureMacAddress is configured or learnt. dellNetSecureMacAddrType 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.31.1.3.1.1.4 read-only Indicates if the secure MAC address is configured as a static, dynamic, or sticky.
Manage VLANs using SNMP The qBridgeMIB managed objects in Q-BRIDGE-MIB, defined in RFC 2674, allows you to use SNMP to manage VLANs. Creating a VLAN To create a VLAN, use the dot1qVlanStaticRowStatus object. The snmpset operation shown in the following example creates VLAN 10 by specifying a value of 4 for instance 10 of the dot1qVlanStaticRowStatus object. > snmpset -v2c -c mycommunity 123.45.6.78 .1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.4.3.1.5.10 i 4 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.17.7.1.4.3.1.5.
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00" .1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.4.3.1.4.1107787786 x "40 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00" SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.17.7.1.4.3.1.2.
To set time to wait till bgp session are up set 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.18.1.3 and 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.18.1.6 Enabling and Disabling a Port using SNMP To enable and disable a port using SNMP, use the following commands. 1. Create an SNMP community on the Dell system. CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server community 2. From the Dell EMC Networking system, identify the interface index of the port for which you want to change the admin status.
The value of dot1dTpFdbPort is the port number of the port off which the system learns the MAC address. In this case, of TwentyfiveGigE 1/21, the manager returns the integer 118.
MIB Objects for Viewing the System Image on Flash Partitions To view the system image on Flash Partition A, use the chSysSwInPartitionAImgVers object or, to view the system image on Flash Partition B, use the chSysSwInPartitionBImgVers object. Table 125. MIB Objects for Viewing the System Image on Flash Partitions MIB Object OID Description MIB chSysSwInPartitionAImgVers 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.8.1.11 List the version string of the system image in Flash Partition A.
Example of Viewing Changed Interface State for Monitored Ports SNMPv2-MIB::sysUpTime.0 = Timeticks: (8500842) 23:36:48.42 SNMPv2-MIB::snmpTrapOID.0 = OID: IF-MIB::linkDown IF-MIB::ifIndex.33865785 = INTEGER: 33865785 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.1.1.4.1.2 = STRING: "OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Tf 1/1" 2010-02-10 14:22:39 10.16.130.4 [10.16.130.4]: SNMPv2-MIB::sysUpTime.0 = Timeticks: (8500842) 23:36:48.42 SNMPv2-MIB::snmpTrapOID.0 = OID: IF-MIB::linkDown IF-MIB::ifIndex.
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.11.2113540 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.12.2113540 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.13.2113540 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.14.2113540 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.15.2113540 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.16.2113540 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.17.2113540 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.18.2113540 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.19.2113540 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.
Sample SNMP context configuration: DellEMC(conf-ipv6-router_ospf)#snmp context ospf1 DellEMC>show runnig-config ospf ! ipv6 router ospf 10 router-id 10.10.10.
50 Storm Control Storm control allows you to control unknown-unicast, muticast, and broadcast traffic on Layer 2 and Layer 3 physical interfaces. Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) Behavior: Dell EMC Networking OS supports unknown-unicast, muticast, and broadcast control for Layer 2 and Layer 3 traffic. To view the storm control broadcast configuration show storm-control broadcast | multicast | unknownunicast | pfc-llfc[interface] command.
INTERFACE mode storm-control multicast packets_per_second in ● Shut down the port if it receives the PFC/LLFC packets more than the configured rate. INTERFACE mode storm-control pfc-llfc pps in shutdown NOTE: PFC/LLFC storm control enabled interface disables the interfaces if it receives continuous PFC/LLFC packets. It can be a result of a faulty NIC/Switch that sends spurious PFC/LLFC packets.
● Use the xoff-state threshold polling-count {number of polling-interval} command to set the number of times the polling should be done. If the traffic and the egress counter remain the same after the subsequent polling, then the corresponding port or priority is detected to have PFC storm. ● Once PFC storm is detected on an interface, you can use the storm-control pfc in queue-drop command on the interface to drop the ingress packets.
Tf 1/4 Tf 1/5 Tf 1/6 Tf 1/7 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DellEMC# Storm Control 849
51 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) The spanning tree protocol (STP) is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS.
Related Configuration Tasks ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Adding an Interface to the Spanning Tree Group Modifying Global Parameters Modifying Interface STP Parameters Enabling PortFast Prevent Network Disruptions with BPDU Guard STP Root Guard Enabling SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes Important Points to Remember ● STP is disabled by default. ● The Dell EMC Networking OS supports only one spanning tree instance (0).
Configuring Interfaces for Layer 2 Mode All interfaces on all switches that participate in spanning tree must be in Layer 2 mode and enabled. Figure 122. Example of Configuring Interfaces for Layer 2 Mode To configure and enable the interfaces for Layer 2, use the following command. 1. If the interface has been assigned an IP address, remove it. INTERFACE mode no ip address 2. Place the interface in Layer 2 mode. INTERFACE switchport 3. Enable the interface.
no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/1)# Enabling Spanning Tree Protocol Globally Enable the spanning tree protocol globally; it is not enabled by default. When you enable STP, all physical, VLAN, and port-channel interfaces that are enabled and in Layer 2 mode are automatically part of the Spanning Tree topology. ● Only one path from any bridge to any other bridge participating in STP is enabled. ● Bridges block a redundant path by disabling one of the link ports. Figure 123.
To view the spanning tree configuration and the interfaces that are participating in STP, use the show spanning-tree 0 command from EXEC privilege mode. If a physical interface is part of a port channel, only the port channel is listed in the command output. R2#show spanning-tree 0 Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, address 0001.e826.ddb7 Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Current root has priority 32768, address 0001.e80d.
Modifying Global Parameters You can modify the spanning tree parameters. The root bridge sets the values for forward-delay, hello-time, and max-age and overwrites the values set on other bridges participating in STP. NOTE: Dell EMC Networking recommends that only experienced network administrators change the spanning tree parameters. Poorly planned modification of the spanning tree parameters can negatively affect network performance. The following table displays the default values for STP. Table 128.
To view the current values for global parameters, use the show spanning-tree 0 command from EXEC privilege mode. Refer to the second example in Enabling Spanning Tree Protocol Globally. Modifying Interface STP Parameters You can set the port cost and port priority values of interfaces in Layer 2 mode. ● Port cost — a value that is based on the interface type. The greater the port cost, the less likely the port is selected to be a forwarding port.
Prevent Network Disruptions with BPDU Guard Configure the Portfast (and Edgeport, in the case of RSTP, PVST+, and MSTP) feature on ports that connect to end stations. End stations do not generate BPDUs, so ports configured with Portfast/ Edgport (edgeports) do not expect to receive BDPUs. If an edgeport does receive a BPDU, it likely means that it is connected to another part of the network, which can negatively affect the STP topology.
Figure 124. Enabling BPDU Guard Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: BPDU guard and BPDU filtering both block BPDUs, but are two separate features. BPDU guard: ● is used on edgeports and blocks all traffic on edgeport if it receives a BPDU. ● drops the BPDU after it reaches the RP and generates a console message.
Selecting STP Root The STP determines the root bridge, but you can assign one bridge a lower priority to increase the likelihood that it becomes the root bridge. You can also specify that a bridge is the root or the secondary root. To change the bridge priority or specify that a bridge is the root or secondary root, use the following command. ● Assign a number as the bridge priority or designate it as the root or secondary root.
Figure 125. STP Root Guard Prevents Bridging Loops Configuring Root Guard Enable STP root guard on a per-port or per-port-channel basis. Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: The following conditions apply to a port enabled with STP root guard: ● Root guard is supported on any STP-enabled port or port-channel interface except when used as a stacking port.
To verify the STP root guard configuration on a port or port-channel interface, use the show spanning-tree 0 guard [interface interface] command in a global configuration mode. Enabling SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes To enable SNMP traps individually or collectively, use the following commands. ● Enable SNMP traps for spanning tree state changes. snmp-server enable traps stp ● Enable SNMP traps for RSTP, MSTP, and PVST+ collectively.
Figure 126. STP Loop Guard Prevents Forwarding Loops Configuring Loop Guard Enable STP loop guard on a per-port or per-port channel basis. The following conditions apply to a port enabled with loop guard: ● Loop guard is supported on any STP-enabled port or port-channel interface.
● When used in a PVST+ network, STP loop guard is performed per-port or per-port channel at a VLAN level. If no BPDUs are received on a VLAN interface, the port or port-channel transitions to a Loop-Inconsistent (Blocking) state only for this VLAN. To enable a loop guard on an STP-enabled port or port-channel interface, use the following command. ● Enable loop guard on a port or port-channel interface.
52 SupportAssist SupportAssist sends troubleshooting data securely to Dell. SupportAssist in this Dell EMC Networking OS release does not support automated email notification at the time of hardware fault alert, automatic case creation, automatic part dispatch, or reports. SupportAssist requires Dell EMC Networking OS 9.9(0.0) and SmartScripts 9.7 or later to be installed on the Dell EMC Networking device. For more information on SmartScripts, see Dell EMC Networking Open Automation guide. Figure 127.
Enable the SupportAssist service. CONFIGURATION mode support-assist activate DellEMC(conf)#support-assist activate This command guides you through steps to configure SupportAssist. Configuring SupportAssist Manually To manually configure SupportAssist service, use the following commands. 1. Accept the end-user license agreement (EULA). CONFIGURATION mode eula-consent {support-assist} {accept | reject} NOTE: Once accepted, you do not have to accept the EULA again.
support-assist DellEMC(conf)#support-assist DellEMC(conf-supportassist)# 3. (Optional) Configure the contact information for the company. SUPPORTASSIST mode contact-company name {company-name}[company-next-name] ... [company-next-name] DellEMC(conf)#support-assist DellEMC(conf-supportassist)#contact-company name test DellEMC(conf-supportassist-cmpy-test)# 4. (Optional) Configure the contact name for an individual.
[no] activity {full-transfer|core-transfer|event-transfer} DellEMC(conf-supportassist)#activity full-transfer DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)# DellEMC(conf-supportassist)#activity core-transfer DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-core-transfer)# DellEMC(conf-supportassist)#activity event-transfer DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-event-transfer)# 2. Copy an action-manifest file for an activity to the system.
SUPPORTASSIST ACTIVITY mode [no] enable DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)#enable DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)# DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-core-transfer)#enable DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-core-transfer)# DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-event-transfer)#enable DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-event-transfer)# Configuring SupportAssist Company SupportAssist Company mode allows you to configure name, address and territory information of the company.
[no] contact-person [first ] last DellEMC(conf-supportassist)#contact-person first john last doe DellEMC(conf-supportassist-pers-john_doe)# 2. Configure the email addresses to reach the contact person. SUPPORTASSIST PERSON mode [no] email-address primary email-address [alternate email-address] DellEMC(conf-supportassist-pers-john_doe)#email-address primary jdoe@mycompany.com DellEMC(conf-supportassist-pers-john_doe)# 3. Configure phone numbers of the contact person.
[no] enable DellEMC(conf-supportassist-serv-default)#enable DellEMC(conf-supportassist-serv-default)# 4. Configure the URL to reach the SupportAssist remote server. SUPPORTASSIST SERVER mode [no] url uniform-resource-locator DellEMC(conf-supportassist-serv-default)#url https://192.168.1.1/index.htm DellEMC(conf-supportassist-serv-default)# Viewing SupportAssist Configuration To view the SupportAssist configurations, use the following commands: 1.
! server Dell enable url http://1.1.1.1:1337 DellEMC# 3. Display the EULA for the feature. EXEC Privilege mode show eula-consent {support-assist | other feature} DellEMC#show eula-consent support-assist SupportAssist EULA has been: Accepted Additional information about the SupportAssist EULA is as follows: By installing SupportAssist, you allow Dell to save your contact information (e.g.
53 System Time and Date System time and date settings and the network time protocol (NTP) are supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. You can set system times and dates and maintained through the NTP. They are also set through the Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) command line interfaces (CLIs) and hardware settings. The Dell EMC Networking OS supports reaching an NTP server through different VRFs. You can configure a maximum of eight logging servers across different VRFs or the same VRF.
Protocol Overview The NTP messages to one or more servers and processes the replies as received. The server interchanges addresses and ports, fills in or overwrites certain fields in the message, recalculates the checksum, and returns it immediately. Information included in the NTP message allows each client/server peer to determine the timekeeping characteristics of its other peers, including the expected accuracies of their clocks.
To display the system clock state with respect to NTP, use the show ntp status command from EXEC Privilege mode. DellEMC#show ntp status Clock is synchronized, stratum 4, reference is 10.16.151.117, vrf-id is 0 frequency is -44.862 ppm, stability is 0.050 ppm, precision is -18 reference time deeef7ef.85eeaa10 Tue, Jul 10 2018 9:16:31.523 UTC clock offset is -0.167449 msec, root delay is 149.194 msec root dispersion is 54.557 msec, peer dispersion is 0.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ For For For For For For For For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information. a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the slot/port information.
○ version number : Enter a number as the NTP version. The range is from 1 to 4. ○ minpoll polling-interval: Enter the minpoll value. The range is from 4 to 16. ○ maxpoll polling-interval: Enter the maxpoll value. The range is from 4 to 16. 5. Configure the switch as NTP master. CONFIGURATION mode ntp master To configure the switch as NTP Server use the ntp master command. stratum number identifies the NTP Server's hierarchy. The following example shows configuring an NTP server.
● Originate Timestamp: The departure time on the server of its last NTP message. If the server becomes unreachable, the value is set to zero. ● Receive Timestamp — the arrival time on the client of the last NTP message from the server. If the server becomes unreachable, the value is set to zero. ● Transmit Timestamp — the departure time on the server of the current NTP message from the sender. ● Filter dispersion — the error in calculating the minimum delay from a set of sample data from a peer.
● Setting Daylight Saving Time Once ● Setting Recurring Daylight Saving Time Setting the Time and Date for the Switch Software Clock You can change the order of the month and day parameters to enter the time and date as time day month year. You cannot delete the software clock. The software clock runs only when the software is up. The clock restarts, based on the hardware clock, when the switch reboots. To set the software clock, use the following command.
Set Daylight Saving Time Dell EMC Networking OS supports setting the system to daylight saving time once or on a recurring basis every year. Setting Daylight Saving Time Once Set a date (and time zone) on which to convert the switch to daylight saving time on a one-time basis. To set the clock for daylight savings time once, use the following command. ● Set the clock to the appropriate timezone and daylight saving time.
○ start-day: Enter the number of the day. The range is from 1 to 31. You can enter the name of a month to change the order of the display to time day month year. ○ start-year: Enter a four-digit number as the year. The range is from 1993 to 2035. ○ start-time: Enter the time in hours:minutes. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format; example, 17:15 is 5:15 pm.
54 Tunneling Tunnel interfaces create a logical tunnel for IPv4 or IPv6 traffic. Tunneling supports RFC 2003, RFC 2473, and 4213. DSCP, hop-limits, flow label values, open shortest path first (OSPF) v2, and OSPFv3 are supported. Internet control message protocol (ICMP) error relay, PATH MTU transmission, and fragmented packets are not supported.
tunnel mode ipv6ip no shutdown The following sample configuration shows a tunnel configured in IPIP mode (IPv4 tunnel carries IPv4 and IPv6 traffic): DellEMC(conf)#interface tunnel 3 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel source 5::5 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel destination 8::9 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel mode ipv6 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#ip address 3.1.1.1/24 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#ipv6 address 3::1/64 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#show config ! interface Tunnel 3 ip address 3.1.1.
The following sample configuration shows how to use the interface tunnel configuration commands. DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/1)#show config ! interface twentyFiveGigE 1/1 ip address 20.1.1.1/24 ipv6 address 20:1::1/64 no shutdown DellEMC(conf)#interface tunnel 1 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#ip unnumbered twentyFiveGigE 1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#ipv6 unnumbered twentyFiveGigE 1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#tunnel source 40.1.1.
DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#show config ! interface Tunnel 1 ip address 1.1.1.1/24 ipv6 address 1abd::1/64 tunnel source anylocal tunnel allow-remote 40.1.1.2 tunnel mode ipip decapsulate-any no shutdown Guidelines for Configuring Multipoint Receive-Only Tunnels ● You can configure up to eight remote end-points for a multipoint receive-only tunnel.
55 Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) Uplink failure detection (UFD) provides detection of the loss of upstream connectivity and, if used with network interface controller (NIC) teaming, automatic recovery from a failed link.
Figure 129. Uplink Failure Detection How Uplink Failure Detection Works UFD creates an association between upstream and downstream interfaces. The association of uplink and downlink interfaces is called an uplink-state group. An interface in an uplink-state group can be a physical interface or a port-channel (LAG) aggregation of physical interfaces. An enabled uplink-state group tracks the state of all assigned upstream interfaces.
Figure 130. Uplink Failure Detection Example If only one of the upstream interfaces in an uplink-state group goes down, a specified number of downstream ports associated with the upstream interface are put into a Link-Down state. You can configure this number and is calculated by the ratio of the upstream port bandwidth to the downstream port bandwidth in the same uplink-state group.
● If one of the upstream interfaces in an uplink-state group goes down, either a user-configurable set of downstream ports or all the downstream ports in the group are put in an Operationally Down state with an UFD Disabled error. The order in which downstream ports are disabled is from the lowest numbered port to the highest.
UPLINK-STATE-GROUP mode downstream auto-recover The default is auto-recovery of UFD-disabled downstream ports is enabled. To disable auto-recovery, use the no downstream auto-recover command. 5. (Optional) Enter a text description of the uplink-state group. UPLINK-STATE-GROUP mode description text The maximum length is 80 alphanumeric characters. 6. (Optional) Disable upstream-link tracking without deleting the uplink-state group.
02:37:29: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed uplink state group state to down: Group 3 02:37:29: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Downstream interface set to UFD error-disabled: Tf 1/9 02:37:29: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Tf 1/10 02:38:31 : UFD: Group:3, UplinkState: UP 02:38:31: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_UP: Changed uplink state group state to up: Group 3 02:38:53: Tf 1/11 02:38:53: Tf 1/12 02:38:53: Tf 1/13 02:38:53: Tf 1/14 02:38:53: 02:38:53: 02:38:53: 02:38:53:
ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interface" counters 00:25:46 Queueing strategy: fifo Input Statistics: 0 packets, 0 bytes 0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded Output Statistics: 0 packets, 0 bytes, 0 underruns 0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkt
Tf 1/1 DellEMC# 00:10:00: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Tf 1/1 DellEMC(conf-uplink-state-group-3)# description Testing UFD feature DellEMC(conf-uplink-state-group-3)# show config ! uplink-state-group 3 description Testing UFD feature downstream disable links 2 downstream twentyFiveGigE 1/1-2,5,9,11-12 upstream twentyFiveGigE 1/3-4 DellEMC(conf-uplink-state-group-3)# DellEMC(conf-uplink-state-group-3)#exit DellEMC(conf)#exit DellEMC# 00:13:06: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %SYS-5-CONFI
56 Upgrade Procedures To find the upgrade procedures, go to the Dell EMC Networking OS Release Notes for your system type to see all the requirements needed to upgrade to the desired Dell EMC Networking OS version. To upgrade your system type, follow the procedures in the Dell EMC Networking OS Release Notes. You can download the release notes of your platform at https://www.force10networks.com. Use your login ID to log in to the website.
57 Virtual LANs (VLANs) Virtual LANs (VLANs) are a logical broadcast domain or logical grouping of interfaces in a local area network (LAN) in which all data received is kept locally and broadcast to all members of the group. When in Layer 2 mode, VLANs move traffic at wire speed and can span multiple devices. The system supports up to 4093 port-based VLANs and one default VLAN, as specified in IEEE 802.1Q.
NOTE: You cannot assign an IP address to the Default VLAN. To assign an IP address to a VLAN that is currently the Default VLAN, create another VLAN and assign it to be the Default VLAN. For more information about assigning IP addresses, refer to Assigning an IP Address to a VLAN. ● Untagged interfaces must be part of a VLAN. To remove an untagged interface from the Default VLAN, create another VLAN and place the interface into that VLAN.
● The VLAN protocol identifier identifies the frame as tagged according to the IEEE 802.1Q specifications (2 bytes). ● Tag control information (TCI) includes the VLAN ID (2 bytes total). The VLAN ID can have 4,096 values, but two are reserved. NOTE: The insertion of the tag header into the Ethernet frame increases the size of the frame to more than the 1,518 bytes as specified in the IEEE 802.3 standard. Some devices that are not compliant with IEEE 802.3 may not support the larger frame size.
Assigning Interfaces to a VLAN You can only assign interfaces in Layer 2 mode to a VLAN using the tagged and untagged commands. To place an interface in Layer 2 mode, use the switchport command. You can further designate these Layer 2 interfaces as tagged or untagged. For more information, see the Interfaces chapter and Configuring Layer 2 (Data Link) Mode.
When you remove a tagged interface from a VLAN (using the no tagged interface command), it remains tagged only if it is a tagged interface in another VLAN. If the tagged interface is removed from the only VLAN to which it belongs, the interface is placed in the Default VLAN as an untagged interface. Moving Untagged Interfaces To move untagged interfaces from the Default VLAN to another VLAN, use the following commands. 1. Access INTERFACE VLAN mode of the VLAN to which you want to assign the interface.
Assigning an IP Address to a VLAN VLANs are a Layer 2 feature. For two physical interfaces on different VLANs to communicate, you must assign an IP address to the VLANs to route traffic between the two interfaces. The shutdown command in INTERFACE mode does not affect Layer 2 traffic on the interface; the shutdown command only prevents Layer 3 traffic from traversing over the interface. NOTE: You cannot assign an IP address to the Default VLAN (VLAN 1).
Enabling Null VLAN as the Default VLAN In a Carrier Ethernet for Metro Service environment, service providers who perform frequent reconfigurations for customers with changing requirements occasionally enable multiple interfaces, each connected to a different customer, before the interfaces are fully configured. This presents a vulnerability because both interfaces are initially placed in the native VLAN, VLAN 1, and for that period customers are able to access each other's networks.
58 Virtual Link Trunking (VLT) Virtual link trunking (VLT) is a Dell EMC technology that provides two Dell EMC switches the ability to function as a single switch. VLT allows physical links between two Dell EMC switches to appear as a single virtual link to the network core or other switches such as Edge, Access, or top-of-rack (ToR). As a result, the two physical switches appear as a single switch to the connected devices.
peers as a single switch, VLT eliminates STP-blocked ports. However, the two VLT devices are independent Layer2/Layer3 (L2/L3) switches for devices in the upstream network. Figure 133. VLT providing multipath VLT reduces the role of spanning tree protocols (STPs) by allowing link aggregation group (LAG) terminations on two separate distribution or core switches and supporting a loop-free topology. To prevent the initial loop that may occur prior to VLT being established, use a spanning tree protocol.
Figure 134. Example of VLT Deployment VLT offers the following benefits: ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Allows a single device to use a LAG across two upstream devices. Eliminates STP-blocked ports. Provides a loop-free topology. Uses all available uplink bandwidth. Provides fast convergence if either the link or a device fails. Optimized forwarding with virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP). Provides link-level resiliency. Assures high availability. Active-Active load sharing with VRRP.
● VLT backup link — The backup link monitors the connectivity between the VLT peer switches. The backup link sends configurable, periodic keep alive messages between the VLT peer switches. ● VLT interconnect (VLTi) — The link used to synchronize states between the VLT peer switches. Both ends must be on 10G, 25G, 40G, 50G, or 100G interfaces. ● VLT domain — This domain includes both the VLT peer devices, VLT interconnect, and all of the port channels in the VLT connected to the attached devices.
Viewing the MAC Synchronization Between VLT Peers You can use the following commands to verify the MAC synchronization between VLT peers: VLT-10-PEER-1#show mac-address-table count MAC Entries for all vlans : Dynamic Address Count : 1007 Static Address (User-defined) Count : 1 Sticky Address Count : 0 Total Synced Mac from Peer(N): 503 Total MAC Addresses in Use: 1008 VLT-10-PEER-1#show vlt counter mac Total MAC VLT counters ---------------------L2 Total MAC-Address Count: 1007 VLT-10-PEER-1#show mac-addr
such that all the uplinks from servers to access and access to aggregation are in Active-Active Load Sharing mode. This example provides the highest form of resiliency, scaling, and load balancing in data center switching networks. The following example shows stacking at the access, VLT in aggregation, and Layer 3 at the core. Figure 136. VLT on Core Switches The aggregation layer is mostly in the L2/L3 switching/routing layer.
Figure 137. Enhanced VLT Configure Virtual Link Trunking VLT requires that you enable the feature and then configure the same VLT domain, backup link, and VLT interconnect on both peer switches. Important Points to Remember ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You cannot enable stacking simultaneously with VLT. If you enable both at the same time, unexpected behavior can occur. VLT port channel interfaces must be switch ports. If you include RSTP on the system, configure it before VLT.
● o disable this feature on VLT and port channels, use no lacp ungroup member-independent {vlt | portchannel} command under the configuration mode. ● When you enable IGMP snooping on the VLT peers, ensure the value of the delay-restore command is not less than the query interval.
○ VLT peer switches operate as separate chassis with independent control and data planes for devices attached on non-VLT ports. ○ One device in the VLT domain is assigned a primary role; the other device takes the secondary role. The primary and secondary roles are required for scenarios when connectivity between the chassis is lost. VLT assigns the primary chassis role according to the lowest MAC address. You can configure the primary role manually.
● ● ● ● ● ○ In order that the chassis backup link does not share the same physical path as the interconnect trunk, Dell EMC Networking recommends using the management ports on the chassis and traverse an out-of-band management network. The backup link can use user ports, but not the same ports the interconnect trunk uses. ○ The chassis backup link does not carry control plane information or data traffic. Its use is restricted to health checks only.
○ In a VLT domain, VRRP interoperates with virtual link trunks that carry traffic to and from access devices (see Overview). The VLT peers belong to the same VRRP group and are assigned master and backup roles. Each peer actively forwards L3 traffic, reducing the traffic flow over the VLT interconnect. ○ VRRP elects the router with the highest priority as the master in the VRRP group.
● Configure any ports at the edge of the spanning tree’s operating domain as edge ports, which are directly connected to end stations or server racks. Disable RSTP on ports connected directly to Layer 3-only routers not running STP or configure them as edge ports. ● Ensure that the primary VLT node is the root bridge and the secondary VLT peer node has the second-best bridge ID in the network.
VLT Port Delayed Restoration When a VLT node boots up, if the VLT ports have been previously saved in the start-up configuration, they are not immediately enabled. To ensure MAC and ARP entries from the VLT per node are downloaded to the newly enabled VLT node, the system allows time for the VLT ports on the new node to be enabled and begin receiving traffic. The delay-restore feature waits for all saved configurations to be applied, then starts a configurable timer.
Figure 138. PIM-Sparse Mode Support on VLT On each VLAN where the VLT peer nodes act as the first hop or last hop routers, one of the VLT peer nodes is elected as the PIM designated router. If you configured IGMP snooping along with PIM on the VLT VLANs, you must configure VLTi as the static multicast router port on both VLT peer switches. This ensures that for first hop routers, the packets from the source are redirected to the designated router (DR) if they are incorrectly hashed.
If the VLT node elected as the designated router fails and you enable VLT Multicast Routing, multicast routes are synced to the other peer for traffic forwarding to ensure minimal traffic loss. If you did not enable VLT Multicast Routing, traffic loss occurs until the other VLT peer is selected as the DR. VLT Routing VLT Routing refers to the ability to run a dynamic routing protocol within a single VLT domain or between VLT domains (mVLT).
If you enable peer routing, a VLT node acts as a proxy gateway for its connected VLT peer as shown in the image below. Even though the gateway address of the packet is different, Peer-1 routes the packet to its destination on behalf of Peer-2 to avoid sub-optimal routing. Figure 140. Packets with peer routing enabled Benefits of Peer Routing ● ● Avoids sub-optimal routing ● Reduces latency by avoiding another hop in the traffic path.
Configuring VLT Unicast To enable and configure VLT unicast, follow these steps. 1. Enable VLT on a switch, then configure a VLT domain and enter VLT-domain configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode vlt domain domain-id 2. Enable peer-routing. VLT DOMAIN mode peer-routing 3. Configure the peer-routing timeout. VLT DOMAIN mode peer-routing—timeout value value: Specify a value (in seconds) from 1 to 65535. The default value is infinity (without configuring the timeout).
3. Configure the multicast peer-routing timeout. VLT DOMAIN mode multicast peer-routing—timeout value value: Specify a value (in seconds) from 1 to 1200. NOTE: Reduce the multicast peer-routing-timeout value to 10 seconds to clear the (S,G) entry in mroute in primary VLT peer. Also, the MLD leave packet must be sent after the unicast route convergence. 4. Configure a PIM-SM compatible VLT node as a designated router (DR). For more information, refer to Configuring a Designated Router. 5.
Sample RSTP configuration The following is a sample of an RSTP configuration: Using the example shown in the Overview section as a sample VLT topology, the primary VLT switch sends BPDUs to an access device (switch or server) with its own RSTP bridge ID. BPDUs generated by an RSTP-enabled access device are only processed by the primary VLT switch. The secondary VLT switch tunnels the BPDUs that it receives to the primary VLT switch over the VLT interconnect.
Configuring a VLT Interconnect To configure a VLT interconnect, follow these steps. 1. Configure the port channel for the VLT interconnect on a VLT switch and enter interface configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface port-channel id-number Enter the same port-channel number configured with the peer-link port-channel command as described in Enabling VLT and Creating a VLT Domain. NOTE: To be included in the VLTi, the port channel must be in Default mode (no switchport or VLAN assigned). 2.
VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-link port-channel id-number 4. Enable peer routing. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-routing If you enable peer routing, a VLT node acts as the proxy gateway for its peer. 5. (Optional) After you configure a VLT domain on each peer switch and connect (cable) the two VLT peers on each side of the VLT interconnect, the system elects a primary and secondary VLT peer device (see Primary and Secondary VLT Peers).
The range of domain IDs from 1 to 1000. 2. Enter an amount of time, in seconds, to delay the restoration of the VLT ports after the system is rebooted. CONFIGURATION mode delay-restore delay-restore-time The range is from 1 to 1200. The default is 90 seconds. Reconfiguring the Default VLT Settings (Optional) To reconfigure the default VLT settings, use the following commands. 1. Enter VLT-domain configuration mode for a specified VLT domain.
INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode switchport 4. Add one or more port interfaces to the port channel. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode channel-member interface interface: specify one of the following interface types: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the [/subport]rt/subport information.
channel-member interface interface: specify one of the following interface types: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/por[/subport]t information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
12. Add links to the eVLT port. Configure a range of interfaces to bulk configure. CONFIGURATION mode interface range {port-channel id} 13. Enable LACP on the LAN port. INTERFACE mode port-channel-protocol lacp 14. Configure the LACP port channel mode. INTERFACE mode port-channel number mode [active] 15. Ensure that the interface is active. MANAGEMENT INTERFACE mode no shutdown 16. Enable peer routing.
EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode show interfaces interface 11. In the top of rack unit, configure LACP in the physical ports. EXEC Privilege mode show running-config entity 12. Verify that VLT is running. EXEC mode show vlt brief or show vlt detail 13. Verify that the VLT LAG is running in both VLT peer units. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode show interfaces interface In the following sample VLT configuration steps, VLT peer 1 is Dell-2, VLT peer 2 is Dell-4, and the ToR is S60-1.
Codes: L - LACP Port-channel L LAG 2 Mode L2L3 Status up Uptime 03:33:14 Ports Tf 1/4 (Up) In the ToR unit, configure LACP on the physical ports.
Dell-4#show interfaces port-channel 2 brief Codes: L - LACP Port-channel LAG L 2 Mode L2L3 Status up Uptime 03:33:31 Ports Tf 1/18 (Up) PVST+ Configuration PVST+ is supported in a VLT domain. Before you configure VLT on peer switches, configure PVST+ in the network. PVST+ is required for initial loop prevention during the VLT startup phase. You may also use PVST+ for loop prevention in the network outside of the VLT port channel. Run PVST+ on both VLT peer switches.
Tf 1/10 DellEMC# Desg 128.233 128 2000 FWD 0 P2P No Peer Routing Configuration Example This section provides a detailed explanation of how to configure peer routing in a VLT domain. In the following example, devices are configured as follows: ● ● ● ● ● ● Access switch A1 is connected to two VLT peers (Dell-1 and Dell-2). The two VLT peers are connected to an upstream switch R1. OSPF is configured in Dell-1, Dell-2, and R1 switches. Dell-1 is configured as the root bridge.
no disable vlan 1,20,800,900 bridge-priority 0 The following output shows the existing VLANs. DellEMC#1#show vlan | find NUM NUM Status * 1 Active Description Q U 20 Active OSPF PEERING VLAN 800 900 Active Active Client-VLAN Client-VLAN-2 Ports U Po10 (Te 0/0-1) U Te 0/4,47 Po1 (Te 0/6) V Po10 (Te 0/0-1) V Po10 (Te 0/0-1) V Po10 (Te 0/0-1) The following is the configuration in interfaces: DellEMC#1#sh run int ma 1/1 interface ManagementEthernet 0/0 description Used_for_VLT_Keepalive ip address 10.
Port channel 1 connects the uplink switch R1. DellEMC#1#sh run int po1 interface Port-channel 1 description port-channel_to_R1 no ip address switchport vlt-peer-lag port-channel 1 no shutdown Port channel 2 connects the access switch A1. DellEMC#1#sh run int po2 interface Port-channel 2 description port-channel_to_access_switch_A1 no ip address portmode hybrid switchport vlt-peer-lag port-channel 2 no shutdown Vlan 20 is used in Dell-1, Dell-2, and R1 to form OSPF adjacency.
Peer routing : Peer routing-Timeout timer: Multicast peer routing timeout: Enabled 0 seconds 150 seconds Verify that the heartbeat mechanism is operational DellEMC#1#sh vlt backup-link VLT Backup Link ----------------Destination: Peer HeartBeat status: Destination VRF: HeartBeat Timer Interval: HeartBeat Timeout: UDP Port: HeartBeat Messages Sent: HeartBeat Messages Received: 10.10.10.
Hardware is DellEMCEth, address is 90:b1:1c:f4:2c:bd Hardware is DellEMCEth, address is 90:b1:1c:f4:2c:bd ! Output truncated for brevity Verify if peer routing has populated the CAM table with the correct information using the show cam mac command.
The following example shows that te 0/0 and te 0/1 are included in port channel 10. Also note that configuration on the VLTi links does not contain the switchport command. Dell-2#sh run int po10 interface Port-channel 10 description VLTi Port-Channel no ip address channel-member TwentyfiveGigE 1/1-1/2 no shutdown Te 1/4 connects to the access switch A1.
The following output shows Dell-2 is configured with VLT domain 1. The peer-link port-channel command makes port channel 10 as the VLTi link. The peer-routing command enables peer routing between VLT peers in VLT domain 1. The IP address configured with the backup-destination command is the management IP address of the VLT peer (Dell-1). A priority value of 55000 makes Dell-2 as the secondary VLT peer. Dell-2#sh run | find vlt vlt domain 1 peer-link port-channel 10 back-up destination 10.10.10.
passive-interface default no passive-interface vlan 20 While the passive-interface default command prevents all interfaces from establishing an OSPF neighborship, the no passiveinterface vlan 20 command allows the interface for VLAN 20, the OSPF peering VLAN, to establish OSPF adjacencies. The following output displays that Dell-1 forms neighborship with Dell-2 and R1. Dell-2#show ip ospf neighbor Neighbor ID Pri State Area 172.17.1.1 1 FULL/DR 0 172.15.1.
R1#show run int port-channel 1 interface Port-channel1 switchport ip address 192.168.20.3 255.255.255.248 R1#show run | find router router ospf 1 router-id 172.15.1.1 passive-interface default no passive-interface Port-channel1 network 2.2.2.0 0.0.0.255 area 0 network 3.3.3.0 0.0.0.255 area 0 network 4.4.4.0 0.0.0.255 area 0 (The above subnets correspond to loopback interfaces lo2, lo3 and lo4. These three loopback interfaces are advertised to the VLT pair, DellEMC#1 and DellEMC#2) network 172.15.1.0 0.0.0.
When A1 sends a packet to R1, the VLT peers act as the default gateway for each other. If the packet reaches Dell-1, irrespective of the default gateway used, Dell-1 routes the packet to R1. Similarly, if the packet reaches Dell-2, irrespective of the default gateway used, Dell-2 routes the packet to R1. eVLT Configuration Example The following example demonstrates the steps to configure enhanced VLT (eVLT) in a network. In this example, you are configuring two domains.
Next, configure the VLT domain and VLTi on Peer 2. Domain_1_Peer2#configure Domain_1_Peer2(conf)#interface port-channel 1 Domain_1_Peer2(conf-if-po-1)# channel-member twentyFiveGigE 1/8-1/9 Domain_1_Peer2(conf) #vlt domain Domain_1_Peer2(conf-vlt-domain)# Domain_1_Peer2(conf-vlt-domain)# Domain_1_Peer2(conf-vlt-domain)# Domain_1_Peer2(conf-vlt-domain)# Domain_1_Peer2(conf-vlt-domain)# 1000 peer-link port-channel 1 back-up destination 10.16.130.
Configure eVLT on Peer 4. Domain_2_Peer4(conf)#interface port-channel 100 Domain_2_Peer4(conf-if-po-100)# switchport Domain_2_Peer4(conf-if-po-100)# vlt-peer-lag port-channel 100 Domain_2_Peer4(conf-if-po-100)# no shutdown Add links to the eVLT port-channel on Peer 4.
EXEC mode show vlt backup-link ● Display general status information about VLT domains currently configured on the switch. EXEC mode show vlt brief ● Display detailed information about the VLT-domain configuration, including local and peer port-channel IDs, local VLT switch status, and number of active VLANs on each port channel.
HeartBeat Messages Sent: 1030 HeartBeat Messages Received: 1014 The following example shows the show vlt brief command.
Dell_VLTpeer2# show running-config vlt ! vlt domain 30 peer-link port-channel 60 back-up destination 10.11.200.20 The following example shows the show vlt statistics command.
Additional VLT Sample Configurations To configure VLT, configure a backup link and interconnect trunk, create a VLT domain, configure a backup link and interconnect trunk, and connect the peer switches in a VLT domain to an attached access device (switch or server). Review the following examples of VLT configurations. Configuring Virtual Link Trunking (VLT Peer 1) Enable VLT and create a VLT domain with a backup-link and interconnect trunk (VLTi).
Configure the VLT interconnect (VLTi). Dell_VLTpeer2(conf)#interface port-channel 100 Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-if-po-100)#no ip address Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-if-po-100)#channel-member fortyGigE 1/52/1,1/53/1 Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-if-po-100)#no shutdown Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-if-po-100)#exit Configure the port channel to an attached device.
Table 129. Troubleshooting VLT (continued) Description Behavior at Peer Up Behavior During Run Time Action to Take Dell EMC Networking OS Version mismatch A syslog error message is generated. A syslog error message is generated. Follow the correct upgrade procedure for the unit with the mismatched Dell EMC Networking OS version. Remote VLT port channel status N/A N/A Use the show vlt detail and show vlt brief commands to view the VLT port channel status information.
6. On the Secondary switch (stack-unit 2), enter the command stack-unit 2 renumber 1. 7. Confirm the reload query. 8. After reloading, confirm that VLT is enabled. 9. Confirm that the management ports are interconnected or connected to a switch that can transfer Heartbeat information. Specifying VLT Nodes in a PVLAN You can configure VLT peer nodes in a private VLAN (PVLAN).
functionalities in a PVLAN. For example, if a VLAN is a primary VLT VLAN on one peer and not a primary VLT VLAN on the other peer, VLTi is not made a part of that VLAN. MAC Synchronization for VLT Nodes in a PVLAN For the MAC addresses that are learned on non-VLT ports, MAC address synchronization is performed with the other peer if the VLTi (ICL) link is part of the same VLAN as the non-VLT port.
Scenarios for VLAN Membership and MAC Synchronization With VLT Nodes in PVLAN The following table illustrates the association of the VLTi link and PVLANs, and the MAC synchronization of VLT nodes in a PVLAN (for various modes of operations of the VLT peers): Table 130.
Table 130.
vlt domain domain-id The range of domain IDs is from 1 to 1000. 7. Enter the port-channel number that acts as the interconnect trunk. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-link port-channel id-number 8. (Optional) To configure a VLT LAG, enter the VLAN ID number of the VLAN where the VLT forwards packets received on the VLTi from an adjacent peer that is down. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-link port-channel id-number peer-down-vlan vlan interface number Associating the VLT LAG or VLT VLAN in a PVLAN 1.
Proxy ARP Capability on VLT Peer Nodes The proxy ARP functionality is supported on VLT peer nodes. A proxy ARP-enabled device answers the ARP requests that are destined for the other router in a VLT domain. The local host forwards the traffic to the proxy ARP-enabled device, which in turn transmits the packets to the destination. By default, proxy ARP is enabled. To disable proxy ARP, use the no proxy-arp command in Interface mode. To re-enable proxy ARP, use the ip proxy-arp command in Interface mode.
The VLT node, where the ICL link is deleted, flushes the peer IP addresses and does not perform proxy ARP for the additional LAG hashed ARP requests. VLT Nodes as Rendezvous Points for Multicast Resiliency You can configure VLT peer nodes as rendezvous points (RPs) in a Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) domain. PIM uses a VLT node as the RP to distribute multicast traffic to a multicast group.
Configure the VLT domain DellEMC(conf)#vlt domain 1 DellEMC(conf-vlt-domain)#peer-link port-channel 1 DellEMC(conf-vlt-domain)#back-up destination 10.16.151.116 DellEMC(conf-vlt-domain)#primary-priority 100 DellEMC(conf-vlt-domain)#system-mac mac-address 00:00:00:11:11:11 DellEMC(conf-vlt-domain)#unit-id 0 DellEMC(conf-vlt-domain)# DellEMC#show running-config vlt ! vlt domain 1 peer-link port-channel 1 back-up destination 10.16.151.
Verify that the Port Channels used in the VLT Domain are Assigned to the VLAN-Stack VLAN DellEMC#show vlan id 50 Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs, R - Remote Port Mirroring VLANs, P - Primary, C - Community, I - Isolated O - Openflow Q: U - Untagged, T - Tagged x - Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged o - OpenFlow untagged, O - OpenFlow tagged G - GVRP tagged, M - Vlan-stack i - Internal untagged, I - Internal tagged, v - VLT untagged, V - VLT tagged NUM 50 Status Active Description DellEMC# Q M M V
Configure the VLAN as a VLAN-Stack VLAN and add the VLT LAG as members to the VLAN DellEMC(conf)#interface vlan 50 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-50)#vlan-stack compatible DellEMC(conf-if-vl-50-stack)#member port-channel 10 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-50-stack)#member port-channel 20 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-50-stack)# DellEMC#show running-config interface vlan 50 ! interface Vlan 50 vlan-stack compatible member Port-channel 10,20 shutdown DellEMC# Verify that the Port Channels used in the VLT Domain are Assigned to the VLAN-Stack VL
IPv6 Peer Routing When you enable peer routing on VLT nodes, the MAC address of the peer VLT node is stored in the ternary content addressable memory (TCAM) space table of a station. If the data traffic destined to a VLT node, node1, reaches the other VLT node, node2, owing to LAG-level hashing in the ToR switch, it is routed instead of forwarding the packet to node1. This processing occurs because of the match or hit for the entry in the TCAM of the VLT node2.
control information present in the tunneled NA packet is processed in such a way so that the ingress port is marked as the link from Node B to Unit 2 rather than pointing to ICL link through which tunneled NA arrived. Figure 143. Sample Configuration of IPv6 Peer Routing in a VLT Domain Sample Configuration of IPv6 Peer Routing in a VLT Domain Consider a sample scenario as shown in the following figure in which two VLT nodes, Unit1 and Unit2, are connected in a VLT domain using an ICL or VLTi link.
Neighbor Solicitation from VLT Hosts Consider a case in which NS for VLT node1 IP reaches VLT node1 on the VLT interface and NS for VLT node1 IP reaches VLT node2 due to LAG level hashing in the ToR. When VLT node1 receives NS from VLT VLAN interface, it unicasts the NA packet on the VLT interface. When NS reaches VLT node2, it is flooded on all interfaces including ICL. When VLT node 1 receives NS on ICL, it floods the NA packet on the VLAN.
When VLT node receives traffic from non-VLT host intended to VLT host, it routes the traffic to VLT interface. If VLT interface is not operationally up VLT node will route the traffic over ICL. Non-VLT host to North Bound traffic flow When VLT node receives traffic from non-VLT host intended to north bound with DMAC as self MAC it routes traffic to next hop.
ToR 1. Enable BFD globally. TOR(conf)# bfd enable 2. Configure a VLT peer LAG. TOR(conf)#interface twentyFiveGigE 1/1 TOR(conf-if-tf-1/1)#no ip address TOR(conf-if-tf-1/1)#port-channel-protocol lacp TOR(conf-if-tf-1/1)#port-channel 10 mode active TOR(conf-if-tf-1/1)#no shutdown TOR(conf)#interface twentyFiveGigE 1/2 TOR(conf-if-tf-1/2)#no ip address TOR(conf-if-tf-1/2)#port-channel-protocol lacp TOR(conf-if-tf-1/2)#port-channel 10 mode active TOR(conf-if-tf-1/2)#no shutdown 3.
5. Enable BFD over OSPF. TOR(conf)# router ospf 1 TOR(conf-router_ospf)# network 100.1.1.0/24 area 0 TOR(conf-router_ospf)# bfd all-neighbors VLT Primary 1. Enable BFD globally. VLT_Primary(conf)# bfd enable 2. Configure port channel which is used as VLTi link. VLT_Primary(conf)# interface VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-100)# VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-100)# VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-100)# port-channel 100 no ip address channel-member twentyFiveGigE 1/1, 1/2 no shutdown 3. Enable VLT and configure a VLT domain.
2. Configure port channel which is used as VLTi link. VLT_Secondary(conf)# interface VLT_Secondary(conf-if-po-100)# VLT_Secondary(conf-if-po-100)# VLT_Secondary(conf-if-po-100)# port-channel 100 no ip address channel-member twentyFiveGigE 1/1, 1/2 no shutdown 3. Enable VLT and configure a VLT domain. VLT_Secondary(conf)# vlt domain VLT_Secondary(conf-vlt-domain)# VLT_Secondary(conf-vlt-domain)# VLT_Secondary(conf-vlt-domain)# 100 peer-link port-channel 100 back-up destination 10.16.206.
Delay-Restore Abort Threshold: Peer-Routing : Peer-Routing-Timeout timer: Multicast peer-routing timeout: 60 seconds Enabled 0 seconds 150 seconds ● To verify the VLTi (ICL) link is up in the VLT secondary peer, use show vlt brief command.
59 VLT Proxy Gateway The virtual link trucking (VLT) proxy gateway feature allows a VLT domain to locally terminate and route L3 packets that are destined to a Layer 3 (L3) end point in another VLT domain. Enable the VLT proxy gateway using the link layer discover protocol (LLDP) method or the static configuration. For more information, see the Command Line Reference Guide.
Figure 145. Sample Configuration for a VLT Proxy Gateway Guidelines for Enabling the VLT Proxy Gateway Keep the following points in mind when you enable a VLT proxy gateway: ● Proxy gateway is supported only for VLT; for example, across a VLT domain. ● You must enable the VLT peer-routing command for the VLT proxy gateway to function.
● Private VLANs (PVLANs) are not supported. ● When a Virtual Machine (VM) moves from one VLT domain to the another VLT domain, the VM host sends the gratuitous ARP (GARP) , which in-turn triggers a mac movement from the previous VLT domain to the newer VLT domain. ● After a station move, if the host sends a TTL1 packet destined to its gateway; for example, a previous VLT node, the packet can be dropped.
● You cannot have interface–level LLDP disable commands on the interfaces configured for proxy gateway and you must enable both transmission and reception. ● You must connect both units of the remote VLT domain by the port channel member. ● If you connect more than one port to a unit of the remote VLT domain, the connection must be completed by the time you enable the proxy gateway LLDP. ● You cannot have other conflicting configurations (for example, you cannot have a static proxy gateway configuration).
For VLT Proxy Gateway to work in this scenario you must configure the VLT-peer-mac transmit command under VLT Domain Proxy Gateway LLDP mode, in both C and D (VLT domain 1) and C1 and D1 (VLT domain 2). This behavior is applicable only in the LLDP configuration and not required in the static configuration.
Sample Dynamic Proxy Configuration on C switch or C1 switch Switch_C#conf Switch_C(conf)#vlt domain 1 Switch_C(conf-vlt-domain1)#proxy-gateway lldp Switch_C(conf-vlt-domain1-pxy-gw-lldp)#peer-domain-link port-channel 1.... VLT Proxy Gateway Sample Topology VLT proxy gateway enables one VLT domain to act as proxy gateway for another VLT domain when a host or virtual machine is moved from one VLT domain to the other VLT domain.
interface TwentyfiveGigE 1/9 description "To DELL-3 10Gb" no ip address ! port-channel-protocol LACP port-channel 50 mode active no shutdown interface Port-channel 50 description "mVLT port channel to DELL-3" no ip address switchport no spanning-tree vlt-peer-lag port-channel 50 no shutdown Note that on the inter-domain link, the switchport command is enabled. On a VLTi link between VLT peers in a VLT domain, the switchport command is not used.
The MAC addresses, configured using the remote-mac-address command, belong to Dell-3 and Dell-4. interface Vlan 100 description OSPF peering VLAN to Dell-1 ip address 10.10.100.2/30 ip ospf network point-to-point no shutdown The following is the OSPF configuration on Dell-2. router ospf 1 router-id 2.2.2.2 network 10.10.100.0/30 area 0 The following output shows that Dell-1 forms OSPF neighborship with Dell-2. Dell-2#sh ip ospf nei Neighbor ID Pri State Dead Time Address Interface Area 4.4.4.
ip ospf network point-to-point no shutdown The following is the OSPF configuration on Dell-3. router ospf 1 router-id 3.3.3.3 network 10.10.101.0/30 area 0 network 10.10.102.0/30 area 0 The following output shows that Dell-4 and VLT domain 120 form OSPF neighborship with Dell-3. Dell-3#sh ip ospf nei ! Neighbor ID Pri State Dead Time Address Interface Area 4.4.4.4 1 FULL/ - 00:00:33 10.10.101.1 Vl 101 0 1.1.1.1 1 FULL/ - 00:00:34 10.10.102.
60 Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN) Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN) is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. Overview The switch acts as the VXLAN gateway and performs the VXLAN Tunnel End Point (VTEP) functionality. VXLAN is a technology where in the data traffic from the virtualized servers is transparently transported over an existing legacy network. Figure 148. VXLAN Gateway NOTE: In a stack setup, the Dell EMC Networking OS does not support VXLAN.
Components of VXLAN network VXLAN provides a mechanism to extend an L2 network over an L3 network. In short, VXLAN is an L2 overlay scheme over an L3 network and this overlay is termed as a VXLAN segment.
Functional Overview of VXLAN Gateway The following section is the functional overview of VXLAN Gateway: 1. Provides connectivity between a Virtual server infrastructure and a Physical server infrastructure. 2. Provides the functions performed by a VTEP in a virtual server infrastructure. The functions of a VTEP are: ● VTEP is responsible for creating one or more logical networks. ● VTEP is responsible for identifying and binding a Port and VLAN to a logical network ● VTEP maintains MAC bindings to a VTEP.
● Ethertype: It is set to 0×0800 because the payload packet is an IPv4 packet. The initial VXLAN draft does not include an IPv6 implementation, but it is planned for the next draft. Outer IP Header: The Outer IP Header consists of the following components: ● Protocol: It is set to 0×11 to indicate that the frame contains a UDP packet . ● Source IP: It is the IP address of originating VTEP. ● Destination IP: : It is the IP address of target VTEP.
sSFKBohqu40EWXIBJ0QbKvFWv91rbjkgtsrHVTdohrA== -----END CERTIFICATE----Copy and paste the generated certificate to the NSX. NOTE: Once controller connectivity is established from VLT peers, if you want to generate a new certificate and use it for controller connection, generate the certificate from the node (node that is directly connected to controller). If you do not generate a new certificate from the node, system shows inconsistent behavior. 2. Create a VXLAN Gateway.
Figure 151. Hardware Devices 3. Add a service node or replicator. Under Home > Networking and Security > Service Definition > Hardware Devices > Replication Cluster, click the Edit button. Select required hosts for replication and click OK. Figure 152. Add Service Node or Replicator NOTE: Ensure L3 reachability between the VTEP and the replicator. 4. Create Logical Switch. You can create a logical network by creating a logical switch.
Figure 153. Create Logical Switch 5. Create Logical Switch Port. A logical switch port provides a logical connection point for a VM interface (VIF) and a L2 gateway connection to an external network. It binds the virtual access ports in the gateway to logical network (VXLAN) and VLAN. In the Manage Hardware Bindings window, expand a VTEP and click Add. The Manage Hardware Bindings Window opens. Click the Select link and the Specify Hardware Port window opens. Click the hardware port and click OK.
Figure 155. Create Logical Switch Port 6. (Optional) Enable or disable BFD globally. Go to Hardware Devices tab > BFD Configuration, and click the Edit button. The Edit BFD Configuration windows opens. Check or uncheck the Enable BFD check box. You can also change the probe interval if required. Figure 156. Edit VXLAN BFD Configuration NOTE: For more details about NSX controller configuration, refer to the NSX user guide from VMWare .
2. Advertising VXLAN access ports to controller Connecting to an NVP Controller To connect to an NVP controller, use the following commands. 1. Enable the VXLAN feature. CONFIGURATION mode feature vxlan You must configure feature VXLAN to configure vxlan-instance. 2. Create a VXLAN instance that connects to the controller. CONFIGURATION mode vxlan-instance instance ID {nsx | Nuage} Use the nsx keyword to connect to an NSX controller. Use the nuage keyword to connect to a Nuage controller.
Displaying VXLAN Configurations To display the VXLAN configurations, use the following commands. The following example shows the show vxlan vxlan-instance command. DellEMC#show vxlan vxlan-instance 1 Instance : 1 Mode : Controller Admin State : enabled Controller Type : Nsx Management IP : 10.16.140.34 Gateway IP : 4.3.3.3 MAX Backoff : 8000 Controller : 10.16.140.181:6640 ssl Controller Cluster : : 10.16.140.181:6640 ssl (connected) : 10.16.140.182:6640 ssl (connected) : 10.16.140.
The following example shows the show vxlan vxlan-instance unicast-mac-remote command. DellEMC# show vxlan vxlan-instance <1> unicast-mac-remote Total Local Mac Count: 1 VNI MAC TUNNEL 4656 00:00:01:00:00:01 36.1.1.1 The following example shows the show vxlan vxlan-instance unicast-mac-remote command when the tunnel is down. DellEMC# show vxlan vxlan-instance <1> unicast-mac-remote Total Local Mac Count: 1 VNI MAC TUNNEL 4656 00:00:01:00:00:01 36.1.1.
no shutdown 8. Enable VXLAN instance on the interface. The interface should not be on layer 2. INTERFACE mode vxlan-instance Instance ID 9. Associate VNID to VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode vxlan-vnid VNID Limitations on VXLAN While configuring a VXLAN, the following conditions apply: ● Hybrid ports are not supported in VXLAN (hybrid port means an interface tagged to one VLAN and untagged to another VLAN).
The following example displays VXLAN statistics for a specific port and VLAN combination. DellEMC# show vxlan statistics interface tf 1/1 vlan 2 Statistics for Port : Tf 1/1 Vlan : 2 Rx Packets : 0 Rx Bytes : 0 Tx Packets : 0 Tx Bytes : 0 The following example displays VXLAN statistics for the specified VXLAN tunnel. DellEMC# show vxlan vxlan-instance 1 statistics remote-vtep-ip 1.1.1.1 Statistics for Remote-vtep-ip : 1.1.1.
A 4097 L3 up 00:00:09 Hu Hu Hu Hu Hu Hu Hu Hu Hu 1/55 1/56 1/57 1/58 1/59 1/60 1/61 1/62 1/63 (Up) (Up) (Up) (Up) (Up) (Up) (Up) (Up) (Up) Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN) 987
61 Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) allows a physical router to partition itself into multiple Virtual Routers (VRs). The control and data plane are isolated in each VR so that traffic does NOT flow across VRs.Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) allows multiple instances of a routing table to co-exist within the same router at the same time.
Figure 157. VRF Network Example VRF Configuration Notes Although there is no restriction on the number of VLANs that can be assigned to a VRF instance, the total number of routes supported in VRF is limited by the size of the IPv4 CAM. VRF is implemented in a network device by using Forwarding Information Bases (FIBs). A network device may have the ability to configure different virtual routers, where entries in the FIB that belong to one VRF cannot be accessed by another VRF on the same device.
NOTE: To configure a router ID in a non-default VRF, configure at least one IP address in both the default as well as the non-default VRF. Table 131. Software Features Supported on VRF Feature/Capability Support Status for Default VRF Support Status for Non-default VRF 802.
DHCP DHCP requests are not forwarded across VRF instances. The DHCP client and server must be on the same VRF instance. VRF Configuration The VRF configuration tasks are: 1. Enabling VRF in Configuration Mode 2. Creating a Non-Default VRF 3. Assign an Interface to a VRF You can also: ● View VRF Instance Information ● Connect an OSPF Process to a VRF Instance ● Configure VRRP on a VRF Loading VRF CAM ● Load CAM memory for the VRF feature.
2. Assign the interface to management VRF. INTERFACE CONFIGURATION ip vrf forwarding management Before assigning a front-end port to a management VRF, ensure that no IP address is configured on the interface. 3. Assign an IPv4 address to the interface. INTERFACE CONFIGURATION ip address 10.1.1.1/24 Before assigning a front-end port to a management VRF, ensure that no IP address is configured on the interface. 4. Assign an IPv6 address to the interface.
Table 132. Configuring VRRP on a VRF (continued) Task Command Syntax Assign an IP address to the interface Configure the VRRP group and virtual IP address View VRRP command output for the VRF vrf1 Command Mode ip address 10.1.1.1 /24 no shutdown vrrp-group 10 virtual-address 10.1.1.100 show config ----------------------------! interface twentyFiveGigE 1/13 ip vrf forwarding vrf1 ip address 10.1.1.1/24 ! vrrp-group 10 virtual-address 10.1.1.
● ● ● ● ● ● ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 nd reachable-time — Set advertised reachability time nd retrans-timer — Set NS retransmit interval used and advertised in RA nd suppress-ra — Suppress IPv6 Router Advertisements ad — IPv6 Address Detection ad autoconfig — IPv6 stateless auto-configuration address — Configure IPv6 address on an interface NOTE: The command line help still displays relevant details corresponding to each of these commands.
Figure 159. Setup VRF Interfaces The following example relates to the configuration shown in the above illustrations. Router 1 ip vrf blue 1 ! ip vrf orange 2 ! ip vrf green 3 ! interface twentyFiveGigE 3/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface twentyFiveGigE 1/1/ ip vrf forwarding blue ip address 10.0.0.1/24 no shutdown ! interface twentyFiveGigE 1/2 ip vrf forwarding orange ip address 20.0.0.1/24 no shutdown ! interface twentyFiveGigE 1/3 ip vrf forwarding green ip address 30.0.0.
ip vrf forwarding blue ip address 1.0.0.1/24 tagged twentyFiveGigE 3/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 192 ip vrf forwarding orange ip address 2.0.0.1/24 tagged twentyFiveGigE 3/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 256 ip vrf forwarding green ip address 3.0.0.1/24 tagged twentyFiveGigE 3/1 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 vrf blue router-id 1.0.0.1 network 1.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 10.0.0.0/24 area 0 ! router ospf 2 vrf orange router-id 2.0.0.1 network 2.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 20.0.0.
! router ospf 1 vrf blue router-id 1.0.0.2 network 11.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 1.0.0.0/24 area 0 passive-interface TwentyfiveGigE 1/8 ! router ospf 2 vrf orange router-id 2.0.0.2 network 21.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 2.0.0.0/24 area 0 passive-interface TwentyfiveGigE 1/9 ! ip route vrf green30.0.0.0/24 3.0.0.1 ! The following shows the output of the show commands on Router 1.
Change --------------------C 2.0.0.0/24 C 20.0.0.0/24 O 21.0.0.0/24 00:10:41 ------Direct, Vl 192 Direct, Tf 1/2 via 2.0.0.
You can also leak global routes to be made available to VRFs. As the global RTM usually contains a large pool of routes, when the destination VRF imports global routes, these routes will be duplicated into the VRF's RTM. As a result, it is mandatory to use route-maps to filter out leaked routes while sharing global routes with VRFs. Configuring Route Leaking without Filtering Criteria You can use the ip route-export tag command to export all the IPv4 routes corresponding to a source VRF.
ip address ip—address mask A non-default VRF named VRF-blue is created and the interface 1/12 is assigned to it. 7. Configure the import target in VRF-blue. ip route-import 1:1 8. Configure the export target in VRF-blue. ip route-import 3:3 9. Configure VRF-green. ip vrf vrf-green interface-type slot/port[/subport] ip vrf forwarding VRF-green ip address ip—address mask A non-default VRF named VRF-green is created and the interface is assigned to it. 10.
Show routing tables of VRFs( after route-export and route-import tags are configured). DellEMC# show ip route vrf VRF-Red O C O C 11.1.1.1/32 111.1.1.0/24 44.4.4.4/32 144.4.4.0/24 via 111.1.1.1 110/0 00:00:10 Direct, Te 1/11 0/0 22:39:59 via VRF-shared:144.4.4.4 0/0 00:32:36 Direct, VRF-shared:Tf 1/4 0/0 00:32:36 DellEMC# show ip route vrf VRF-Blue O 22.2.2.2/32 via 122.2.2.2 C O C 122.2.2.0/24 44.4.4.4/32 144.4.4.0/24 110/0 00:00:11 Direct, Tf 1/12 0/0 22:39:61 via vrf-shared:144.4.4.
Consider a scenario where you have created two VRF tables VRF-red and VRF-blue. VRF-red exports routes with the export_ospfbgp_protocol route-map to VRF-blue. VRF-blue imports these routes into its RTM. For leaking these routes from VRF-red to VRF-blue, you can use the ip route-export route-map command on VRF-red (source VRF, that is exporting the routes); you must also specify a match criteria for these routes using the match source-protocol command.
ip route-export 2:2 ip route-import 1:1 import_ospf_protocol !this action accepts only OSPF routes from VRF-red even though both OSPF as well as BGP routes are shared The show VRF commands displays the following output: DellEMC# show ip route vrf VRF-Blue C 122.2.2.0/24 Direct, Tf 1/22 0/0 O 22.2.2.2/32 via 122.2.2.2 110/0 O 44.4.4.4/32 22:39:61 00:00:11 via vrf-red:144.4.4.
62 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP) is designed to eliminate a single point of failure in a statically routed network. Topics: • • • • • VRRP Overview VRRP Benefits VRRP Implementation VRRP Configuration Sample Configurations VRRP Overview VRRP is designed to eliminate a single point of failure in a statically routed network. VRRP specifies a MASTER router that owns the next hop IP and MAC address for end stations on a local area network (LAN).
Figure 160. Basic VRRP Configuration VRRP Benefits With VRRP configured on a network, end-station connectivity to the network is not subject to a single point-of-failure. End-station connections to the network are redundant and are not dependent on internal gateway protocol (IGP) protocols to converge or update routing tables. In conjunction with Virtual Link Trunking (VLT), you can configure optimized forwarding with virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP).
NOTE: In a VLT environment, VRRP configuration acts as active-active and if route is not present in any of the VRRP nodes, the packet to the destination is dropped on that VRRP node. Table 133.
The following examples how to configure VRRP. DellEMC(conf)#interface twentyFiveGigE 1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/1)#vrrp-group 111 DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/1-vrid-111)# The following examples how to verify the VRRP configuration. DellEMC(conf-if-1/1)#show conf ! interface TwentyfiveGigE 1/1 ip address 10.10.10.
2. Set the master switch to VRRP protocol version 3. Dell_master_switch(conf-if-tf-1/1-vrid-100)#version 3 Dell_master_switch(conf-if-tf-1/1/1-vrid-100)#version 3 3. Set the backup switches to version 3. Dell_backup_switch1(conf-if-tf-1/1-vrid-100)#version 3 Dell_backup_switch2(conf-if-tf-1/2-vrid-100)#version 3 Assign Virtual IP addresses Virtual routers contain virtual IP addresses configured for that VRRP group (VRID).
NOTE: In the following example, the primary IP address and the virtual IP addresses are on the same subnet. DellEMC(conf-if-tf-1/1)#show conf ! interface twentyFiveGigE 1/1 ip address 10.10.10.1/24 ! vrrp-group 111 priority 255 virtual-address 10.10.10.1 virtual-address 10.10.10.2 virtual-address 10.10.10.3 ! vrrp-group 222 no shutdown The following example shows the same VRRP group (VRID 111) configured on multiple interfaces on different subnets.
To verify the VRRP group priority, use the show vrrp command. Dellshow vrrp -----------------TwentyfiveGigE 1/1, VRID: 111, Net: 10.10.10.1 VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 255, Master: 10.10.10.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 2343, Gratuitous ARP sent: 5 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:6f Virtual IP address: 10.10.10.1 10.10.10.2 10.10.10.3 10.10.10.10 Authentication: (none) -----------------TwentyfiveGigE 1/2, VRID: 111, Net: 10.
Disabling Preempt The preempt command is enabled by default. The command forces the system to change the MASTER router if another router with a higher priority comes online. Prevent the BACKUP router with the higher priority from becoming the MASTER router by disabling preempt. NOTE: You must configure all virtual routers in the VRRP group the same: you must configure all with preempt enabled or configure all with preempt disabled.
● For VRRPv3, change the advertisement centisecs interval setting. INTERFACE-VRID mode advertise-interval centisecs centisecs The range is from 25 to 4075 centisecs in units of 25 centisecs. The default is 100 centisecs. The following example shows how to change the advertise interval using the advertise-interval command.
Tracking an Interface To track an interface, use the following commands. NOTE: The sum of all the costs for all tracked interfaces must be less than the configured priority of the VRRP group. ● Monitor an interface and, optionally, set a value to be subtracted from the interface’s VRRP group priority. INTERFACE-VRID mode track interface [priority-cost cost] The cost range is from 1 to 254. The default is 10.
The following example shows verifying the VRRP status.
This time is the gap between system boot up completion and VRRP enabling. The seconds range is from 0 to 900. The default is 0. Sample Configurations Before you set up VRRP, review the following sample configurations. VRRP for an IPv4 Configuration The following configuration shows how to enable IPv4 VRRP. This example does not contain comprehensive directions and is intended to provide guidance for only a typical VRRP configuration. You can copy and paste from the example to your CLI.
Examples of Configuring VRRP for IPv4 and IPv6 The following example shows configuring VRRP for IPv4 Router 2. R2(conf)#interface twentyFiveGigE 2/31 R2(conf-if-tf-2/31)#ip address 10.1.1.1/24 R2(conf-if-tf-2/31)#vrrp-group 99 R2(conf-if-tf-2/31-vrid-99)#priority 200 R2(conf-if-tf-2/31-vrid-99)#virtual 10.1.1.3 R2(conf-if-tf-2/31-vrid-99)#no shut R2(conf-if-tf-2/31)#show conf ! interface twentyFiveGigE 2/31 ip address 10.1.1.1/24 ! vrrp-group 99 priority 200 virtual-address 10.1.1.
Figure 162. VRRP for an IPv6 Configuration NOTE: In a VRRP or VRRPv3 group, if two routers come up with the same priority and another router already has MASTER status, the router with master status continues to be MASTER even if one of two routers has a higher IP or IPv6 address. The following example shows configuring VRRP for IPv6 Router 2 and Router 3. Configure a virtual link local (fe80) address for each VRRPv3 group created for an interface.
vrrp-group 10 priority 100 virtual-address fe80::10 virtual-address 1::10 no shutdown R2(conf-if-tf-1/1)#end R2#show vrrp -----------------twentyFiveGigE 1/1, IPv6 VRID: 10, Version: 3, Net:fe80::201:e8ff:fe6a:c59f VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:fe6a:c59f (local) Hold Down: 0 centisec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 100 centisec Accept Mode: FALSE, Master AdvInt: 100 centisec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 135 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:02:0a Virtual IP address:
VRRP groups on each VRF instance in order that there is one MASTER and one backup router for each VRF. In VRF-1 and VRF-2, Switch-2 serves as owner-master of the VRRP group and Switch-1 serves as the backup. On VRF-3, Switch-1 is the owner-master and Switch-2 is the backup. In VRF-1 and VRF-2 on Switch-2, the virtual IP and node IP address, subnet, and VRRP group are the same.
S1(conf-if-tf-1/2)#no shutdown ! S1(conf)#interface twentyFiveGigE 1/3 S1(conf-if-tf-1/3)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-3 S1(conf-if-tf-1/3)#ip address 20.1.1.5/24 S1(conf-if-tf-1/3)#vrrp-group 15 % Info: The VRID used by the VRRP group 15 in VRF 3 will be 243. S1(conf-if-tf-1/3-vrid-105)#priority 255 S1(conf-if-tf-1/3-vrid-105)#virtual-address 20.1.1.5 S1(conf-if-tf-1/3)#no shutdown DellEMC#show vrrp twentyFiveGigE 1/8 -----------------twentyFiveGigE 1/8, IPv4 VRID: 1, Version: 2, Net: 10.1.1.
This VLAN scenario often occurs in a service-provider network in which you configure VLAN tags for traffic from multiple customers on customer-premises equipment (CPE), and separate VRF instances associated with each VLAN are configured on the provider edge (PE) router in the point-of-presence (POP).
10.1.1.100 Authentication: (none) VRRP in VRF: Switch-2 VLAN Configuration Switch-2 S2(conf)#ip vrf VRF-1 1 ! S2(conf)#ip vrf VRF-2 2 ! S2(conf)#ip vrf VRF-3 3 ! S2(conf)#interface twentyFiveGigE 1/1 S2(conf-if-tf-1/1)#no ip address S2(conf-if-tf-1/1)#switchport S2(conf-if-tf-1/1)#no shutdown ! S2(conf-if-tf-1/1)#interface vlan 100 S2(conf-if-vl-100)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-1 S2(conf-if-vl-100)#ip address 10.10.1.
Port-channel 1, IPv4 VRID: 1, Version: 2, Net: 10.1.1.1 VRF: 2 vrf2 State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: 10.1.1.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 419, Gratuitous ARP sent: 1 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:01 Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.100 Authentication: (none) VRRP for IPv6 Configuration This section shows VRRP IPv6 topology with CLI configurations.
NOTE: In a VRRP or VRRPv3 group, if two routers come up with the same priority and another router already has MASTER status, the router with master status continues to be master even if one of two routers has a higher IP or IPv6 address. Router 2 R2(conf)#interface twentyFiveGigE 1/1 R2(conf-if-tf-1/1)#no ip address R2(conf-if-tf-1/1)#ipv6 address 1::1/64 R2(conf-if-tf-1/1)#vrrp-group 10 NOTE: You must configure a virtual link local (fe80) address for each VRRPv3 group created for an interface.
State: Backup, Priority: 100, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:fe6a:c59f Hold Down: 0 centisec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 100 centisec Accept Mode: FALSE, Master AdvInt: 100 centisec Adv rcvd: 11, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 0 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:02:0a Virtual IP address: 1::10 fe80::10 DellEMC#show vrrp twentyFiveGigE 1/1 twentyFiveGigE 1/1, IPv6 VRID: 255, Version: 3, Net: fe80::201:e8ff:fe8a:fd76 VRF: 0 default State: Backup, Priority: 90, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:fe8a:e9ed Hold Down: 0 centisec, Preempt:
VRF: 2 vrf2 State: Backup, Priority: 90, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:fe8a:e9ed Hold Down: 0 centisec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 100 centisec Accept Mode: FALSE, Master AdvInt: 100 centisec Adv rcvd: 548, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 0 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:02:ff Virtual IP address: 10:1:1::255 fe80::255 1026 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP)
63 Debugging and Diagnostics This chapter describes debugging and diagnostics for the device. Topics: • • • • • • • • • • Offline Diagnostics Trace Logs Auto Save on Crash or Rollover Hardware Watchdog Timer Enabling Environmental Monitoring Buffer Tuning Troubleshooting Packet Loss Enabling Application Core Dumps Mini Core Dumps Enabling TCP Dumps Offline Diagnostics The offline diagnostics test suite is useful for isolating faults and debugging hardware.
NOTE: The system reboots when the offline diagnostics complete. This is an automatic process. The following warning message appears when you implement the offline stack-unit command: Warning - Diagnostic execution will cause stack-unit to reboot after completion of diags. Proceed with Offline-Diags [confirm yes/no]:y After the system goes offline, you must reload or run the online stack-unit stack-unit-number command for the normal operation. 2. Confirm the offline status.
NOTE: Non-management member units do not support this functionality. Hardware Watchdog Timer The hardware watchdog command automatically reboots an Dell EMC Networking OS switch/router with a single RPM that is unresponsive. This is a last resort mechanism intended to prevent a manual power cycle. Enabling Environmental Monitoring The device components use environmental monitoring hardware to detect transmit power readings, receive power readings, and temperature updates.
QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 TX2 TX3 TX4 RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 Bias Current Bias Current Bias Current Power Power Power Power = = = = = = = 0.000mA 0.000mA 0.000mA 0.000mW 0.000mW 0.000mW 0.
Troubleshoot an Over-temperature Condition To troubleshoot an over-temperature condition, use the following information. 1. Use the show environment commands to monitor the temperature levels. 2. Check air flow through the system. Ensure that the air ducts are clean and that all fans are working correctly. 3. After the software has determined that the temperature levels are within normal limits, you can re-power the card safely. To bring back the line card online, use the power-on command in EXEC mode.
Table 134. SNMP Traps and OIDs (continued) OID String OID Name Description .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.6 dellNetFpStatsPerCOSTable View the forwarding plane statistics containing the packet buffer statistics per COS per port. Buffer Tuning Buffer Tuning allows you to modify the way your switch allocates buffers from its available memory and helps prevent packet drops during a temporary burst of traffic.
● show hardware buffer inteface interface{priority-group { id | all } | queue { id| all} | detail} buffer-info ● show hardware buffer-stats-snapshot resource interface interface{priority-group { id | all } | queue { ucast{id | all}{ mcast {id | all} | all} ● show hardware drops interface interface ● clear hardware stack-unit stack-unit-number counters ● clear hardware stack-unit stack-unit-number unit 0-1 counters ● clear hardware stack-unit stack-unit-number cpu data-plane statistics ● clear hardware stack
INVALID VLAN CNTR Drops : 0 L2MC Drops : 0 PKT Drops of ANY Conditions : 0 Hg MacUnderflow : 0 TX Err PKT Counter : 0 --- Error counters--Internal Mac Transmit Errors : 0 Unknown Opcodes : 0 Internal Mac Receive Errors : 0 --- FEC Counters --Ingress FEC uncorrected code words: 172 --- Error Ratio Counters --Ingress preFEC Bit Error Ratio: 3.727463E-11 Ingress FCS Drops Error Ratio : 0.
txPkt(COS9 ) txPkt(COS10) txPkt(COS11) txPkt(UNIT0) :0 :0 :0 :0 Example of Viewing Party Bus Statistics DellEMC#sh hardware stack-unit 1 cpu party-bus statistics Input Statistics: 27550 packets, 2559298 bytes 0 dropped, 0 errors Output Statistics: 1649566 packets, 1935316203 bytes 0 errors Display Stack Member Counters You can use the show hardware command to display internal receive and transmit statistics, based on the selected command option.
RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX 1036 - Byte Counter Control Frame Counter Pause Control Frame Counter Oversized Frame Counter Jabber Frame Counter VLAN Tag Frame Counter Double VLAN Tag Frame Counter RUNT Frame Counter Fragment Counter VLAN Tagged Packets Ingress Dropped Packet MTU Check Error Frame Counter PFC Frame Pri
Enabling Application Core Dumps Application core dumps are disabled by default. A core dump file can be very large. Due to memory requirements the file can only be sent directly to an FTP server; it is not stored on the local flash. To enable full kernel core dumps, use the following command. ● Enable stack unit kernel full core dumps. CONFIGURATION mode logging coredump server To undo this command, use the no logging coredump server command.
flash: 4286574592 bytes total (3953983488 bytes free) Example of a Mini Core Text File VALID MAGIC -----------------PANIC STRING ----------------panic string is : ---------------STACK TRACE START--------------0035d60c : 00274f8c : 0024e2b0 : 0024dee8 : 0024d9c4 : 002522b0 : 0026a8d0 : 0026a00c : ----------------STACK TRACE END-----------------------------------FREE MEM
64 Standards Compliance This chapter describes standards compliance for Dell EMC Networking products. NOTE: Unless noted, when a standard cited here is listed as supported by the Dell EMC Networking OS, the system also supports predecessor standards. One way to search for predecessor standards is to use the http://tools.ietf.org/ website. Click “Browse and search IETF documents,” enter an RFC number, and inspect the top of the resulting document for obsolescence citations to related RFCs.
RFC and I-D Compliance Dell EMC Networking OS supports the following standards. The standards are grouped by related protocol. The columns showing support by platform indicate which version of Dell EMC Networking OS first supports the standard. General Internet Protocols The following table lists the Dell EMC Networking OS support per platform for general internet protocols. Table 135.
Table 135. General Internet Protocols (continued) R F C # Full Name S-Series S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 6 0 Transfer Protocol 2 4 7 4 Definition of 7.7.1 the Differentiate d Services Field (DS Field) in the IPv4 and IPv6 Headers 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 2 PPP over 61 SONET/SD 5 H 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 2 6 9 8 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.
Table 136. General IPv4 Protocols (continued) RF C# Full Name S-Series S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 103 DOMAIN NAMES 5 IMPLEMENTATION AND SPECIFICATION (client) 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 104 A Standard for the 2 Transmission of IP Datagrams over IEEE 802 Networks 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 1191 Path MTU Discovery 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.
Table 137. General IPv6 Protocols (continued) RFC Full Name # S-Series S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 246 2 (Par tial) IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfiguration 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 246 4 Transmission of IPv6 Packets over Ethernet Networks 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 267 5 IPv6 Jumbograms 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 2711 IPv6 Router Alert Option 8.3.12.0 9.8(0.
Table 138. Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) (continued) RFC# Full Name SSeries/ZSeries S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048TON S6010–ON 2842 Capabilities Advertisement with BGP-4 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 2858 Multiprotocol Extensions for BGP-4 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 2918 Route Refresh Capability for BGP-4 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 3065 Autonomous System Confederations for BGP 7.8.1 9.
Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) The following table lists the Dell EMC Networking OS support per platform for IS-IS protocol. Table 140. Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) RFC# Full Name S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 1142 OSI IS-IS Intra-Domain Routing Protocol (ISO DP 10589) 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 1195 Use of OSI IS-IS for Routing in TCP/IP and Dual Environments 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.
Routing Information Protocol (RIP) The following table lists the Dell EMC Networking OS support per platform for RIP protocol. Table 141. Routing Information Protocol (RIP) RF C# Full Name S-Series S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 105 8 Routing Information Protocol 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 245 RIP Version 3 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 4191 Default Router Preferences and More-Specific Routes 8.3.12.0 9.8(0.
Table 143. Network Management (continued) RFC# Full Name S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 1156 Management Information Base for Network Management of TCP/IP-based internets 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 1157 A Simple Network Management 7.6.1 Protocol (SNMP) 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 1212 Concise MIB Definitions 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.
Table 143. Network Management (continued) RFC# Full Name 2575 S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON View-based Access Control 7.6.1 Model (VACM) for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 2576 Coexistence Between Version 1, Version 2, and Version 3 of the Internet-standard Network Management Framework 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.
Table 143. Network Management (continued) RFC# Full Name S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 3418 Management Information Base (MIB) for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 3434 Remote Monitoring MIB Extensions for High Capacity Alarms, High-Capacity Alarm Table (64 bits) 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 3580 IEEE 802.
Table 143. Network Management (continued) RFC# Full Name S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON IEEE Management Information Base 802.1A module for LLDP configuration, B statistics, local system data and remote systems data components. 7.7.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) IEEE The LLDP Management 802.1A Information Base extension B module for IEEE 802.1 organizationally defined discovery information. (LLDP DOT1 MIB and LLDP DOT3 MIB) 7.7.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.
Table 143. Network Management (continued) RFC# Full Name FORC E10-IFEXTEN SIONMIB S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON Force10 Enterprise IF Extension 7.6.1 MIB (extends the Interfaces portion of the MIB-2 (RFC 1213) by providing proprietary SNMP OIDs for other counters displayed in the "show interfaces" output) 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) FORC E10LINKA GGMIB Force10 Enterprise Link Aggregation MIB 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.
Table 143. Network Management (continued) RFC# Full Name S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON ALAR M-MIB MIB Location You can find Force10 MIBs under the Force10 MIBs subhead on the Documentation page of iSupport: https://www.force10networks.com/CSPortal20/KnowledgeBase/Documentation.aspx You also can obtain a list of selected MIBs and their OIDs at the following URL: https://www.force10networks.com/CSPortal20/Main/Login.aspx Some pages of iSupport require a login.
65 X.509v3 supports X.509v3 standards. Topics: • • • • • • • • • Introduction to X.509v3 certificates X.509v3 support in Information about installing CA certificates Information about Creating Certificate Signing Requests (CSR) Information about installing trusted certificates Transport layer security (TLS) Online Certificate Status Protocol (OSCP) Verifying certificates Event logging Introduction to X.509v3 certificates X.
Advantages of X.509v3 certificates Public key authentication is preferred over password-based authentication, although both may be used in conjunction, for various reasons. Public-key authentication provides the following advantages over normal password-based authentication: ● Public-key authentication avoids the human problems of low-entropy password selection and provides more resistance to brute-force attacks than password-based authentication.
The other hosts on the network, such as the SUT switch, syslog server, and OCSP server, generate private keys and create Certificate Signing Requests (CSRs). The hosts then upload the CSRs to the Intermediate CA or make the CSRs available for the Intermediate CA to download. generates a CSR using the crypto cert generate request command. The hosts on the network (SUT, syslog, OCSP…) also download and install the CA certificates from the Root and Intermediate CAs.
After the CA certificate is installed, the system can secure communications with TLS servers by verifying certificates that are signed by the CA. Installing CA certificate To install a CA certificate, enter the crypto ca-cert install {path} command in Global Configuration mode. Information about Creating Certificate Signing Requests (CSR) Certificate Signing Request (CSR) enables a device to get a X.509v3 certificate from a CA. In order for a device to get a X.
● ● ● ● ● Common Name Email address Validity Length Alternate Name NOTE: The command contains multiple options with the Common Name being a required field and blanks being filled in for unspecified fields. Information about installing trusted certificates Dell EMC Networking OS also enables you to install a trusted certificate. The system can then present this certificate for authentication to clients such as SSH and HTTPS.
TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA TLS compression is disabled by default. TLS session resumption is also supported to reduce processor and traffic overhead due to public key cryptographic operations and handshake traffic.
Configuring OCSP behavior You can configure how the OCSP requests and responses are signed when the CA or the device contacts the OCSP responders. To configure this behavior, follow this step: In CONFIGURATION mode, enter the following command: crypto x509 ocsp {[nonce] [sign-request]} Both the none and sign-request parameters are optional. The default behavior is to not use these two options.
Verifying Client Certificates Verifying client certificates is optional in the TLS protocol and is not explicitly required by Common Criteria. However, TLS-protected Syslog and RADIUS protocols mandate that certificate-based mutual authentication be performed. Event logging The system logs the following events: ● A CA certificate is installed or deleted. ● A self-signed certificate and private key are generated. ● An existing host certificate, a private key, or both are deleted.
